[begin page 363]
[begin page 364]
[begin page 365]
The title page for Adventures of Huckleberry Finn described the book’s setting as the Mississippi Valley “forty to fifty years ago,” that is, between about 1835 and 1845 (counting back from the book’s American publication date in 1885). An earlier version of the title page set the story “forty years ago” or about 1845 (see the explanatory note to xxix.6). This was the period of Clemens’s childhood in Missouri: the family moved to Hannibal in 1839 when Samuel Clemens was four years old. He left in 1853 at the age of seventeen, and made only a few brief return visits. The geography of the fictional St. Petersburg and Jackson’s Island, which correspond to Hannibal and Glasscock’s Island, borrows from his boyhood memory of the area. His firsthand knowledge of the rest of the river valley dates primarily from the years 1857 to 1861, when he worked as a pilot on steamboats plying between St. Louis and New Orleans. During these years he probably consulted the standard piloting guides of the 1840s and 1850s by George Conclin, Samuel Cummings, and U. P. James. The only river guide he is known to have owned, however, was a much earlier one, Zadok Cramer’s The Navigator, which went through twelve editions between 1801 and 1824 (Gribben 1980, 2:914).
In 1882, during a three-year gap of work on Huckleberry Finn, Mark Twain began work on Life on the Mississippi. He revisited the river in April and May. He made copious notes, but he found the river and the towns along its banks transformed since his piloting days. “The river is so thoroughly changed that I can’t bring it back to mind even when the changes have been pointed out to me,” he noted. “It is like a man pointing out to me a place in the sky where a cloud has been” (N&J2 , 530). He ordered up-to-date, detailed maps from the Mississippi River Commission and the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, and he read a number of travel accounts written in the first half of the century. They proved disappointing. “I drudged through all those old books, mainly to find out what the procession of foreign tourists thought of the river towns of the Mississippi. But as a general thing, they forgot to say” (SLC 1944, 411; Kruse 1981, 48–53, 165–66; Blair 1960a, 294–99; Branch and Hirst, 37–38).
When in 1883 he returned to Huckleberry Finn, Mark Twain still had the bulk of Huck’s adventures on the river below Cairo to write. Despite his stock of memories, his recent river trip, and the research he had done
[begin page 366]
Throughout the novel, Mark Twain appropriates aspects of real places in his descriptions, without intending a specific identification. His uncle’s Missouri farm, for instance, contributes to the descriptions of both the Grangerford house and the Phelps plantation (see the explanatory notes to 136.15–17 and 276.18). Similarly, the two towns that Huck and Jim encounter below Cairo recall Columbus and Hickman, Kentucky, in their basic topography and relative positions, but not their distance from Cairo (see the explanatory note to 129.23). Bricksville, where the “Royal Nonesuch” is performed, owes something of its character to Napoleon, Arkansas, although new evidence from the manuscript shows that Mark Twain originally located Bricksville in Council Bend, over one hundred miles upriver of Napoleon (see the explanatory note to 180.8–9). He eventually deleted the reference to Council Bend, perhaps in accordance with his decision to avoid such specifics. As some scholars have pointed out, this deliberate lack of geographic detail, coupled with the “extraordinary lyrical intensity” of Huck’s descriptions of the natural world (Marx 1957, 138), give the raft trip a dream-like dimension: it becomes an “unfettered voyage
[begin page 367]
The five maps that follow here are intended to represent some of the real geography on which Mark Twain relied in writing his story. When he used a fictional name for a real place, it appears within parentheses and in capitals and small capitals below the real name: for example, “Hannibal | (St. Petersburg)”. Not every fictional place is so readily equated with a real one. When the link is more tentative, the fictional name is preceded by “Vicinity of,” still within parentheses, and the rationale for the identification is discussed in the explanatory notes.
■ Mississippi River Valley, ca. 1845. Based on the frontispiece from Mighty Mississippi (Childs), this map also draws on plates 19 and 20 of the Century Atlas (Benjamin E. Smith, xix, xx), and an 1849 map of the river in Appletons’ Hand-Book (Hall, following page 428). It shows the valley during the period of the novel and of Clemens’s boyhood. (The system of citation used here is discussed at the beginning of the explanatory notes.)
■ Hannibal, ca. 1845. This map is based on the following: “Plat of Original Town of Hannibal,” dated 1836 (photofacsimile in CU-MARK), which provides the configuration of the town proper; “Map of the Mississippi River from the Falls of St. Anthony to the Junction of the Illinois River” (U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, 1887–88, DLC), which provides the Missouri and Illinois shorelines. No precisely scaled map has been found that shows Glasscock’s Island at the time Clemens knew it, and later maps demonstrate no consensus about its size and location. This map, therefore, relies on Mark Twain’s description of the island in chapters 7–9 of Huckleberry Finn and the virtually identical description, adjusted for the June rise of the river, in Tom Sawyer, chapters 13–15.
■ Bainbridge to Commerce, Mo., ca. 1857 (Vicinity of Walter Scott Wreck). Based on a river guide contemporary with Clemens’s career as a steamboat pilot (James, 25, 27), this map also draws on “Map of the Alluvial Valley of the Upper Mississippi River from the Falls of St. Anthony to the Mouth of the Ohio River” (Mississippi River Commission, 1899, CU-MAPS).
■ Cairo, ca. 1857. Based on maps provided in two contemporary river guides (Conclin, 65, 89, and James, 27). This map represents the area as Clemens knew it during his career as a steamboat pilot.
■ New Madrid Bend (Vicinity of Feud). Based on “Lloyd’s Map of the Lower Mississippi River from St. Louis to the Gulf of Mexico . . . Revised and corrected to the present time, by Captains Bart. and William Bowen” (J. T. Lloyd, 1862, DLC); “Map of a Reconnaissance of the Mississippi
[begin page 368]
[begin page 369]
[begin page 370]
(Vicinity of Walter Scott Wreck)
[begin page 371]
(Vicinity of Feud)
[begin page 372]
[begin page 373]
These notes identify real people, places, books, and events that Mark Twain drew upon for Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. They document historical, literary, and cultural allusions, parallels, analogues, or influences, both in the text and in E. W. Kemble’s illustrations. They identify important moments in the seven-year course of composition and in the process of revision and first publication: when Mark Twain wrote or revised parts of the text, when he stopped or resumed work on them, how he struggled with or commented on them. References to the manuscript may distinguish between its newly discovered first half (MS1) and its long familiar second half (MS2), now both in the Buffalo and Erie County Public Library. References to the typed copies of MS1 and MS2 which Mark Twain had made are to the documents which served as Kemble’s and the first edition printer’s copy, but the typescripts themselves are not known to survive. What they probably contained and how Mark Twain revised them are matters inferred from the manuscript, the first edition set from the typescripts, and other evidence. For the history of composition, revision, publication, and reception, see the introduction. References to the text are keyed to this volume by page and line: 3.10 means page 3, line 10. Chapter titles and picture captions are not included in the line count, but when they are referred to, the word title or caption is substituted for the line number: 3 caption means the caption on page 3. Frequently cited books have been assigned an abbreviation, always italicized, which is followed by a page (or volume and page) number: “MTBus, 21” or “MTL , 1:456–57.” But most works are cited by the author’s last name, followed by page number, unless there is only one page: “Abbott, 16–17” or simply “Pease.” When two or more works by the same author are cited, the year of publication differentiates them: “Budd 1985, 1” or “Budd 1962, 34–76.” For works likely to be consulted in any of various editions, citations give chapter numbers (or book, canto, or act numbers) rather than page numbers. Quotations of Mark Twain’s published work are from critically edited texts produced by the Mark Twain Project or from the first printings, as necessary. Quotations from original documents follow their wording and punctuation exactly, even when a published form is also cited and may differ slightly from the original. Repositories of unique documents are identified by the standard Library of Congress abbreviation.
[begin page 374]
[begin page 377]
[begin page 383]
[begin page 385]
[begin page 387]
[begin page 390]
[begin page 395]
[begin page 399]
[begin page 413]
[begin page 415]
[begin page 417]
[begin page 418]
[begin page 420]
[begin page 425]
[begin page 433]
[begin page 436]
[begin page 438]
[begin page 442]
[begin page 444]
[begin page 448]
[begin page 449]
[begin page 452]
Among the lasting achievements of Huckleberry Finn is the ready accessibility of its language: most of its words and idiomatic expressions still require no gloss. We have, therefore, confined the entries here to words and phrases about which there is likely to be genuine uncertainty, or about which we have specialized knowledge pertinent to Mark Twain’s meaning. When vernacular words or phrases (most oaths, for example) are wholly intelligible, we have not defined them. When words or phrases are to a degree obscure and are not readily found in Webster’s Third New International Dictionary of the English Language, we have included them. If a word has more than one meaning (for instance, “spread-eagle”), some of which are in Webster’s and some not, we define only the omitted meaning. A few troublesome dialect spellings are glossed only with the canonical spelling, as an aid to finding the definition in Webster’s. A few words and phrases have proved more readily defined in the explanatory notes, to which the reader is referred in each case. All entries have been alphabetized letter by letter, always beginning with the first word of a phrase, even when that is a preposition.
The following dictionaries, glossaries, and other sources have been used to prepare the definitions: Bartlett; Bates; Burchfield; Century Dictionary; Clapin; Craigie; De Vere; Farmer; Farmer and Henley; Gove; Louis C. Hunter; Maitland; Mitford M. Mathews; Neilson, Knott, and Carhart; OED 1933; Partridge; Ramsay and Emberson; Smyth; Thornton; Watts; Way; Webster [1870], 1884, 1889, and 1894; Wentworth; and Worcester.
allycumpain] Elecampane: hardy, European herb naturalized in the United States and commonly used in folk medicine. A white powder made by boiling the root is applied externally or internally, for lung diseases and for skin disorders, such as psoriasis and eczema. Spelling varied widely in the nineteenth century: elicampene, alycompaine, allicampane.ash-hopper] Funnel-shaped bin in which wood ashes were leached of their alkali, which was in turn used to make soap.
[begin page 453]
beat] Idler, loafer, good-for-nothing. Short for “dead beat.”
beatenest] Unsurpassable, not able to be “beaten”; hence, most extraordinary, inexplicable, unaccountable.
big water] The Mississippi River, a translation of the Indian name for the river, from which “Mississippi” is supposed to derive. Huck also says “the old regular Muddy” to refer to the river (129.23).
bitts] Sturdy posts for securing cables on a steamboat. They were fastened in pairs to the deck. About three feet high, the bitts had a cross-piece above the midpoint, forming an H. Kemble has drawn what a riverman would call a “kevel” (illustration on page 89).
blister] Nuisance, irritating creature, characterized by an overweening, irrational persistence.
boom] To go at full speed, roar along.
booming] Splendid, grand, superb (135.16); very, extremely (208.35).
boss] Term of address used toward ostensible superiors, strangers, often by blacks speaking to whites (103.20); best, first-rate, supreme (215.16).
bottoms] Alluvial flood plain of a river, the “river bottom” during flood-stage. Usually fertile, low-lying, and flat. See Huck’s description of the “Illinois bottom” (60.12).
break-down] See the explanatory note to 111.38–112.1.
by de back] Thoroughly. Apparently a reference to marked cards, as in one of Mark Twain’s columns in the Virginia City Territorial Enterprise: “Mr. McCormick, who should be on the detective force regularly, but as yet is there only by brevet, can tell an obscene photograph by the back, as a sport tells an ace from a jack” (“San Francisco Letter,” dated 19 December 1865, clipping in YSMT, 42A). Similarly, in Following the Equator: “I know you—I know you ‘by the back,’ as the gamblers say” (chapter 28).
captain’s door] Door by which the captain entered and left his room in the texas. Huck’s description places it in the center of the forward wall. See diagram, page 405.
[begin page 454]
chute] Narrow channel or bayou outside the main part of the river, navigable only in middle to high water.
close place] Uncomfortably delicate or dangerous position. Huck also says “tight place” (239.6) and “close-fit” (257.15) to mean the same thing.
coarse-hand] Block, as opposed to cursive, lettering. Huck also says “coarse print” (242.20) to mean the same thing.
coase comb] Coarse comb: a comb with large or widely spaced teeth, the opposite of a fine-tooth comb. Used as a crude musical instrument by wrapping it in paper and blowing against the side.
come any such game on] To play any such trick on.
Congress-water] Mineral water bottled at Congress Spring in Saratoga, New York.
cross-hall] Narrow hallway at right angles to the texas hall, opening through a door onto the hurricane deck on both sides of the texas. Usually about two-thirds of the way from the captain’s door to the stern of the texas. See diagram, page 405.
crossing] See the explanatory note to 78.23–29.
cross off] To thwart, obstruct, hinder.
dam] To bear young.
dead beat] Worthless idler who never pays his own way, sponger, loafer.
dog my cats] Mild imprecation (“dog” for “damn”), suggesting surprise or annoyance. It can also be found in the contemporary dialect writing of Clemens’s friends John Hay and Joel Chandler Harris (Hay 1871, 22; Joel Chandler Harris 1883a, 9).
double-hull ferry boat] Steam ferryboat in which the deck is supported by two distinct hulls, with the paddle-wheel situated between them.
down in de bills] Written down in the specifications, hence predestined, foreordained.
down the banks] Scolding, reprimand.
fox-fire] Rotten wood that emits phosphorescent light (caused by fungi).
freeze] To yearn, long for intensely (169.15); to cling to, hold firmly or tenaciously (282.10).
[begin page 455]
gars] Long, spear-like fish of various kinds, commonly deemed inedible.
gone to grass] Gone to the devil, expired, ruined.
grand bulge] Most difficult or critical phase of an enterprise.
gumption] Sense, practical understanding, quick perception of the right thing to do under unusual circumstances.
hark from the tomb] Serious or earnest reproof, as in Isaac Watts’s “A Funeral Thought”:“Hark! from the tombs a doleful sound; | My ears, attend the cry— | ‘Ye living men, come, view the ground | Where you must shortly lie.’ ”
have it for breakfast] To save or postpone something.
hive] To capture, catch, get (14.33); to appropriate, take without permission, steal (225.33).
holt] Hold, grip, grasp. A “best holt” is one’s specialty or title to attention (161.4); “let go all holts” means to relax one’s grip, hence to abandon all restraint (284.23).
hollow] See the explanatory note to 15.3.
horse-bill] Handbill advertising a stallion available for breeding.
hunch] To nudge.
jackstaff] Pole on the bowsprit of a steamboat, used as a steering aid by the pilot, who aligned it with a given point on the horizon. See diagram, page 405.
janders] Jaundice.
jour printer] Journeyman printer: one who has completed his apprenticeship and is qualified to practice the trade, usually taking work by the day. See the explanatory note to 160.37.
juice-harp] Jew’s harp.
law] Lord (also “laws”). “Lawsy” (128.5) derives from “Lordy,” “law sakes” (278.6) from “for the Lord’s sake”; “laws-a-me” (278.18) and “lawsamercy” (348.38) derive from “Lord have mercy.”
meeky] To move in a retiring manner.
melodeum] Melodion (or melodium): a reed organ, resembling a small square piano, popular in the nineteenth century. One variety, when the single foot-pump was operated inexpertly, produced a displeasingly uneven sound.
[begin page 456]
mullet-headed] Stupid, dull. A mullethead is a variety of freshwater fish known for its stupidity.
nigger-head] Strong, black tobacco of an inferior grade, twisted or pressed into a flat cake or plug.
pat juba] See the explanatory note to 111.37–38.
pilot house] Topmost structure on a steamboat, housing the wheel and signaling devices used by the pilot. It was usually situated above the texas, far forward on the texas deck, with windows on all sides—all but the forward side glassed in. See diagram, page 405.
pow-wow] To hold a meeting for discussion, to confer (14.35); any kind of din, uproar, loud noise or racket (158.22).
quarter] To sustain a position behind a vessel. The view from any vessel is divided into four parts: the port bow and starboard bow forward, and the port quarter and starboard quarter astern.
sand in my craw] Pluck, courage, determination. Huck also says “sand” for short (244.11). A bird’s craw uses sand to digest hard morsels like seeds; hence, to have “sand in your craw” is to be able to digest or face something difficult.
scoop] To grab, gather up without ceremony, often surreptitiously (15.7); to vanquish, gain the advantage of, beat (326.24).
scrouch] To scrooch, crouch, or huddle down.
shake the reefs out of my hind legs] To put on speed. From the nautical expression “to shake out a reef,” that is, to enlarge a sail by unfurling one of its smaller reef sections, thereby increasing speed.
show up] To present (oneself) for scrutiny or examination.
size their style] To equal or match their characteristic manner; to estimate correctly their level of sophistication.
skylight] Short for “skylight roof,” the part of the texas deck covering the skylight, a row of transom-like windows (often stained or etched) that ran the length of or even wholly encompassed the main cabin. See diagram, page 405.
slept in our cravats] Were hanged.
slop] To plod, tramp, or travel through a place in mud or slush. At 75.28–29 Huck “slopped through the timber” to gain dry land, and at 149.32 the Grangerford’s slave “slopped” back through the swamp where he
[begin page 457]
soul-butter] Pious and sentimental words, perhaps in the sense of unctuous self-flattery.
spread around] To assume airs, show off.
spread-eagle] Extravagant (170.7).
stand from under] To avoid something falling or thrown from aloft, hence to get to a safe place, avoid danger or punishment.
swap around] To change from one place or subject to another (2.13) (also “swap about,” 45.13). To “swap knives” is to change plans or tactics (282.4).
texas] Officers’ cabin of a steamboat, situated on the hurricane deck, usually below the pilothouse and above the main cabin (see diagram, page 405).
tow-head] Small, recently formed island. Huck defines it as “a sand-bar that has cotton-woods on it as thick as harrow-teeth” (77.25). Mark Twain elsewhere wrote “tow-head (i.e., new island),” a definition for which he recorded the supposed etymology: “Towhead means infant—an infant island, a growing island—so it is said” (Life on the Mississippi, chapter 23; N&J2, 471).
tow-linen] Coarse cloth woven from spun flax, hemp, or jute.
trot-line] Long, sturdy fishing line to which shorter hooked lines are attached at intervals. Secured at one end to the river bank, it was used primarily to catch bottom feeders, such as catfish.
up to the hub] Deeply, fully, without reservation. The reference is to a wheel sunk up to the axle in mud.
valley] Valet.
whollop] Wallop.
without a j’int started] Effortlessly, without strain, without displacing a single joint.
wood-flat] Raft or barge for transporting wood.
wood-rank] Stacked firewood, wood-pile.
yaller-jackets] Gold coins. Huck also says “yaller-boys” to mean the same thing (214.15).
[begin page 458]
[begin page 459]
[begin page 460]
[begin page 461]
Mark Twain’s working notes for Adventures of Huckleberry Finn show him developing the plot and considering alternatives for it, reviewing his work, perfecting the dialect of his characters, and reminding himself to tie up loose ends. In addition, they provide physical and textual evidence about the course of composition. All the extant working notes are reproduced here except for the notes he wrote in the margins of his manuscript, which are transcribed in Mark Twain’s Marginal Working Notes. In addition, there are a number of notebook entries written between 1877 and 1883 (including those for his 1882 river trip) which are to some degree relevant to the composition of the book. These entries have been published in full in N&J2 and N&J3 , and they are selectively cited here.
A total of twenty-nine manuscript pages—all in the Mark Twain Papers (CU-MARK)—are reproduced both in photofacsimile of the original manuscripts and in typographic transcription with accompanying footnotes. This extra measure of care is justified in light of the extraordinary influence these documents have had and still promise to have on our understanding of how and when Mark Twain wrote Huckleberry Finn. Bernard DeVoto pointed out that they “cast a flood of light on the writing of Huckleberry Finn” as well as on “the working of Mark’s mind and talent” (DeVoto 1942, 63).
Each group of working notes is largely consistent as to paper and writing medium. The exceptions are minor—a few words in pencil on a page of ink notes or vice versa, one leaf of differing paper in groups 1 and 2. The order of some of the pages within each group is somewhat arbitrary, although the appearance of the paper and handwriting and the styling and content of the entries often suggest a certain sequence.
Twenty-six pages of the working notes were first transcribed, grouped, and numbered by DeVoto (DeVoto 1942, 61–78). The groups are renamed and renumbered in this appendix to conform with a new chronological sequence. See the list below for the new numbers and equivalent DeVoto numbers. Three additional pages, not identified by DeVoto, are reproduced here. One, 3-14, is added to Group 3, and the remaining two, 4-1 and 4-2, comprise Group 4, a version of the burlesque Hamlet soliloquy in chapter 21.
[begin page 462]
| Group 1 [DeVoto’s Group B] | |||||
| 1-1 [B-2] | 1-2 [B-1] | ||||
| Group 2 [DeVoto’s Group A] | |||||
| 2-1 [A-7] | 2-2 [A-1] | 2-3 [A-2] | 2-4 [A-3] | ||
| 2-5 [A-4] | 2-6 [A-5] | 2-7 [A-6] | 2-8 [A-8] | ||
| 2-9 [A-9] | 2-10 [A-10] | 2-11 [A-11] | |||
| Group 3 [DeVoto’s Group C] | |||||
| 3-1 [C-1] | 3-2 [C-2] | 3-3 [C-3] | 3-4 [C-4] | ||
| 3-5 [C-5] | 3-6 [C-6] | 3-7 [C-7] | 3-8 [C-8] | ||
| 3-9 [C-9] | 3-10 [C-10] | 3-11 [C-11] | 3-12 [C-12] | ||
| 3-13 [C-13] | 3-14 [not in DeVoto] | ||||
| Group 4 [not in DeVoto] |
Within each group of notes the facsimiles precede the typographic transcriptions, which stop short of type facsimiles: they do not, for instance, necessarily reproduce the lineation of the manuscripts. But they are otherwise as faithful as possible to every transcribable detail of the originals, including several brief entries not noticed or transcribed by DeVoto.
Words underscored once are rendered in italics, words underscored twice are in small capitals (with Initial Capitals if so inscribed), and words underscored three times are in FULL CAPITALS. Canceled text is shown with a horizontal rule (“buttons”) or, for solitary characters, a slash mark (“T”). (Note that Mark Twain’s deletions sometimes indicate not that he rejected an idea, but that he had used it in the story.) Inserted words or characters appear enclosed by carets (“old”); solitary inserted characters appear with a single sublinear caret (“n”). Words that Mark Twain revised internally are transcribed showing the canceled and the revised form separately (“HarveyHarney” rather than the more literal but less legible “Harvney”). Words added in ink or pencil different from the original inscription are transcribed in boldface type. Where part of the original inscription has been torn away or otherwise obscured, the original reading of the text is conjectured within square brackets: shirt. Editorial description within the text itself is always within square brackets and in italic type: added in the left margin. All superscript numbers for footnotes are editorial. All inscription not by Mark Twain has been ignored in the transcription.
[begin page 463]
Mark Twain wrote these notes (formerly designated as Group B) on two disparate leaves, possibly at different times but certainly between 1876 and 1880. For the most part, he seems to be reviewing his earliest pages (MS1a pages 1–446, written in 1876) and refreshing his memory of characters and situations. He refers to specific passages by word cue and manuscript page number, and he copies marginal notations from the MS1a pages. Unlike the Group 2 and Group 3 working notes, the Group 1 notes do not sketch out ideas for the next section of the book (MS1b pages 447 through 663, written in 1880).
Mark Twain used pencil for all the Group 1 notes: page 1-1 is a torn half-sheet of unlined wove paper bearing the watermark “Antique Parchment Note Paper” and measuring 17.3 by 11.3 centimeters (6 13/16 by 4 7/16 inches); page 1-2 is a torn half-sheet of Crystal-Lake Mills wove paper, the same paper on which most of the first half of the manuscript is written (MS1a, pages 1–446).
Within this section:
1-1 | 1-2
[begin page 464]
[begin page 466]
2/Widow Douglas—then who is “Miss Watson?”
Ah, she’s W D’s sister.—old spinster1
219 218—the dead man is Huck’s father.
223 the ″ ″ again
244 more about Finn—his disappearance.
270 (overflowed banks?)
273—river “pretty high yet” but maybe not overflowed.2
Let Jim say putty for “pretty” & nuvver for “never”3
[begin page 465]
[begin page 468]
The combined evidence of paper and ink color suggests that the notes in Group 2 (formerly designated as Group A), like the MS1b pages, were probably written between March and mid-June 1880. (It was in late March that Mark Twain, then working in purple ink on wove paper, put aside the manuscript of The Prince and the Pauper.) The 1880 period was the second of Mark Twain’s three major stints of work on Huckleberry Finn, when he wrote MS1b pages 447 through 663 (the second half of chapter 18 and all of chapters 19 through 21). It is clear that the eleven pages of Group 2 notes were not all written at one session. Most of the pages contain ideas for the MS1b section, while some look ahead to the final section of the book (MS2). One note in pencil on the back of 2-10 was added in 1883.
Mark Twain wrote these notes on eleven leaves: 2-1 through 2-10 on ten torn half-sheets of unlined wove paper, the same paper as that used for MS1b pages 447 through 663; and 2-11 on a torn half-sheet of laid paper, ruled horizontally in blue and embossed “P&P” (probably for Platner & Porter, the Connecticut paper manufacturer) in the upper left corner. (He used this stationery sporadically, for personal letters and literary manuscript, in the 1870s and in 1880: see Blair 1958, 7-8.) The notes are in the same purple ink used for MS1b pages 447 through 663, except for an addition in blue ink on 2-8 and a few added notations in pencil on 2-8, 2-9, 2-10, and 2-11. Two pages, 2-2 and 2-3, were numbered “1” and “2” by Mark Twain. Nonetheless, it is clear that page 2-1, with its list of characters from the feud episode, is the earliest page within the group.
Within this section:
2-1 | 2-2 | 2-3 | 2-4
2-5 | 2-6 | 2-7 | 2-8
2-9 | 2-10 | 2-11
[begin page 469]
[begin page 480]
George Jackson (Huck)1
Shepherdsons.
Bob & Tom Grangerford 28 & 30.abt 30.
old man (Saul) Col. ″ 60
Betsy (negro) ″
old lady (Rachel) ″
Buck ″ 12–14
Emmeline (dead) ″
Charlotte (proud & grand) ″ 25
Sophia (sweet & gentle) ″ 20
HarveyHarney Shepherdson
[begin page 470]
[begin page continued 480]
1
DE MULE.
Negro campmeeting & sermon—“See dat sinner how he run.”1
Swell Sunday costumes of negros.2
Poor white family & cabin at woodyard in Walnut Bend. Capt. Ed. Montgomery.3
The Burning Shame boys give bill of sale of Jim. at Napoleon, Ark.4
Legend of No. 10 Earthquake.5
o
Describe Lara.6
[begin page 471]
[begin page continued 482]
Rich III—15¢—B.S.1 50c
2
Being in a close place, Huck boldly offers to sell Jim—the latter turns pale but dasn’t speak—secretly is supported in the trial by firm belief that Huck is incapable of betraying him.
Huck gets decent suit of jeans.
They go down a bayou into Reelfoot Lake?
Up a bayou where are alligators.
Tow-linen shirts or naked.
[begin page 472]
[begin page continued 482]
Let some old liar of a keel-boatman on a raft tell about the earthquake of 1811. that raised No. 10—& mak made Reelfoot Lake &c.
& about Carpenter & Mike Fink—1
& Murrell’s gang (darkly hint he belonged to it)—No. 37 & Devil’s race-track2
shabby families.
[begin page 473]
[begin page continued 483]
Mrs. Holliday,1
The trading scow & family.
The scow with theatre aboard.2
Ruffian burnt up in Calaboose.3
A house-raising.
Village school—they haze Huck, the first day—describe Dawsons or Miss N.’s school.4
Fire in village—buckets & “bigBig Mo.” engine & swell village fire Co.5
Dog fight—del describe in detail.
[begin page 474]
[begin page continued 484]
The country cotillion.
The horse-trade.
Country quilting.
Candy-pulling.
Country funeral.
Describe aunt Patsy’s house.1
& Uncle Dan, aunt Hanner, & the 90-year blind negress.2
(Jim has fever & is in concealment while Huck makes these observations.)
(Keep ’em along.)
&c. The two printers deliver temp. lectures, teach dancing, elocution, feel heads, distribute tracts, preach, fiddle, doctor (quack)3
[begin page 475]
[begin page continued 485]
The circus—Huck’s astonishment when the drunkard invades the ring, scuffles with clown, & ring-master, then rides & strips.1
Can’t he escape from somewhere on the elephant?
An overflowed Arkansaw town. River booms up in the night.2
[begin page 476]
on verso
[begin page continued 485]
Dinner manners at the tavern with a crowd.
Drunken man rides in the circus.
How funny the clown was—quote his jokes. & how the people received them—Huck envies him.
Duel with rifles. 1 written in dark blue ink
A village graveyard written in pencil
written on the verso: 6642
[begin page 477]
[begin page continued 486]
When did the raft pass St Louis? Is there any mention of it? Yes 1
Negro Sermons.2
Burning Shame
Do the mesmeric foolishness, with Huck & the king for performers 3
Jim sawed in two.
po’ $22-nigger will set in Heaven wid de $1500 niggers.
[begin page 478]
on
verso:
[begin page continued 486]
Back a little, change—raft only crippled by steamer.1
written on the verso: 81–44 2
[begin page 479]
[begin page continued 487]
A lynching scene. 1
A wake.
Put in.
scrub race
L. A. punished her child several days for disobediencerefusing to answer? & inattention (5 yr old) then while punishing discovered it was deaf & dumb & dumb! (from scarlet fever). T It showed no reproachfulness for the whippings—kissed the punisher & showed non-comprehension of what it was all about.
[begin page 488]
Mark Twain probably wrote the Group 3 (formerly designated as Group C) notes during spring and summer 1883, when he was completing his book. They include ideas for changes to the chapters he had already written (see 3-3, note 1, and 3-4, notes 3 and 4), ideas for the chapters he had yet to write (3-9 through 3-13), and lists of characters and dialect usages (3-1 and 3-2). They record the minutest details, as well as the broadest possible scenarios: on 3-9, for example, Mark Twain determined the number of hound dogs that would squeeze into Jim’s cabin in chapter 36; and on 3-8 he imagined an episode in which Tom and Huck would adventure around the countryside on an elephant.
This group of notes (except for 3-14) is the last of the three identified by DeVoto. Page 3-14 has been included here because its physical properties match those of the other thirteen pages. They were written on eleven torn half-sheets and two full sheets (3-3 and 3-9/3-10) of Old Berkshire Mills stationery, the same stationery used for the second half of the book (MS2). The top portion, about two-fifths, of page 3-1 was torn off and has not survived. The verso of the page contains notes for Mark Twain’s burlesque “1,002. An Oriental Tale,” which he completed in July 1883, the same summer in which he finished Huckleberry Finn. All the notes are in pencil, except for a few additions on 3-2 and 3-13 in black ink. Mark Twain’s references by word cue and page number are to the lost typescript (TS1), which was prepared from the manuscript (MS1) of much of chapters 1-21 in late 1882 or early 1883. Where possible, these references are identified by page and line in the present text. Identifications have been determined in part by analyzing extant contemporary typescripts of Mark Twain’s letters and literary pieces and by calculating the number of words per page in order to simulate the missing TS1.
Within this section:
3-1 | 3-2 | 3-3 | 3-4
3-5 | 3-6 | 3-7 | 3-8
3-9 | 3-10 | 3-11 | 3-12
3-13 | 3-14
[begin page 489]
[begin page 503]
|
Jim has wife & 2 children.—90.3
|
|
| $40 from men—95.
|
|
| Sid & Mary, Tom’s sister | Betsy—100
|
| Aunt Polly″aunt | Shepherdson—101
|
| Widow Douglas. | Grangerford—109
|
| Judge Thatcher |
Duke & K—1364
|
| Becky″ (or Bessie?)1 | Another ref—147.
|
Miss Watson, (goggles) sister to Wd Douglas.
″ ″ ’s nigger Jim.
Jo Harper, Ben Rogers (tan yard)
Little Tommy Barnes (Page 13—old Finn supposed to2
Deacon Winn GaveSold $6000 to Judge—p. 19.)
Log raft—36 Plank raft 12 × 16.
Huck’s father in floating house—62.—64.—70.
[begin page 490]
[begin page continued 503]
raff1 ?
Jim— considable hund’d
Nuff’nNuffn—some’n.
kin suffin
W’y, sumfinsumf’n
(mouf. suthin
[begin page 504]
(generly × sumf’n
( sumfn
Huck says Nuther. ef
h’yer reck’n
wouldn’ didn’
W’y
Bat—
43 “Bessie” or Becky?
[begin page 491]
[begin page continued 504]
P. 43. (“Bessie,” or Becky?)
Reflections upon the satisfaction of being a guest at one’s own funeral & with such prime refreshments furnished free.
And bread cast returns—which it don’t & can’t, less’n you heave it upstream—you letcast your bread downstream once, & see. It can’t stem the current; so it can’t come back no more. But the widow she didn’t know no better than to believe it, & it warn’t my business to correct my betters. There’s a heap of ignorance like that, around.1
$40 for Jim—who says “told you I’d be rich agin.”2
[begin page 492]
[begin page 505]
But they hived a nigger that stole a hog.
Let Huck miss Jim—king & duke have sold him.1
Sawed in two, nearly—Huck saves him.
& Jim can be smuggled north on a ship?—no, steamboat.2
143—let ’em tell these adventures.3
Back yonder, Huck reads & tells about monarchies & kings &c. So Jim stares when he learns the rank of these 2.4
They lynch a freenigger.
Solomon with child by de hine laig
Jim cries, to think of his wife & 2 chn5
Talk among Ark family & visitors.6
—using snuff with a stick.
[begin page 493]
[begin page continued 505]
Takes history class among the niggers?
Join Sunday school before 4th July 1
[begin page 506]
Teaches Jim to read & write—then uses dog-messenger. Had taught him a little before.
Desperadoes ride into village shooting promiscuously.2
Huck & Tom.
House-Raising.
Beef-shooting.
Debating Society. 3
Quilting. The world of gossip th of 75 yrs ago, that lies silent, stitched into quilt by hands that long ago lost their taper & silky silkiness & eyes & face their beauty, & all gone down to dust & silence; & to indifference to all gossip.
Cadets Temperance—Masons—Oddfellows—Militia 4 added in the left margin
[begin page 494]
[begin page 507]
He must hear some Arkansas women, over their pipes & knitting (spitting from between teeth), swap reminiscences of Sister this & Brother that, & “what become of so & so?—what was his first wife’s name? Very religious people. Ride 10 or 15 m to church & tie the horses to trees.
Let em drop in ignorant remarks about monarchs in Europe, & mix them up with Biblical monarchs.
Look through notebook & turn everything in.
s’I, sh-she, s-ze, 1
[begin page 495]
[begin page continued 507]
Incident of crazy man whose wife been dead 23 years—chaffs him & lies to him & is sorry afterwards1
Huck exposes k & d—& that makes ’em sell Jim?
Glass eye with mark on back of it—mentioned in letter. When his trunk comes, will prove everything.
The marriage?
Man interrupts at auction.
Then true appear.
Set candle in window.
& tell them not to sigh for me.
Elaborate a supper & then knock out that reference.2
[begin page 496]
[begin page 508]
They can’t play it again—they find everybody talking about it along the river.
So they lecture, &c.1
“He don’t run everage”
interlard this & powder thrown in fire by Silas Phelps.
Farmer has bought an elephant at auction. Gives him to Tom Huck & Jim & they go about the country on him & make no end of trouble.
[begin page 497]
[begin page continued 508]
Tools too handy. (How’ll we get this pen to him?) in a cake, by aunt Sally.
He ain’t satisfied. Ought to be a watchman. Nonnymous note to recommend it. This when they are nearly ready.
Get tin plates for Jim
Dig a moat.
Objects because tools & everything so handy. (Spend many nights in cabin with Jim.)
Saw there, too.
3 weeks getting him out.
make the pens—Huck.
Make rope ladder, now. hiding it as they work.
Butter melts night of escape.
Ladder in pie
The dogs come in through the diggings—11.1 And themselves as ghosts. Nigger watchman faints.
Swallow the sawdust—Huck has to—& Jim. Gives them stomach ache. Blow up cabin?
aunt misses brass candlestick, shirt, sheet, flour &c (for they build the pie.) Uncle reads anonymous notes at table. added in the left margin
[begin page 498]
[begin page 509]
I fetched away a dog, part of the way—I had him by his teeth in my britches, behind.
Brass buttons
Nail in a biscuit—uncle Silas got it (cut em off.) behind)
Children bring in tin plates (with marks)
Jim must disguise in nigger woman’s dress & they in aunt S to get away. Men won’t shoot at women. Scares them away, & then coolly paddles the raft home—& explains.
Steal guns & get away under a volley of blank cartridges.
Smuggle a dirk to jim—yaghtagan—1
Uncle S wishes he would escape—if it warn’t wrong, he’d set him free—but it’s a too r gushy generosity with another man’s property.
They always take along a lunch.
Smuggle powder by Si—he throws it in kitchen fire.
[begin page 499]
[begin page continued 509]
They correspond through dog & marrow bone.
[begin page 500]
[begin page continued 509]
To fall in the dust makes a good disguise
dog-bone messenger.
Wouldn’t give a cent for an adventure that ain’t done in disguise.
[begin page 510]
Cut Jim out of cabin the back way.
Mat an accomplice.1
Notes shoved under door at night, nonnymous.
Tom shot.
3 5 unarmed but desperate men
[begin page 501]
[begin page continued 510]
Got an eye like a door-knob (dragonfly snake doctor) the only creatur of the bird specie that can flydart straight sideways & straight backwards.
in defference
in defferunce
to public opinion—don’t know which how to pronounce it. (He went through the motions of imprisoning Tom in defferunce
Take shirt to him in disguise.
Make pens. Jim does—their hands sore. Jim at it all night.
| spider, flower mouse—rat |
grindstone missed. tin plates do1—notice it when nonnymous letter
comes. shirt. page torn |
considers a Ber-
line2 & coffin
[begin page 502]
[begin page 511]
Publish this in England & Canada & Germany the day before the first number of it appears in S Century or N.Y. Sun—that makes full copyright.1
Turn Jim into an Injun.
Then exhib him for gorilla—then wild man Arab &c., using him for 2 shows same day.
Nigger-skin (shamoi) for sale as a pat med.
Tell me some mo’ histry, Huck.
[begin page 512]
The duke’s recitation of “Hamlet’s Immortal Soliloquy” in chapter 21 is a comic pastiche of some of Shakespeare’s most frequently quoted lines (see the explanatory note to 179.10–39). The original soliloquy was written on four pages that were subsequently incorporated into MS1b (618-21), on the same paper and in the same purple ink as the other MS1b pages (see Alterations in the Manuscript). It cannot have been written later than 1880, and, with a few minor changes, matches the text in the first edition. The version of the soliloquy included here as Group 4 (formerly designated as Group D) was written on a letter from Charles L. Webster to Olivia L. Clemens, dated 19 March 1883. It cannot be a draft as previously thought (Blair 1958, 19–20; HF 1988 , 758), but must represent Mark Twain’s unproductive attempt to recall or tinker with his earlier text. Minor variations in the 1883 version as to punctuation and lineation were probably not intended as revisions, but were more likely caused by his failure to recreate the passage from memory. Of the few substantive variants, only one became part of the published text (see note 2, below).
Webster’s letter takes up one side of a folder of stationery, and Mark Twain used two of the three remaining blank sides for the soliloquy, which is written in pencil. It is reproduced here in facsimile. Each side of the folder measures 20.3 by 12.7 centimeters (8 by 5 inches), is made of laid paper with chain lines 2.4 centimeters (15/16 inch) apart, and bears the watermark “Pure Irish Linen F. H. D. & Co.” The notation “Mch 19,” written upside-down at the bottom of the second page of the soliloquy, was made by Albert Bigelow Paine.
Within this section:
4-1 | 4-2
[begin page 513]
[begin page 515]
Makes calamity of so long life,
For who would fardels bear, till Birnam wood do come to Dunsinane,
But that the fear of something after death
Murders the innocent sleep,
Great Nature’s second course,
And makes us rather sling the arrows of outrageous fortune
Than fly to others that we know not of.
That is the
There lies the deep damnation of our taking off——1
Wake Duncan with thy knocking!
I would thou couldst—2
For who would bear the whips & scorns of time, the oppressor’s wrong, the proud man’s contumely, the insolence of office & the pangs which he himself might take
In the dead waste & middle of the night,3
When churchyards yawn
In customary suits of solemn black
[begin page 514]
[begin page continued 515]
From whose bourn no traveller returns
Breathes forth contagion on the world
Breathes forth contagion on the world—
& all the clouds &c, with th
[begin page 516]
(like the poor cat ’i’ the adage,)
With this regard their currents turn awry,
& lose the NAME of action.
Tis a consummation devoutly to be wished— —sh—sh—
But soft you, the fair Ophelia!
Ope not thy ponderous & marble jaws
But get thee to a nunnery—go.
[begin page 517]
Mark Twain wrote the working notes presented below in the margins of his manuscript for Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. They remind him of plot details, suggest subjects that might be developed, record alternate word choices, and dialectal spellings, and in general they demonstrate Mark Twain’s intention to avoid minor contradictions or inconsistencies. Because context is often the key to understanding the notes, their location in the manuscript is described in each case. Similarly, because the marginal notes were written over the seven years of the book’s composition, the writing medium—whether pencil or black, purple, or blue ink—may provide dating evidence and therefore is always noted (see Description of Texts for a full account of the writing media).
In the transcriptions, words underscored once are rendered in italics, and words underscored twice are rendered in small capitals. When the author wrote and then canceled the entire contents of a note, the fact of cancellation is editorially described; however, internal cancellations are shown with a horizontal rule (“sink”). Inserted words or characters appear surrounded by carets (“burn”). A vertical rule signals the end of a line in the manuscript (“House | 96”). In order to facilitate finding references to the present text, word cues to the manuscript page give the emended reading, not necessarily the words as they appear in the manuscript. Similarly, when a cue includes a word that is broken at the beginning or the end of a manuscript page, the entire word is given in the cue, for example, “blackberries” at MS1a, 157.22, and “lightning” at MS1a, 436.1. Although Mark Twain deleted Jim’s “ghost” story before publication (MS1a, 198.16–214.4) and it is consequently not part of this text, marginal notes on manuscript pages 205 and 208 are reported in the sequence they occur in the manuscript. They are cued to Three Passages from the Manuscript, where the passage is printed in full.
[begin page 521]
[begin page 522]
[begin page 527]
Three passages from the newly discovered first half of the manuscript, MS1, are reproduced here because of the intrinsic interest of the revisions they contain.
Typically, Mark Twain revised his original handwritten pages, both as he was composing them and as he reviewed them, sometimes more than once. He eventually had this revised manuscript typed, chiefly so that he could continue the process of revision on the typescript. None of these revised typescripts is known to survive for Huckleberry Finn. The process of revision and correction might also continue on the proofs of the first edition (of which only a limited number survive, see p. 427), but, with time growing short and the illustrations already in place on the proofs, few changes would have been made at that late stage. Mark Twain never revised Huckleberry Finn after its first publication.
The first passage transcribed here, Jim’s “ghost” story, was originally part of what became chapter 9, but it was omitted from the first edition. Before Mark Twain had the passage typed, he worked carefully through it using pencil to revise Jim’s dialect (the draft itself is in black ink). He doubtless also revised the typed copy of this passage, but because he decided to withdraw it before publication, and because none of that typescript survives, we have no record of those revisions. Except for the “raft chapter” (see the explanatory note to 107.1–123.20), this is the single longest passage cut out of Mark Twain’s text. It was finally published in 1995 as “Jim and the Dead Man” in the New Yorker and was included in the 1996 Random House edition of Huckleberry Finn (SLC 1995; SLC 1996b).
The second passage, the beginning of chapter 19, is Huck’s famous description of sunrise on the river. The manuscript itself has relatively little revision, but the published passage shows that dramatic changes must have been made on the typescript and possibly on the proof.
The third passage, from the camp meeting episode in chapter 20, was substantially revised on the manuscript and then, as the published text reveals, revised even more extensively on the typescript and possibly on the proof.
[begin page 528]
Transcription
The method of transcription used for all three selections is adapted from the “Guide to Editorial Practice” in Mark Twain’s Letters (see L5 , 695–722). Canceled text is shown with a horizontal rule (“candle”) or, for solitary characters, a slash mark (“&” or “,”). Inserted words or characters appear enclosed by carets (“lantern”); solitary inserted characters appear with a single sublinear caret (“I”). Words that Mark Twain revised internally are transcribed showing the canceled and the revised form separately (“ghosesghosts” rather than the more literal but less legible “ghosets”). Where Mark Twain interlined an alternate word, without canceling his original choice, a slash mark separates the two readings (“scared/scairt”). If he inadvertently omitted a word, it is supplied within square brackets (“he” at 534.32). If Mark Twain inadvertently wrote the same word twice (“& &” at 554.11), the error is corrected because the cause of the error (the line break in the original) is not preserved. Words or characters that Mark Twain misformed, then canceled, are not transcribed. When a compound word is hyphenated at the end of a line, the spelling printed here is Mark Twain’s usual or invariant spelling of that compound or similar compounds (“a-yelpin’ ” at 536.37). When the end of a sentence fell just short of the right margin in his manuscript, Mark Twain often used a brief dash-like mark after the period to fill up the line (“village.” at 534.26). He expected his typist to ignore these marks because their sole function was to fill up space, not to signal a pause. They are therefore omitted from the transcription.
Although for the first passage we have no record of the revisions Mark Twain made on the typescript, for the second and third passages we do: it is the text of the first edition. His revisions are identified by comparing the manuscript with the first edition which was set from the revised typescript, now lost. Any differences between them must result from Mark Twain’s pen, except when it is more likely that they were volunteered by the typist or typesetter (such as first edition “by-and-by” for manuscript’s invariable “by and by”). So for passages two and three we transcribe the handwritten manuscript with its internal revisions on lefthand pages, and provide a parallel text on righthand pages that is essentially a reconstruction of Mark Twain’s typed copy of the manuscript with all the revisions he added on typescript or proof. In these reconstructions, canceled readings appear with a horizontal rule (“as if”); additions or substitutions appear with gray shading (“like”). The ampersand (&) of the manuscript is rendered as “and” because Mark Twain expected the typist to expand abbreviations. But otherwise, if differences between the manuscript and the first edition were manifestly imposed by the typist or the typesetter, the manuscript reading appears unchanged (“by and by” instead of first edition
[begin page 529]
All of the manuscript pages in this appendix are reproduced from the original manuscript in the Mark Twain Room of the Buffalo and Erie County Public Library (NBuBE), William H. Loos, Curator. They are reproduced from digital scans prepared for “Adventures of Huckleberry Finn”: The Buffalo & Erie County Public Library CD-ROM Edition, edited by Victor A. Doyno.
Within this section:
Jim’s “Ghost” Story | Huck Describes Sunrise on the River
The Pokeville Camp Meeting
[begin page 531]
A Passage Deleted from Chapter 9
Jim’s “ghost” story filled fifteen and one-half manuscript pages and originally followed the paragraph ending at 60.9 (“Well, . . . chile.”; MS1a, 198.16–214.4). Mark Twain wrote these pages in black ink during the summer of 1876 as part of the first long stint on his novel (MS1a, 1–446), and he subsequently made extensive changes in pencil to Jim’s dialect. The story remained part of the text after he had the manuscript typed in 1882–83, but he later deleted it, probably in the spring of 1884, during production of the book (see the introduction, p. 712). It was probably among the passages that young Susy Clemens recalled hearing read aloud by her father:
Papa read “Hucleberry Finn” to us in manuscript just before it came out, & then he would leave parts of it with Mamma to expergate, . . . and sometimes Clara & I would be sitting with Mamma while she was looking the manuscript over, & I remember so well, with what pangs of regret we used to see her turn down the leaves of the pages, which meant, that some delightfully dreadful part must be scratched out. And I remember one part pertickularly that Clara & I used to delight in, which was perfectly fascinating it was so dreadful, & oh with what dispair we saw mamma turn down the leaf on which it was written, we thought the book would be almost ruined without it. (OSC 1885–86, 87–88, in OSC 1985, 188–89)
Clemens admitted in 1906 that it was his practice to include a “dreadful” passage in his manuscript just to elicit the family reaction, and “not with any hope or expectation that it would get by the expergator alive” (SLC 1906?, [9–10], in OSC 1985, 189–90). Still, the care he took in writing and revising the “ghost” story suggests that he originally hoped to publish it in Huckleberry Finn. But by 1883 or 1884, he apparently felt the passage no longer fit the story as it had evolved since 1876.
Between 1866 and 1897, Clemens made at least four notes to himself about the core anecdote he relied on for Jim’s story (all are in CU-MARK). On an undated page of notes in purple ink (probably written in the late 1860s or early 1870s) he listed a dozen ideas for stories, including “Uncle Jim & the corpse.” In July 1866, bound from the Sandwich Islands to San Francisco, he wrote in his notebook, “Jim Lampton & the dead man in Dr. McDowell’s College” (N&J1, 136). Ten years after Huckleberry Finn was published, in November 1895 while on the trip he later described in Following the Equator, Clemens wrote in his notebook: “Put in uncle Jim Lampton’s adventure with the corpse in the dissecting room of Mc-Dowell’s college at midnight” (Notebook 34, TS p. 35). Then again in July
[begin page 532]
James Andrew Hays Lampton (1824–79) was the much younger half-brother of Clemens’s mother, Jane Lampton Clemens (1803–90). He lived next to the Clemenses in Hannibal in about 1845 or 1846, before moving to St. Louis to study at McDowell Medical College. He then settled in New London, just south of Hannibal, but practiced medicine only briefly before abandoning the profession, in about 1849, because he could not stand the sight of blood. While Clemens was in the West in the early 1860s, scattered references to Lampton, then in St. Louis along with Clemens’s mother and sister, show that they were clearly friends and kept in touch. Clemens remembered him as a “good fellow, very handsome, full of life” and as a “young doctor without practice, poor” (SLC 1897b, 13–14; Inds, 98, 329–30; L1 , 15 n. 7, 130, 153, 248, 251).
McDowell College, the first medical school in St. Louis and the first west of the Mississippi, was founded in 1840 by the charismatic and eccentric anatomist, Joseph Nash McDowell. It was housed originally in a brick building in the open land southwest of the city, and its facilities included a laboratory, amphitheater, and two dissecting rooms. In 1847 the college became the Medical Department of Missouri State University and moved nearby to a new building, a massive three-story stone structure. Jim’s description—“ ‘Dat college was a powerful big brick building, three stories high, en stood all by hersef in a big open place out to de edge er de village.’ ”—appears to draw on elements of both structures (Wild and Thomas, 59–60, Plate XII; Norwood, 353–54; Stevens, 2:421–25; Scharf, 1:417–18, 2:1526–27, 1544).
Jim’s midnight errand to the dissecting room at the behest of his white master, a medical student, opens a window on the real relations between blacks and nineteenth-century American medical schools, presumably as Clemens learned about them from his uncle Jim Lampton. Many medical schools used blacks as janitors and porters, and it was common for them to accompany students and doctors on nocturnal grave-robbing forays, often among the graves of the recently deceased indigent. Partly for that reason, the cadavers used for instructional dissection were themselves likely to be black. In chapter 15 of The Gilded Age, Mark Twain’s coauthor, Charles Dudley Warner, acknowledged this fact when he described Ruth Bolton’s evening visit by candlelight to the dissecting room of her medical college. Ruth finds the “frightful” corpse of a black man, lying sheeted on a long table. Warner concludes: “the repulsive black face seemed to wear a scowl that said, ‘Haven’t you yet done with the outcast, persecuted black man, but you must now haul him from his grave, and send even your women to dismember his body?’ ” (SLC 1873–74, 146–48; French, 61; Plutzky; Shultz, 39; Blanton, 70; Norwood, 400).
The scarcity of cadavers given to or obtained legally by medical schools
[begin page 533]
Professional grave robbers typically filled large orders for both local and distant medical schools, well into the 1890s, by robbing graveyards for the poor, and by other illegal means. One detail of Mark Twain’s account indicates that he was familiar with this trade: Jim describes “ ‘a table ’bout forty foot long, down de middle er de room, wid fo’ dead people on it, layin’ on dey backs wid dey knees up en sheets over ’em.’ ” The raised knees suggest that the corpses were obtained illegally, for to avoid detection, grave robbers embalmed their corpses before shipping them, not in coffins, but in small boxes or barrels which required that the knees be flexed (Shultz, 34–35, 38–39, 59–66, 90–91; Blanton, 71–72; Doyno 1996b, 374).
Some details of Jim’s description—the cadaver’s eyes snapping open and the sudden movement of the toes and legs—are not explicable as normal signs of decomposition. They are, however, typical features mentioned in the voluminous literature about vampires and revenants, which derived in part from misunderstandings of normal postmortem changes. Disinterred bodies were sometimes found to have changed their position or appearance in ways that seemed clearly animate, but were actually the result of movement caused by decompositional gases.
The corpse in Mark Twain’s story, however, does not seem to be decomposed: Jim even comments that it looks “pretty natural.” In the absence of refrigeration, cadavers were necessarily dissected as soon as possible after death. If dissection were delayed, the corpse would be injected with a concoction of beeswax, tallow, resin, and turpentine (the most popular formula) which arrested decay and preserved a natural appearance. Jim is clearly dealing with an illegally acquired, embalmed corpse whose startling movements have a perfectly rational explanation (“Mars. William said I didn’t prop him good wid de rollers”) (Timbs, 429; Barber, 41–43, 102–9, 117–19; Ross, 3–5; Shultz, 18–19; medical information courtesy of Alameda County Deputy Coroner Kevin Hinkle and the Pathology Department of the University of California at San Francisco).
Jim’s story is not a “real sure-’nough” ghost story, as Huck ultimately
[begin page 534]
[begin page 530]
“I been in a storm here once before, with Tom Sawyer & Jo Harper, Jim. It was a storm like this, too—last summer. We didn’t know about this place, & so we got soaked. The lightning tore a big tree all to flinders.1 Why don’t lightning cast a shadow, Jim?”
“Well, I reckon it do, but I don’t know.”
“Well, it don’t. I know. The sun does, & a candle does, but the lightning don’t.”Ⓐ Tom Sawyer says it don’t, & it’s so.”
“Sho, child, I reckon you’s mistaken ’bout dat. Gimme de gun—I’s gwyne to see.”
So he stood up the gun in the door, & held it, & when it lightened the gun didn’t cast any shadow. Jim says:
“Well, dat’s mighty cur’us—dat’s oncommon cur’us. Now dey say ghosts aⒶ ghos’ don’t cas’ no shadder. Why is dat, you reckon? Of course de reason is dat ghosesghostsⒶ is made out ofout’nⒶ lightnin’, or else de lightnin’ is made out’n ghosesghostsⒶ—but I don’t knowⒶ which it is. I wisht I knowed which it is, Huck.”
“Well I do, too; but I reckon there ain’t no way to find out. Did you ever see a ghost, Jim?”
“Has I ever seed a ghos’? Well I reckon I has.”
“O, tell me about it, Jim—tell me about it.”
“De storm’s a rippin’ an’enⒶ a tearin’, an’en a carryin’Ⓐ on so, a body can’t hardly talk, but I reckon I’ll try. Long time ago, when I was ’bout sixteen year old, my young Mars. William, dat’s dead, now, was a stugent in a doctor college in de village whah we lived den. Dat college was a powerful big brick building, & threeⒶ stories high, &enⒶ stood all by herselfhersefⒶ in a big open place out to de edge oferⒶ de village. Well, one night in de middle of winter young Mars. William he tole me to go to de college, an’enⒶ go up stairs to de dissectin’ room on de second flo’, &enⒶ warm up a dead man dat was dah on de table, &enⒶ git him soft so he can cut him up—”
“What for, Jim?”
“I don’t doⒶ know—see if he can find suffinsumfinⒶ in him, maybe. Anyways, dat’s what he tole me. An’EnⒶ he tole me to wait dah tell he come. So I takes a candle,lanternⒶ&enⒶ starts out acrost de town. My, but it was a-blowin’ &an’enⒶ a-sleetin’ an’en coldⒶ! Dey wan’t nobody stirrin
[begin page 535]
“I was mighty glad to git to de place, child. I onlocked de do’ &an’enⒶ went up star stairsⒶ to de dissectin’ room. Dat room was sixty foot long an’enⒶ twenty-five foot wide; an’enⒶ all along de wall, on bofe sides, was de long black gowns a-hangin’, dat de stugents wears when dey’s a-choppin’ up de dead people. Well, I goes a swingin’ de lantern along, &enⒶ de shadders oferⒶ dem gowns went to spreadin’ out &enⒶ drawin’ in, along de wall, &enⒶ it scartscairtⒶ me. It looked like dey was swingin’ dey han’s to git ’em warm. Well, I never looked at ’em no mo’; but it seemed like dey was a-doin’ it behind my back jistjis’Ⓐ de same.
“Dey was a table ’bout forty foot long, down de middle oferⒶ de room, wid fourfo’Ⓐ dead people on it, layin’ on dey backs wid dey knees up &enⒶ sheets over ’em. You could see de shapes under de sheets. Well, Mars. William he tole me to warm up de big man wid de black whiskers. So I unkivered one, &an’enⒶ he didn’t have no whiskers. But he had his eyes wide open, an’enⒶ I kuv kiveredⒶ him up quick, I bet you. De next one was sich a gashly sight dat I mostmos’Ⓐ let de lantern drap. Well, I sh skippedⒶ one carcass, an’en wentⒶ for de las’ one. I raise’ up de sheet an’en IⒶ says, all right, boss,Ⓐ you’s de chap I’s afterarterⒶ. He had de black whiskers an’enⒶa wasⒶ a rattlin’ big man, an’enⒶ looked wicked like a pirate. He was nakedⒶ2—dey all was. He was a layin’ on round sticks—rollers. iust in his shroud—do’ it was a pooty cold nightⒶ3I rolled him I took de sheet off’n him an’enⒶ rolled him along feet fust, to de enden’ⒶoferⒶ de table beforebefo’Ⓐ de fire place. His legslaigsⒶ was spread openapartⒶan’enⒶ his knees was cocked up some; so when I up-ended him on de enden’ⒶoferⒶ de table, he sot up dah lookin pretty natural, wid his feet out an’enⒶ his big toes stickin’ up like he was warmin’ hissef. I propped him up wid de rollers, an’enⒶ den I spread de sheetⒶ over his back an’enⒶ over his head to help warm him, an’enⒶ den when I was a tyin’ de corners under his chin, by jings he opened his eyes! I let go an’en stoodⒶ off an’en lookedⒶ at him, a-feelin’feelin’Ⓐ mighty shaky. Well, he didn’t look at nothin’nuthinⒶ particular, an’enⒶ didn’t do nuffin’, so I knowed he was good an’enⒶ dead, yit.
“But I couldn’t stan’ dem eyes, you know. It made me feel all-overish,
[begin page 536]
“But dem eyeseyesⒶ was kivered up, so I reckoned I’d let him stan’ at dat, an’enⒶ not try to improve him up no mo’. Well, I too stoop’Ⓐ down between his legslaigsⒶ on de hathstone, an’enⒶ took de candle out’n de lantern an’enⒶheld/hiltⒶ it in my han’ so as to makeⒶ moremo’Ⓐ light. Dey was some embers in de fire place, but de wood was all to de other endyuther en’ⒶoferⒶ de room. WhileWhils’Ⓐ I was a stoopin’ dah, gittin’ ready to go afterarterⒶ de wood, de candle flickered, an’enⒶ I thought de ole man moved his legs.laigs.Ⓐ It kind o’ kind er kinderⒶ made me shiver. I put out my han’ anenⒶ felt ofo’Ⓐ his leglaigⒶ dat was poked along pas’ my lef’ jaw, an’enⒶ it was cold as ice. So I reckoned he didn’t move. Den I felt ofo’Ⓐ de leglaigⒶ dat was poked past pas’Ⓐ my right jaw, an’enⒶ it was powerful cold, too. You see I was a stoopin’ down right betwixtbetwix’Ⓐ ’em.
“Well, pretty soon I thought I see his toes move; dey was jusjistjis’Ⓐ in front oferⒶ me, on bofe sides. I tell you, honey, I was gittin’ oneasy. You see dat was a great big old ramblin’ bildin’, an’en nobodyⒶ but me in it, an’enⒶ dat man over me wid dat sheet roun’ his head/f over his faceⒶ,4an’enⒶ de wind a wailin’ roun’ de place like sperits dat was in trouble, an’enⒶ de sleet a-drivin’ agin’ de glass; an’enⒶ den de clock struck twelve in de village, an’enⒶ it was so fur away, an’enⒶ de wind choke up de soun’ so dat it only soun’ like a moan—dat’s all. Well, thinks I, I wisht I was out ofout’nⒶ dis; what is gwyne to become o’erⒶ me?—an’enⒶ dis feller’s a-movin’ his toes, I knows it—I can/kinⒶsee ’em move—an’enⒶ I cankinⒶjistjis’Ⓐ feel dem eyes oferⒶ his’n an’enⒶ see dat ole dumplin’ head done up in de sheet, an’enⒶ—
“Well, sir, jusjistjis’Ⓐ at dat minute, down he comes,down he comes,Ⓐ right a-straddle oferⒶ my neck wid his cold legs,laigs,Ⓐ&enⒶ kicked de candle out!”
“My! What did you do, Jim?”
“Do? Well I never done nuffin’; nuffin’,Ⓐ only I jistjis’Ⓐ got up &/enⒶ heeled it in de dark. I warn’t gwyne to wait to fine out what he wanted. No sir; I jistjis’Ⓐ split down star stairsⒶan’enⒶ linked it home a-yelpin’ every jump.”
“What did your Mars. William say?”
[begin page 538]
“What made him hop on to your neck, Jim?”
“Well, Mars. William said I’dIⒶ didn’t prop him good wid de rollers. But I don’t know. It warn’t no way for a dead man to act, anyway/nohowⒶ; it might a scared/scairtⒶ some people to death.”
“But Jim, he warn’t a rightlyⒶ a ghost—he was only a dead man. Didn’t you ever see a real sure-’nough ghost?”
“You bet I has—lots of ’em.”
“Well, tell me about them, Jim.”
“All right, I will, some time; but thedeⒶ storm’s a-slackin’ up, now, so we better go an’enⒶ tend to de lines an’enⒶ bait ’em agin.”
[begin page 537]
[begin page 539]
A Revised Passage from Chapter 19
Chapter 19 begins with this passage, first drafted in 1880 (MS1b, 498.1–514.16), then revised extensively on the typescript in 1883–84. Huck’s “rhapsody” about life on the river, as Walter Blair called it, is one of the most famous passages in Huckleberry Finn (Blair 1960a, 258). In 1957, Leo Marx analyzed its style to explain how the excellence of Huckleberry Finn “follows from the inspired idea of having the western boy tell his own story in his own idiom”:
There are countless descriptions in literature of the sun coming up across a body of water, but it is inconceivable that a substitute exists for this one. It is unique in diction, rhythm, and tone of voice. . . . The scene is described in concrete details, but they come to us as subjective sense impressions. All the narrator’s senses are alive, and through them a high light is thrown upon the preciousness of the concrete facts. Furthermore, Huck is not . . . committed to any abstract conception of the scene. He sets out merely to tell how he and Jim put in their time. Because he has nothing to “prove” there is room in his account for all the facts. Nothing is fixed, absolute, or perfect. The passage gains immensely in verisimilitude from his repeated approximations. . . . Both subject and object are alive; the passage has more in common with a motion picture than a landscape painting.
. . . Much of the superior power of Huckleberry Finn must be ascribed to the sound of the voice we hear. It is the voice of the boy experiencing the event. Of course no one ever really spoke such concentrated poetry, but the illusion that we are hearing the spoken word is an important part of the total illusion of reality. . . .
. . . The vernacular method liberated Sam Clemens. When he looked at the river through Huck’s eyes he was suddenly free of certain arid notions of what a writer should write. It would have been absurd to have had Huck Finn describe the Mississippi as a sublime landscape painting. . . .
. . . Clemens not only fashioned a vital style, he sustained it. Its merit was the product not so much of technical virtuosity as of the kinds of truth to which it gave access. (Marx 1957, 129, 138–40, 143)
For further, similar analysis, see also Henry Nash Smith 1958a, xxv–xxvi, Hearn 2001, 201–5, and Angell).
The discovery of the first half of the manuscript in 1990 provided the first opportunity to compare how Mark Twain conceived the passage originally with how he revised and ultimately published it. One surprise was how many of the stylistic virtues Marx and others identified were achieved only by patient revision: the “vernacular” details of “bull-frogs a-cluttering,” breaking the otherwise total silence, and of rotting fish on the shore, for example, were clearly added on the typescript. The revisions show that Clemens was not “suddenly free” when he looked at the Mississippi
[begin page 540]
Revision occurred in two stages, designated here as: Manuscript Text—on lefthand pages, Mark Twain’s 1880 manuscript draft with its internal revisions; and Final Text—on righthand pages, that same revised passage as it was typed and then further revised in 1883 and 1884, with possibly some changes also made on proof. These two stages are published here, side by side, for the first time.
[begin page 541]
[begin page 542]
[begin page 543]
[begin page 544]
[begin page 545]
[begin page 546]
[begin page 547]
Manuscript Text
Mark Twain’s first draft with his revisions
CHAP.
Two or three days & nights went by; I reckon I might say they swum by, they slid along so quiet & smooth & lovely. Here is the way we put in the time. It was a monstrous big river down there—sometimes a mile & a half wide; we run, nights, & laid up & hid, daytimes; soon as day night was no m most gone, we would quitstopped navigating, & tied up—nearly always in the dead water under a tow-head; & then cut young cottonwoods & willows & hide the raft with them. But I’ll tell what we done & what we saw for one day,& night, & that will do for all—for all the days & nights was about alike.
Well, we hid in a towhead
Then we set out the lines. S Next we slid into the river & had a swim, so as to freshen up & cool off; then we set down on the sandy bottom where the water was about knee deep, & watched the daylight come. Not a sound, anywheres—perfectly still—just as if the whole world was dead asleep. The first thing to see, looking away across the water, was a kind of a dim, dull line—that was the forest on ’tother t’other side—you couldn’t make anything else out; then a pale place in the sky; then more paleness, spreading around; then the river softened up, away off, & wasn’t black, any more, but gray; you could see little dark spots drifting along, ever so far away—trading scows, & such things—things; & long, black streaks—rafts; sometimes you could hear the screak of a sweep, or jumbled sounds of voices, it was so still, & sounds traveled so far; now you could begin to see the ruffled streak on the water that the current from breaking past a snag makes; next, you would see the lightest & whitest mist curling up from the water; pretty soon the east reddens up, then the river reddens, & maybe you make out a little log cabin in the edge of the forest, away yonder on the bank on other t’other side of the river; then the nice breeze would spring up, & come fanning you from over the water, so cool & fresh, & so sweet to smell, on account of the woods & the flowers; next you’d have the full day, & everything shining in the sun, & the song-birds just agoing it!
A little smoke couldn’t be noticed, now, so we would take some fish off the lines, & cook up a hot breakfast. After we had a had a smoke, we would watch the awful lonesomeness of the river, & kind of dream along, & be happy, not talking much, & by & by nod off to sleep. Wake up, by & by, & look to see what done it, & maybe see a steamboat, coughing along up stream, so far off towards the other side that she didn’t seem to belong to this world at l all, hardly; then for about an hour there wouldn’t be a sound on the water, nor a solitary moving thing, as far as you could see—just solid Sunday & lonesomeness. Next you’d see a raft sliding by, away off yonder, & maybe a man on it, chopping; you’d see the axe flash, & come down—nary a sound, any more than if it had sunk into butter; you’d see that axe go up again, & by the time it was above the man’s head, then you’d hear the sound, sharp & clean—it had took all that time to travel over the water. So we would put in the day; dozing, dreaming, & listening to the stillness. Once there was a thick fog, & the rafts & things that went by werewas beating tin pans to warn steamboats to keep off & not run over them. Once A scow or a raft went by so close to us that we heard them talking & laughing—heard them just as plain as if they had been right at our noses;only five steps off; but we couldn’t see the faintest sign of them; it made me feel crawly, it was so like go ghots or spirits ghosts or spirits fluttering talking l & laughing in the air; & the voices drifted off & faded out, just the same as if they had been on the wing. Jim said he believed it was spirits; but I says, ¶ “No, spirits wouldn’t say, ‘Dern the derned fog.’ ”
Soon as it was night, out we shoved; when we got her out to about the middle, we let her alone, & let her float wherever s the current wanted her to; then we lit the pipes & dangled our legs in the water (we was al & talked about religion all kinds of things—we was always naked, day & night, whenever the mosquitoes would let us—the new clothes Buck’s folks made for me was too good to be comfortable, & besides I didn’t go much on clothes anyway.
Well, sometimes we’d have that whole monstrous river all to ourselves, for hours. Yonder was the dim banks & the islands away off acrossacrost the water; & now & then a spark—which was a candle in some cabin window—some family was at home, there, and they could see our lantern, of course, & so it was kind of sociable-like, & friendly; & w sometimes, away down the river, or away up it, we could see a spark or two—on a raft or a scow, you know; & maybe we would just hear the faintest scraping of a fiddle or sound of a song coming over the water from one of those crafts. Lordly, Lordy, its it is lovely to live on a raft. We had the sky, up there, all sprinkled thick with stars, & we used to lay on our backs & look up at them, & discuss about whether they was made, or only just happened—Jim he allowed they was made, a purpose but I allowed they happened; I judged it would have took too long to make so many. Jim said the moon could have laid them; well, that looked kind of reasonable & natural, so I didn’t say nothing against it, because I’ve seen a frog lay most as many, so of course it was plain enough it could be done. We used to watch the falling stars, too, & see them streak down the sky & trail their sparky tails behind them. Jim reckoned they had got spoiled & was flung out of the nest.
About once or twice a night we would see a steamboat slipping along in the dark, away over on t’other side, like a long string of glow-worms, & now & then she would belch a whole world of sparks up out of her chimneys, & they would trail off & rain down in the river & look awful pretty; then the boat would turn a corner & her light would wink out & her pow-wow die down & leave the big river all to us again; & by & by the wash of her waves would travel to us, long after she was gone, & joggle our raft a bit, & after that we would have the dead quiet again. once more.
Final Text
Mark Twain’s final revisions on typescript or proof
CHAP. Chapter XIX.
Two or three days and nights went by; I reckon I might say they swum swum by, they slid along so quiet and smooth and lovely. Here is the way we put in the time. It was a monstrous big river down there—sometimes a mile and a half wide; we run, nights, and laid up and hid, daytimes; soon as night was most gone, we stopped navigating, and tied up—nearly always in the dead water under a tow-head; and then cut young cottonwoods and willows and hid the raft with them. Then we set out the lines. Next we slid into the river and had a swim, so as to freshen up and cool off; then we set down on the sandy bottom where the water was about knee deep, and watched the daylight come. Not a sound, anywheres—perfectly still—just as iflike the whole world was dead asleep.asleep, only sometimes the bull-frogs a-cluttering, maybe. The first thing to see, looking away acrossover the water, was a kind of a dim, dull line—that was the forestwoods on t’other side—you couldn’t make anythingnothing else out; then a pale place in the sky; then more paleness, spreading around; then the river softened up, away off, and wasn’twarn’t black any more, but gray; you could see little dark spots drifting along, ever so far away—trading scows, and such things; and long, black streaks—rafts; sometimes you could hear the screak of a sweep,a sweep screaking; or jumbled sounds ofup voices, it was so still, and sounds traveledcome so far; nowand by and by you could begin to see the ruffleda streak on the water that the current breaking past a snag makes;which you know by the look of the streak that there’s a snag there in a swift current which breaks on it and makes that streak look that way;next,and you would see the lightest and whitest mist curlingcurl up fromoff of the water;water, andpretty soon the east reddens up, thenand the river reddens,river, and maybe you make out a little log cabin in the edge of the forest,woods, away yonder on the bank on t’other side of the river;river, being a wood-yard, likely, and piled by them cheats so you can throw a dog through it anywheres; then the nice breeze would springsprings up, and comecomes fanning you from over the water,there, so cool and fresh, and so sweet to smell, on account of the woods and the flowers; but sometimes not that way, because they’ve left dead fish laying around, gars, and such, and they do get pretty rank; and next you’d haveyou’ve got the full day, and everything shiningsmiling in the sun, and the song-birds just agoinggoing it!
A little smoke couldn’t be noticed, now, so we would take some fish off of the lines, and cook up a hot breakfast. After we had had a smoke,And afterwards we would watch the awful lonesomeness of the river, and kind of dreamlazy along, and be happy, not talking much, and by and by nodlazy off to sleep. Wake up, by and by, and look to see what done it, and maybe see a steamboat, coughing along up stream, so far off towards the other side that she didn’t seem to belong to this world at all, hardly;you couldn’t tell nothing about her only whether she was stern-wheel or side-wheel; then for about an hour there wouldn’t be a sound on the water, nor a solitary moving thing, as far as you couldnothing to hear nor nothing to see—just solid Sunday and lonesomeness. Next you’d see a raft sliding by, away off yonder, and maybe a mangaloot on it, chopping;it chopping, because they’re most always doing it on a raft; you’d see the axe flash, and come down—nary a sound, any more than if it had sunk into butter;you don’t hear nothing;you’dyou see that axe go up again, and by the time it wasit’s above the man’s head, then you’dthen you hear the sound, sharp and cleank’chunk!—it had took all that time to travelcome over the water. So we would put in the day; dozing, dreaming, andday, lazying around, listening to the stillness. Once there was a thick fog, and the rafts and things that went by was beating tin pans to warnso the steamboats to keep off and notwouldn’t run over them. A scow or a raft went by so close to us that we heardcould hear them talking and cussing and laughing—heard them just as plain as if they had been only five steps off;plain; but we couldn’t see the faintestno sign of them; it made meyou feel crawly, it was so like ghosts or spirits talking and laughingcarrying on that way in the air; and the voices drifted off and faded out, just the same as if they had been on the wing.air. Jim said he believed it waswas spirits; but I says,says:
“No, spirits wouldn’t say, ‘Dern the derneddern fog.’ ”
Soon as it was night, out we shoved; when we got her out to about the middle, we let her alone, and let her float wherever the current wanted her to; then we lit the pipes and dangled our legs in the water and talked about all kinds of things—we was always naked, day and night, whenever the mosquitoes would let us—the new clothes Buck’s folks made for me was too good to be comfortable, and besides I didn’t go much on clothes anyway.clothes, nohow.
Well, sometimesSometimes we’d have that whole monstrous river all to ourselves, for hours.the longest time. Yonder was the dim banks and the islands,away off acrost across the water; and now and thenmaybe a spark—which was a candle in somea cabin window—some family was at home, there, and they could see our lantern, of course, and so it was kind of sociable-like, and friendly; and sometimes, away down the river, or away up it, weon the water you could see a spark or two—on a raft or a scow, you know; and maybe we would justyou could hear the faintest scraping of a fiddle or sound of a song coming over the water from one of thosethem crafts. Lordy, it isIt’s lovely to live on a raft. We had the sky, up there, all sprinkled thickspeckled with stars, and we used to lay on our backs and look up at them, and discuss about whether they was made, or only just happened—Jim he allowed they was made, but I allowed they happened; I judged it would have took too long to make so many. Jim said the moon could havealaid them; well, that looked kind of reasonable and natural,reasonable, so I didn’t say nothing against it, because I’ve seen a frog lay most as many, so of course it was plain enough it could be done. We used to watch the falling stars,stars that fell, too, and see them streak down the sky and trail their sparky tails behind them.down. Jim reckoned they hadallowed they’d got spoiled and was flunghove out of the nest.
About onceOnce or twice of a night we would see a steamboat slipping along in the dark,Ⓐaway over on t’other side, like a long string of glow-worms, and now and then she would belch a whole world of sparks up out of her chimneys,chimbleys, and they would trail off and rain down in the river and look awful pretty; then the boatshe would turn a corner and her lights would wink out and her pow-wow die downshut off and leave the big river all to usstill again; and by and by the wash of her waves would travelget to us, a long time after she was gone, and joggle ourthe raft a bit, and after that we would have the dead quiet once more.you wouldn’t hear nothing for you couldn’t tell how long, except maybe frogs or something.
[begin page 549]
A Revised Passage from Chapter 20
The camp-meeting scene as published differs considerably from the original manuscript version written in 1880 (MS1b, 579.1–600.8). Mark Twain carefully edited the episode at the typescript stage—shortening it, toning down the racial and religious satire, and reducing its similarity to Johnson J. Hooper’s 1845 sketch, “The Captain Attends a Camp-Meeting.”
[begin page 548]
[begin page continued 549]
Camp meetings were at their height in Missouri during the first half of the nineteenth century. Hundreds, even thousands, gathered at the camp sites, often traveling for miles, and bringing bedding and tents. “Many anticipated a profound conversion and religious experience; some came only to jest, swear, or be amused by the emotional excesses for which the meetings were known; others came to see the condition and prospects of the matrimonial market” (Windell, 256). Early meetings were associated with some immorality and rowdyism, as well as extraordinary physical manifestations of religious fervor, such as the “holy laugh,” the “jerks,” and the “falling exercise” or “holy toppling” (Charles A. Johnson, 54–62, 93; Windell, 259–61). Slaves and free blacks attended the meetings along with white worshipers; there were many accomplished black preachers, as well as white. Although certain areas were designated for the black congregation, and the sexes were also segregated, it is clear that race and gender barriers were not strictly observed (Bruce, 73, 89; Windell, 253–55, 261, 263, 266–67; Charles A. Johnson, 46, 113–18, 242–46; McCurdy, 156–60, 167).
While Mark Twain probably drew on his own personal knowledge in writing his camp-meeting episode, he was undoubtedly also aware of the numerous literary treatments of the theme. The general influence of Johnson J. Hooper’s backwoods sketch “The Captain Attends a Camp-Meeting”
[begin page 550]
Camp-meeting descriptions were commonplace in the travel memoirs and fiction of the period. All provided details of the camp sites, the style and language of the sermons and exhortations, the fervent hymn singing, and the frenzy of the congregation. Among the accounts that Mark Twain may have seen are the following: Frederick Marryat’s Diary in America (1839), chapter 32; Frances Trollope’s Domestic Manners of the Americans (1832), chapters 8 and 15; Fredrika Bremer’s Homes of the New World (1853), letter xiv; and Harriet Beecher Stowe’s Dred; A Tale of the Great Dismal Swamp (1856), chapter 23. (The works by Marryat and Trollope are among those he consulted while writing Life on the Mississippi.) Descriptions of village revivals and backwoods preaching can also be found in three of Edward Eggleston’s novels—The Hoosier School-Master (1871), The Circuit Rider (1874), and Roxy (1878)—as well as in Hamilton Pierson’s In the Brush (1881), a title that Clemens jotted down in his notebook in March 1882 ( N&J2, 453; Ganzel 1962a and 1962b; Kruse 1981, 49, 166).
Revision occurred in two stages, designated here as: Manuscript Text—on lefthand pages, Mark Twain’s 1880 manuscript draft with its internal revisions; and Final Text—on righthand pages, that same revised passage as it was typed and then further revised in 1883 and 1884, with possibly some changes also made on proof. These two stages are published here, side by side, for the first time.
[begin page 551]
[begin page 552]
[begin page 553]
[begin page 554]
[begin page 555]
[begin page 556]
[begin page 557]
[begin page 558]
[begin page 559]
Manuscript Text
Mark Twain’s first draft with his revisions
We got there in about a half an hour, sweating like sin, for it was ana most awful hot day. Everything was a-booming. There was as much as twoa thousand people there, from twenty forty mile around. The woods was full of teams & wagons, hitched everywheres, feeding out of the wagon troughs & stomping to keep off the flies. There was sheds made out of poles & roofed over with branches, where they had lemonade & ginger-bread to sell, & piles & piles of water-millionsmwatermillionswater-melons & green corn & such-like truck.
The preaching was going on under the same kind of sheds, only they was bigger & held crowds of people. The benches was made out of outside slabs of logs, with holes bored in the round side to drive sticks into for legs. They didn’t have noany backs. The preachers had high platforms to stand on, at one end of the sheds. The women had on sun-bonnets; & some had linsey-woolsey from frocks, some gingham ones, & a few of the young ones had on calico. Some of the young men was barefooted, & some of the good children & good-sized boys didn’t have on any clothes but just a tow-linen shirt. Some of the old women was knitting, & some of the young folks was courting on the sly.
The first shed we come to, o the preacher was lining-out a hymn, hymn. He lined out two lines; everybody sung it—roared it out, they did, in a most rousing way:
“Shall I be carried to the skies,On flowery beds of ease—”
“Am I a soldier of the cross,
A follower of the Lamb,”—
—then the preacher lined-out the next two:
“Whilst others fight to win the prize,And sail through bloody seas?”
“And shall I fear to own his cause,
Or blush to speak his name?- 1
—& so on. The people woke up more & more, & sung louder & louder; & towards the end, some begun to groan, & some begun to shout. The preacher begun to preach, & he warmed up, right away, & went a-weaving up first to one side of his platform & then to- to t’other, & then a-leaning down over the front of it, with his arms & his body a-going it all the time, & sing-songing his words out so with all his might & main, so you could a heard him a mile; & every now & then he would hold up his open Bible, & kind of pass it around this way & that, shouting, “It’s the brazen serpent in the wilderness-ah! look upon it & live!” live-ah!”2 & people would sing out, “Glo-o-ree!—A-a-men!” & so on, & next he would lay the Bible down & weave about the platform, & work back to the Bible again, pretty soon, & fetch it a whackbang with his fist & shout “Here it is! the rock of salvation-ah!” And so he went on a-raging, & the people groaning & crying, & jumping up & hugging one another, & Amens was popping off everywheres. Every little while he would tal preach right at people that he saw was stirred up:
“The sperrit’s a workin’ in you brother—don’t shake him off-ah! Now is the accepted time-ah! [A-a-men!] The devil’s holt is a weakenin’ on you, sister—shake him loose, shake him loose-ah! One more shake & the vict’ry’s won-ah! [Comedown, Lord!] Hell’s a-burning, the kingdom’s a-coming-ah!—one more shake, sister, one more shake & your
chains is broke-ah! [Gloryhal-lelujah!] O, come to the mourner’s bench! Come, black with sin-ah! sin! [Amen!] come, sich sick & sore! [Amen!] come, lame, & blind & halt! [Amen!] come, pore & needy, sunk in shame! [A-a-men!] come all that’s worn, & guilty & sufferin’!—come with a broken spirit! come with a contrite heart, heart! come, in your rags & sin & dirt, & dont dirt! the waters that cleanse is free, the door of heaven stands open—O, enter into the everlasting rest!” [A-a-men! Glo-o-ry-glory! Comedown, Lord!]
And so on. You couldn’t make out what the preacher said, anymore, on account of the whooping & shouting & crying that was going on. Folks got up, everywheres in the crowd, & worked their way, just by main force, to the mourner’s bench, with the tears a-pouring down their faces, & folks hugging them & crying over them all the way. And it was worse than every when all the mourners had got up there to the front benches in a gang. They hugged one another, & shouted, & flung themselves down on the straw, & wallowed around, just plum crazy & wild. One fat nigger wenchwoman about forty, was the worst. The white mour mourners couldn’t fend her off, no way—fast as one would get loose, she’d tackle the next one, & most & smother him! him. Next, down she went in the straw, along with the rest, & wallowed around, clawing dirt & shouting glory hallelujah same as they did.
Well, the first I knowed, the king got a start. He begun to warm up, & by & by he just laid over them all, for whooping & hugging & wallowing. And when everything was just at its boomingest, he went a-charging up onto the platform & flung his arms around the preacher & went to hugging him & kissing him, & crying all over him, & thanking him for saving him. The preacher felt so good about it, that he begged the king to speak to the people, & he done it. He warmed them up, too—told them he ’d been a was a pirate—been a pirate for thirty years, out in the Indian ocean, & his crew was killed off thinned out considerable, last spring in a fight, & he was home, now, to take out some fresh men, & thanks to goodness he’d been robbed last night & put ashore from a steamboat without a cent, & glory hallelujah he was glad of it, it was the blessedest thing that ever happened to him, because he’d got convertedreligion to-day, & was a changed man & happy for the first time in his
life; &, poor as he was, he meant to start right off & work his way back to the Indian ocean & put in the rest of his life converting pirates & turning them into the true path; for he could do it better than anybody else, being acquainted with all the pirate crews in that ocean; & though it would take him a long time to get there, without money, he would get there, anyway, & every time he converted a pirate, he would say to him, “Don’t you thank me, don’t you give me no credit, it all belongs to them dear people in Pokeville camp meeting, & that dear preacher that spoke the words that set my soul afire & saved it from that other fire that burns foreverlasting—glory hallelujah!”
And then he busted into tears, & so did everybody; & he hugged the preacher & cried on him again, & everybody hugged one another & sung out “A-a-men! & all that sort of thing. Then somebody sings out “Take up a collection, take up a collection for the pore soul!” Well, a half a dozen made a jump to do it, but somebody sings out, “Let him pass the hat around!” Then everybody said it, the preacher, too.
So the king went all through that crowd with his hat, a-crying, & a-swabbing his eyes, & blessing the people & praising them & thanking them for being so good to the poor pirates away off there with nobody to give them a lift & show them the way to the light; & every little while the pretty prettiest kind of girls, with the tears a-running down their cheeks would up & ask him would he let them kiss him, for to remember him by; & he always let them; & sometimes he some of them he hugged & kissed as many as five or six times—& he was invited to stay a week; & everybody wanted him to live in their houses. houses, & & said they’d think it an honor; but he said as this was the last day of the camp meeting he couldn’t do no good, & besides he was in a sweat to get to the Indian ocean right off & go to saving pirates.
When we got back to the raft & he come to count up, he found he had collected eighty-seven dollars & seventy-five cents. And he had fetched away a three-gallon jug of whisky, too, that he had found under a wagon when we was coming home starting home through the woods. The king said, take it all around, it laid over any day he’d every put in in the missionarying line. He said it warn’t no use talking, heathens didn’t amount to a dern, alongside of pirates, to work a camp meeting with.
Final Text
Mark Twain’s final revisions on typescript or proof
We got there in about a half an hour, sweating like sin,fairly dripping, for it was a most awful hot day. Everything was a-booming. There was as much as a thousand people there, from twenty mile around. The woods was full of teams and wagons, hitched everywheres, feeding out of the wagon troughs and stomping to keep off the flies. There was sheds made out of poles and roofed over with branches, where they had lemonade and ginger-bread to sell, and piles and piles of watermelons and green corn and such-like truck.
The preaching was going on under the same kindkinds of sheds, only they was bigger and held crowds of people. The benches was made out of outside slabs of logs, with holes bored in the round side to drive sticks into for legs. They didn’t have anyno backs. The preachers had high platforms to stand on, at one end of the sheds. The women had on sun-bonnets; and some had linsey-woolsey frocks, some gingham ones, and a few of the young ones had on calico. Some of the young men was barefooted, and some of the children and good-sized boys didn’t have on any clothes but just a tow-linen shirt. Some of the old women was knitting, and some of the young folks was courting on the sly.
The first shed we come to, the preacher was lining-out a hymn. He lined out two lines;lines, everybody sung it—roared it out, they did, in a most rousing way:
“Am I a soldier of the cross,A follower of the Lamb,”—
—then the preacher lined-out the next two:
“And shall I fear to own his cause,Or blush to speak his name?”
it, and it was kind of grand to hear it, there was so many of them and they done it in such a rousing way; then he lined out two more for them to sing—and so on. The people woke up more and more, and sung louder and louder; and towards the end, some begun to groan, and some begun to shout. TheThen the preacher begun to preach, and he warmed up, right away,preach; and begun in earnest, too; and went a-weavingweaving first to one side of histhe platform and then to t’other,the other, and then a-leaning down over the front of it, with his arms and his body a-going itgoing all the time, and sing-songingshouting his words out with all his might and main, so you could a heard him a mile;might; and every now and then he would hold up his open Bible,Bible and spread it open, and kind of pass it around this way and that, shouting, “It’s the brazen serpent in the wilderness-ah! lookwilderness! look upon it and live-ah!”live!” and people would sing shout out, Glo-o-ree!—A-a-men!”“Glory!—A-a-men!”and so on, and next he would lay the Bible down and weave about the platform, and work back to the Bible again, pretty soon, and fetch it a bang with his fist and shout “Here it is! the rock of salvation-ah!” And so he went on a-raging,on, and the people groaning and crying, and jumping up and hugging one another, and Amens was popping off everywheres. Every little while he would preach right at people that he saw was stirred up:crying and saying amen:
“The sperrit’s a workin’ in you brother—don’t shake him off-ah! Now is the accepted time-ah! [A-a-men!] The devil’s holt is a weakenin’ on you, sister—shake him loose, shake him loose-ah! One more shake and the vict’ry’s won-ah! [Comedown, Lord!] Hell’s a-burning, the kingdom’s a-coming-ah!—one more shake, sister, one more shake and your
chains is broke-ah! [Gloryhal-lelujah!] “O, come to the mourner’smourners’ bench! Come, black with sin! [Amen!] come, sick and sore! [Amen!] come, lame, and blind and halt!lame and halt, and blind! [Amen!] come, pore and needy, sunk in shame! [A-a-men!] come all that’s worn, and guilty and sufferin’!and soiled, and suffering!—come with a broken spirit! come with a contrite heart! come in your rags and sin and dirt! the waters that cleanse is free, the door of heaven stands open—O, enter into the everlasting rest!” [A-a-men!Glo-o-ry-glory! Come down, Lord!]in and be at rest!” [A-a-men! Glory, glory hallelujah!]
And so on. You couldn’t make out what the preacher said, anymore,any more, on account of the whooping and shouting and crying that was going on.crying. Folks got up, everywheres in the crowd, and worked their way, just by main force,strength, to the mourner’smourners’ bench, with the tears a-pouringrunning down their faces, and folks hugging them and crying over them all the way. And it was worse than everfaces; and when all the mourners had got up there to the front benches in a gang. They hugged one another,crowd, they sung, and shouted, and flung themselves down on the straw, and wallowed around, just plum crazy and wild. One fat nigger woman about forty, was the worst. The white mourners couldn’t fend her off, no way—fast as one would get loose, she’d tackle the next one, and smother him. Next, down she went in the straw, along with the rest, and wallowed around, clawing dirt and shouting glory hallelujah same as they did.
Well, the first I knowed, the king got a start. He begun to warm up, and by and by he laid over them all, for whooping and hugging and wallowing. And when everything was just at its boomingest,agoing; and you could hear him over everybody; and next he went a-charging up onto the platform and flung his arms around the preacher and went to hugging him and kissing him, and crying all over him, and thanking him for saving him. The preacher felt so good about it, that he begged the kinghim to speak to the people, and he done it. He warmed them up, too— told them he was a pirate—been a pirate for thirty years, out in the Indian ocean, and his crew was thinned out considerable, last spring in a fight, and he was home, now, to take out some fresh men, and thanks to goodness he’d been robbed last night and put ashore fromoff of a steamboat without a cent, and glory hallelujah he was glad of it, it was the blessedest thing that ever happened to him, because he’d got religion today, andhe was a changed man now, and happy for the first time in his
life; and, poor as he was, he meantwas going to start right off and work his way back to the Indian ocean and put in the rest of his life converting pirates and turning themtrying to turn the pirates into the true path; for he could do it better than anybody else, being acquainted with all the pirate crews in that ocean; and though it would take him a long time to get there, without money, he would get get there, anyway, and every time he convertedconvinced a pirate, he would say to him, “Don’t you thank me,me, don’t you give me me no credit, it all belongs to them dear people in Pokeville camp meeting, natural brothers and benefactors of the race—and that dear preacher that spoke the words that set my soul afire and saved it from that other fire that burns foreverlasting—glory hallelujah!”there, the truest friend a pirate ever had!”
And then he busted into tears, and so did everybody; and he hugged the preacher and cried on him again, and everybody hugged one another and sung out A-a-men! and all that sort of thing.everybody. Then somebody sings out “Take up a collection, take up a collection for the pore soul!”him, take up a collection!” Well, a half a dozen made a jump to do it, but somebody sings out, “Let him pass the hat around!” Then everybody said it, the preacher, too.
So the king went all through thatthe crowd with his hat, a-crying, and a-swabbingswabbing his eyes, and blessing the people and praising them and thanking them for being so good to the poor pirates away off there with nobody to give them a lift and show them the way to the light;there; and every little while the prettiest kind of girls, with the tears a-runningrunning down their cheekscheeks, would up and ask him would he let them kiss him, for to remember him by; and he always let them;done it; and some of them he hugged and kissed as many as five or six times—and he was invited to stay a week; and everybody wanted him to live in their houses, and said they’d think it was an honor; but he said as this was the last day of the camp meeting he couldn’t do no good, and besides he was in a sweat to get to the Indian ocean right off and go to savingwork on the pirates.
When we got back to the raft and he come to count up, he found he had collected eighty-seven dollars and seventy-five cents. And then he had fetched away a three-gallon jug of whisky, too, that he had found under a wagon when we was starting home through the woods. The king said, take it all around, it laid over any day he’d ever put in in the missionarying line. He said it warn’t no use talking, heathens didn’tdon’t amount to a dern,shucks, alongside of pirates, to work a camp meeting with.
[begin page 560]
In 1882, the year before Mark Twain finished his manuscript draft of Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, he described the first half as “a book I have been working at, by fits and starts, during the past five or six years” (SLC 1883a, 42). That first half of the manuscript, written between 1876 and 1880, was missing and thought permanently lost until 1990, when it was discovered in a Los Angeles attic. Readers and scholars with access only to the second half, written in 1883, had long tried to determine when Mark Twain wrote each part of the story, which portions he revised or added later, what his original ideas were about the characters and plot, and exactly how the known half and the “lost” half of the manuscript fit together. The following pages from the entire manuscript—its two halves united at the Buffalo and Erie County Public Library since 1992—illustrate the physical evidence which answers some of those questions.
The manuscript breaks into three distinct sections, each representing a major period of composition separated enough in time from the others so that Mark Twain was using different inks and stationery. The pages he wrote in 1876 (MS1a, 1–446) are in black ink on embossed Crystal-Lake Mills paper; the pages he wrote in 1880 (MS1b, 447–663) are in purple ink on white wove paper; the pages he wrote in 1883 (MS2, title page, 81-A-1 through 81-60, 160-787 are in blue-gray ink on watermarked Old Berkshire Mills paper. Mark Twain had the 1876 and 1880 pages typed before he began writing the 1883 pages, which were numbered to follow (or to be interpolated into) the typescript pages. Although the typescript (TS1) is lost, the manuscript pages below show where the breaks between stints occurred and where the interpolations go.
On these pages are examples of Mark Twain’s revisions, sometimes in pencil, showing the author’s attention to even the smallest details of his text, and also a sample of his careful markings for emphasis which were lost in the transmission of the text to the first edition. In addition, several pages show notes Mark Twain wrote to himself in the margins. Because composition was often interrupted, for a day or for years, he used these notes to review and plan the book’s characters and incidents. For a detailed physical description of the manuscript and for a record of all manuscript revisions and marginal notes, see Description of Texts, Alterations in the Manuscript, and Mark Twain’s Marginal Working Notes.
[begin page 561]
Within this section:
Title page, 1883 and 1884 (MS2) | Title page verso, 1883 and 1884 (MS2)
“Notice” page, late June 1880 or after (MS1b)
Page 1, 1876 (MS1a) | Page 280, 1876 (MS1a) | Page 81-A-1, 1883 (MS2)
Page 362, 1876 (MS1a) | Page 363, 1876 (MS1a) | Page 446, 1876 (MS1a)
Page 447, 1880 (MS1b) | Page 624, 1880 (MS1b) | Page 625, 1880 (MS1b)
Page 663, 1880 (MS1b) | Page 160, 1883 (MS2)
Page 786, 1883 (MS2) | Page 787, 1883 (MS2)
[begin page 562]
[begin page 563]
[begin page 564]
[begin page 565]
[begin page 566]
[begin page 567]
[begin page 568]
sermon
Twichells
clothes—
p. 58
——80
A town 80
ball
46
House
236
Remarks at a funeral”), intended to remind the author of incidents he might use in
the next chapters. The associated page references have not been explained. Mark Twain
did make use of an
incident involving his friend, the Reverend Joseph Twichell (see the explanatory note
to 233.1; see also Mark Twain’s Marginal
Working Notes, p. 522).
[begin page 569]
[begin page 570]
[begin page 571]
[begin page 572]
[begin page 573]
[begin page 574]
[begin page 575]
[begin page 576]
[begin page 577]
[begin page 578]
From November 1884 through February 1885, Mark Twain participated in a joint lecture tour with George Washington Cable, traveling in the East, the Midwest, and briefly into Canada. He delivered platform “readings” (actually memorized recitations) from his forthcoming book, Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, and from older works as well, giving over one hundred performances in more than sixty cities.1 Some of the drafts and notes Mark Twain made while preparing his program survive and are presented here in three groups, arranged in the order in which the episodes occur in the book. Group A, “Call this a gov’ment?” consists of two pages of proof containing Pap Finn’s diatribe against the government. These pages, upon which the author marked changes to adapt the text for platform performance, are from a set of
[begin page 579]
Mark Twain began to work on his reading program in late September 1884 when he returned to Hartford from his summer sojourn in Elmira. On September 20 he wrote to Charles Webster, “I would like to find an unbound copy of Huck Finn in Hartford when I reach there—I want to select readings from it for the platform, immediately.”2 At about the same time he listed in his notebook some three dozen possible lecture topics, one third of which were episodes from Huckleberry Finn, and he considered the idea of making “a whole reading from Huck.”3 He also gave a set of folded and gathered sheets to Cable and asked him to recommend some readings. Cable replied on October 13: “One passage I know would be great. . . . It is the runaway Jim’s account of his investments winding up with the 10 cents ‘give to de po’.’ ”4
Mark Twain planned to develop at least two programs for use in cities where he gave more than one performance.5 He began the tour with a primary, or first-night, program containing two readings from chapter 14: “King Sollermun” and “How Come a Frenchman Doan’ Talk Like a Man?”6 “King Sollermun” became a staple of Mark Twain’s first-night program, but the second selection was dropped from the printed program after opening night in order to shorten the performance, which ran a full two hours.7 Thereafter, the first-night program remained fairly constant until Christmas, except for the optional encores. The reading recommended by Cable, a passage Mark Twain titled “Jim’s Bank,” was not made part of the announced program, but was often delivered as an encore to “King Sollermun.”8 Mark Twain’s secondary program was continually changing and usually was made up of four selections chosen from a repertoire of about ten additional pieces, none of them from Huckleberry Finn.
Mark Twain’s notebooks show that one of the readings he had considered for the tour was the “Raftsmen fight,” a passage originally written for Huckleberry Finn but published in 1883 in Life on the Mississippi. He probably prepared the reading reproduced below in Group B by early November, but no evidence has been found that he ever delivered it.9
[begin page 580]
Prov. Matinee” on the first page of marked proof containing the passage (see C-1 below). But no mention of this piece has been found in the newspaper reviews of the pre-Christmas segment of the tour.
When Mark Twain resumed the tour on December 29, he added “A Dazzling Achievement” to his program. He reported to Livy that “the new piece” was now “the biggest card I’ve got in my whole repertoire. I always thought so. It went a-booming; & Cable’s praises are not merely loud, they are boisterous. Says its literary quality is high & fine—& great; its truth to boy nature unchallengeable; its humor constant & delightful; & its dramatic close full of stir, & boom, & GO. Well, he has stated it very correctly. . . . Ah, if it goes like that in its crude rude state, how won’t it go when I get it well in hand?”13 Later in the tour Mark Twain described the reading as a “triumph . . . from the first word to the last” and it apparently supplanted “King Sollermun” as his most frequently read book selection.14
Mark Twain’s work over the Christmas holiday also resulted in the addition of another Huckleberry Finn episode, one which was entirely new: “Call this a gov’ment?” He entered the title of this piece in his notebook
[begin page 581]
In marking the Huckleberry Finn proof sheets and Life on the Mississippi pages for his lecture readings, Mark Twain made numerous changes in the texts. He created introductory or bridge passages to explain his characters and their motives, shortened many other passages, and consistently softened his language. Although such changes could not fail at times to be “literary” in tone, their context and content make clear that Mark Twain intended them for public reading, not as revisions for his novel.
Since it was Mark Twain’s practice to memorize and continually improve his lecture selections, it is unlikely that he read from any of these materials while performing, and they may not represent the precise text he delivered to his audience.16
The Huckleberry Finn proofs and pages from Life on the Mississippi that Mark Twain revised for lecture performance are reproduced in photofacsimile, and his handwritten lecture notes are reproduced in typographic transcription. The facsimiles of the printed texts are accompanied by transcriptions of Mark Twain’s holograph insertions, which are sometimes hard to read in the facsimiles, but his deletions of printed text, normally clear in the facsimiles, are not transcribed. Words underscored once are rendered in italics, and words underscored twice are rendered in small caps. Within handwritten text, deletions are shown with a horizontal rule (“visiting”), or, for solitary characters, a slash mark (“&”). Inserted words or characters appear enclosed by carets (“was”); solitary inserted characters appear with a single sublinear caret (“—”). Revisions are transcribed in the order in which they were intended to be read, when that order can be determined. Distinct additions to a single line of printed text are separated by a vertical rule (“our M town | each raft”). Mark Twain’s word counts, directions on where to begin or end a reading, and notes to himself about tone of voice or delivery (including underscores added by hand) are not transcribed from the printed pages unless they are illegible in the facsimile. Transcribed revisions to the printed pages are preceded by a page and line cue indicating their intended placement. Line numbers do not include titles or picture captions.
Within this section:
Group A | Group B | Group C
[begin page 582]
“Call this a gov’ment?”
The two pages reproduced below are in the Mark Twain Papers (CU-MARK). They are from the group of Huckleberry Finn proof sheets called “Pfs2” in the Description of Texts (see pages 799–801). All revisions are in pencil.
Within this section:
A-1 | A-2
[begin page 583]
&—it was
caked on him & dried, so’st he looked solid—
2
just glancing at him
he was a-souring af after a spree, 49.5: he went a-swellin’ around the old sugar-house & says:
49.11: Tries to take that son away from him; 49.25:& I
oldes’ citizens49.28:I’d be—if I was washed.
[begin page 584]
head over heels
& was most drownded. We fished him out & stood him up. It was the first time I ever
see him
stuck. He couldn’t say a word. Just stood there & dripped—stood there & looked
oncomfortable; I never see a man look so oncom over a little
thing—by & by he
just——
[begin page 585]
“Raftsmen fight”
The twelve pages reproduced below are from Mark Twain’s copy of Life on the Mississippi in the Clifton Waller Barrett Library at the University of Virginia (ViU). On pages B-10 and B-11, Mark Twain turned one raftsman’s lengthy boast into an exchange between the “corpse-maker” (“CM”) and the “Child of Sin” (“CS”). The notation “CD” on B-10 may refer to “Child of Death” or “Child of Desolation.” Revisions are in pencil.
Within this section:
B-1 | B-2 | B-3 | B-4
B-5 | B-6 | B-7 | B-8
B-9 | B-10 | B-11 | B-12
[begin page 586]
[begin page 587]
[begin page 588]
[begin page 589]
[begin page 590]
[begin page 591]
[begin page 592]
each raft 42.4: white pine
a dozen or 42.7: bragging
of ex-keelboatmen 42.11: raftsmen’s 42.13: part of
of mine
A boy, Huck Finn, is
speaking. The scene is a mighty monster raft, at midnight. Clemens did not mark page 43, on which the raft episode began with the words “But . . . nearly” (107.1–11 in this edition).
[begin page 593]
stuff 44.22: another 44.24: run to his mammy—she’d be uneasy to have
him out so long.
[begin page 594]
[begin page 595]
[begin page 596]
entrails! vitals! 47.34:By & by they
And so
they went on & on & on till they got plum out of breath. Then they
went 47.35: still blowing 47.38: And you bet you he done it, too. Clemens did not mark page 48 (111.16–112.9 in this
text).
[begin page 597]
[begin page 598]
“A Dazzling Achievement”
The documents below are of two types: Mark Twain’s holograph lecture notes, transcribed, and his marked page proofs, reproduced in facsimile. All are in the Mark Twain Papers (CU-MARK). The content of the notes (C-3 through C-8) ties them closely to the proofs (C-1 and C-2, and C-9 through C-22), which, like Group A, are from among those called “Pfs2” in the Description of Texts (see pages 799–801). When Mark Twain began revising the proofs, he evidently intended to divide the readings into four parts, parts 1 and 2 perhaps comprising chapters 36 and 37. Only portions of parts 3 and 4, which became the basis for readings he delivered, survive. He prepared some material for part 3 near the beginning of chapter 38, canceling page 325 (C-1), summarizing the action of pages 324–25 on page 326 (C-2), and then copying the revised page 326 onto two manuscript pages (C-3 and C-4). Manuscript notes C-5 through C-8 (which are missing at least one manuscript page to complete the sequence) evidently supersede the work on C-1 through C-4. They also provide a new beginning for the reading, summarizing the action of chapters 36 and 37. Note C-8 (which in part repeats the language of the second paragraph of proof page 335, note C-15) concludes with “Tom, he thought of something & says.” Virtually the same words introduce Tom’s discourse on the need for spiders and other vermin if Jim is to be a properly literary prisoner (page 328, missing from the proofs; 324.9 in this edition). Although Mark Twain at one time planned to divide parts 3 and 4 of his reading at the end of chapter 38 (he wrote the words “10 min” and “To be contin” at the end of the chapter on C-12), he noted other proposed divisions on the proofs as well. At the beginning of chapter 40 he wrote “Part 4 properly begins here” (C-17), and two pages later again noted “No 4”; his final division is not evident from these proofs.
Mark Twain wrote notes C-3 and C-4, which are numbered 1 and 2, on two sheets of laid tablet paper which measure 14.3 by 22.6 centimeters (5⅝ by 8⅞ inches) and have horizontal chain lines 1.9 centimeters (¾ inch) apart; these leaves are watermarked “PURE LINEN.” Notes C-5 through C-8 were written on four sheets of Blair’s Keystone Linen laid paper, torn from a tablet. The leaves measure 14 by 22.4 centimeters (5½ by 8 13/16 inches) and have vertical chain lines 2.4 centimeters (15/16 inch) apart. These pages are numbered 1, 2, 4, and 5; page 3 is missing. All the notes are in pencil.
Within this section:
C-1 | C-2 | C-3 | C-4
C-5 | C-6 | C-7 | C-8
C-9 | C-10 | C-11 | C-12
C-13 | C-14 | C-15 | C-16
C-17 | C-18 | C-19 | C-20
C-21 | C-22
[begin page 599]
Prov.
Matinee.
[begin page 600]
[begin page 601]
1
Well, Tom he fixed up a coat of arms for Jim, & a lot of mournful inscriptions for him to scratch on the wall; but Jim said it would take him
a year.
to scrabble such a lot of truck onto the logs with a nail; then Tom said—
Come to think, the logs ain’t agoing to answer; they don’t have
log walls
in a dungeon. We got to dig the inscriptions into a
2
rock; we’ll fetchgo & get a rock.
Jim said it would take him such a pison long time to dig them into a rock, he wouldn’t ever get out.
But it had to be done. Tom says: We got to have “There’s a gaudy big grindstone down at the mill; well smouch that & carve the things on it.
It warn’t no slouch of an idea; & it warn’t no slouch of a grindstone, nuther. We smouched it, & set out to roll her home that hot summer night, & it was a most nation tough job. Sometimes, do what we could, we couldn’t keep her from falling over; & she come mighty
1
I wish to read
This is part of a chapter from an unpublished story of mine called the Adventures of Huckleberry Finn—the episode is a sort of story in itself— & I will divide it & make 2 separate readings of it.
Jim, a runaway slave from Missouri,—he is an old friend of Huck Finn & Tom Sawyer,—is captured, far down the Mississippi, & by chance is imprisoned in an isolated log cabin on a small plantation belonging to Tom’s uncle,—& Tom is visiting there on a visit. When this episode begins, Tom & Huck have been secretly at work, 2 or 3 weeks, now, to set Jim free.
[begin page 602]
1-½ 2
They could get him out & turn1 him loose any night, without any trouble, for no watch is kept; but Tom has read all the remarkable prison-escapes
page 3 of Mark Twain’s notes does not survive
3 4
to put in a dozen nights digging a hole under a bottom log in the rear to get him out at. At this work they are protected from sight by a clabboard lean-to which joins the rear of the cabin.
Huck says:
5
Well sir, after bout 3 weeks of the most nation hard work every night, we’d got mostthe bulkof every kind of the work was done at last; & we was all pretty much wore faggedwore out & used up, but mainlyspecially Jim. So one midnight when we was just bout to creep out through the hole & shove home to bed, Tom he thought of something, & he thought of something & says:
[begin page 603]
ain’t gwine to stay in no sich place. 329.12:—kin stan’ ’em—
worry right margin: (pathetic) (almost tearful)
[begin page 604]
bout gallopin
& scramblin round& carryin on over a pusson when he’s
tryin’ to res—in de worl! 330.21: then they’ll come a piling out
[begin page 605]
[begin page 606]
[begin page 607]
[begin page 608]
somehow she, well 334.19:—in the night—334.20: the way
o’ that—334.21: She could make more fuss over a little thing 334.25: just take a frog or some thing cold
& 334.29: if you b’lieve me,
left margin: jest that prejudiced
[begin page 609]
well it was beautiful
to see 335.11: shy
Well, he, well he
was kinder dissatisfied. 335.13: for the
escape335.21:astonishing
[begin page 610]
[begin page 611]
[begin page 612]
said
“I’ll go & 340.3: out
with Jim 340.4:the window down
the rod
& coming up I come ker- slam against A. S. She says:
[begin page 613]
[begin page 614]
yaller342.29:no
sigal—yet;
[begin page 615]
& into
the lean-to 343.4: tramp
scrape that door. 343.11:
& Tom 343.12:till for
343.13: to get further; 343.17: slip slip 343.21: again, 343.22: & that 343.23:;
343.24:,343.25: & 343.26: there 343.27:soared flew
[begin page 616]
follows “come”:s the dogs, 344.9: behind 344.11: for 344.12: &
we344.13: hid 344.21: & the proudest,
[begin page 617]
Mark Twain prepared several selections from Huckleberry Finn for his 1895–96 world lecture tour by annotating volume one of Bernhard Tauchnitz’s two-volume edition (SLC 1895a), which he had purchased in Paris in 1894 or early 1895. This volume, comprising chapters 1–22, survives among the Mark Twain Papers (CU-MARK). Sixty-five pages (including the front cover) are reproduced here in photofacsimile. Five pages annotated by Mark Twain are not reproduced. On these five pages he indicated only where a particular selection was to begin or end, information which is reported at the end of this headnote.
At the age of fifty-nine, Mark Twain was reluctant to undertake a year-long tour, but the collapse of his publishing house and the failure of the Paige typesetting-machine venture obliged him “to mount the platform . . . or starve,” as he put it somewhat melodramatically to H. H. Rogers.1 Traveling with his wife, Olivia, and daughter Clara, he opened the tour in Cleveland on 15 July 1895, then made more than twenty stops in the United States and Canada before sailing on 23 August from Vancouver for Australia and thence to New Zealand, India, Ceylon, Mauritius, and South Africa, finally coming to rest in London.
The facetious plan of Mark Twain’s tour was to effect the moral regeneration of the human race by instructing it in principles of conduct illustrated from a variety of his own stories. The “Jumping Frog” tale, for example, illustrated the folly of putting too much faith in a passing stranger; the blue-jay yarn from A Tramp Abroad taught that every undertaking should be made wholeheartedly; and his reminiscence in The Innocents Abroad about the dead man he discovered as a boy in his father’s office taught that it was best to learn the limit of one’s personal courage early, so as not to strain it. The design of the “morals lecture” enabled Mark Twain to string together seven or eight unrelated stories that he selected from a working repertoire of about twenty-five—choosing according to his own mood and the temper of his audience.2 He began preparing for his tour in the spring
[begin page 618]
| Turning Robbers | H. 1–21. |
| Praying—Spiritual Gifts | 28 |
| Attacking the A-rabs. | 30. |
| Jim tells Huck’s fortune | 39 |
| Reforming H’s pap | 46 |
| Jim & the “bank.” | 87 |
| King Sollermun | 141 |
| Polly-voo franzy? | 145 |
| Small-pox & a lie save Jim | 160. |
| The Feud | 195 |
| ″ ″ | 204 |
| Duke & Dauphin | 217 |
Mark Twain probably annotated much of the Tauchnitz Huckleberry Finn sometime between late May and mid-July, when he started west. He may have worked on it during the initial weeks of the tour, since he was dissatisfied with his first few performances. In fact, he continued to expand and alter his repertoire throughout the North American phase of the trip.
He had been performing for a week before he actually used a selection from Huckleberry Finn. James B. Pond, his manager for the American portion of the tour, noted that on 23 July in Minneapolis Mark Twain “introduced a new entertainment, blending pathos with humor with unusual continuity. This was at Mrs. Clemens’s suggestion.”4 The selection was “Small-pox & a lie save Jim” (from chapter 16).5 It was enthusiastically received and Mark Twain himself was pleased with the results. “I am getting into good platform condition at last,” he wrote the following day. “It went well, went to suit me, here last night.”6 For the next three months, Mark Twain included the same selection in nearly every performance.
On 27 July, at his second performance in Winnipeg, Manitoba, Mark Twain tried out another selection from Huckleberry Finn—the “King Sollermun” passage from chapter 14, which had been a staple of his 1884–85
[begin page 619]
Late in August, as he neared Australia, he knew he was facing a schedule that required as many as five performances in some of the larger cities. He had therefore to plan several different programs to avoid repeating himself too often in the same city. His notebook reveals that he considered including two further selections from Huckleberry Finn: “Jim’s Bank” from chapter 8, and the “Raft-Quarrel,” possibly the episode from chapter 15 in which Jim berates Huck for cruelly tricking him.8 But judging from numerous reviews of his lectures, Mark Twain did not actually use either selection.
While en route to Australia, however, he did develop and refine his introduction for “Small-pox & a lie save Jim,” the most popular and commented-upon selection in his program. In his notebook he wrote out his introduction to it:
Next, I should exploit the proposition that in a crucial moral emergency a sound heart is a safer guide than an ill-trained conscience. I sh’d support this doctrine with a chapter from a book of mine where a sound heart & a deformed conscience come into collision & conscience suffers defeat. Two persons figure in this chapter: Jim, a middle-aged slave, & Huck Finn, a boy of 14, son of the town drunkard. These two are close friends, bosom friends, drawn together by community of misfortune. Huck is the child of neglect & acquaintd with cold, hunger, privation, humiliation, & with the unearned aversion of the upper crust of the community. The respectable boys were not allowed to play with him—so they played with him all the time—preferred his company to any other. There was nothing against him but his rags, & to a boy’s untutored eye rags don’t count if the person in them is satisfactory.
In those old slave-holding days the whole community was agreed as to one thing—the awful sacredness of slave property. To help steal a horse or a cow was a low crime, but to help a hunted slave, or feed him or shelter him, or hide him, or comfort him, in his troubles, his terrors, his despair, or hesitate to promptly betray him to the slave-catcher when opportunity offered was a much baser crime, & carried with it a stain, a moral smirch which nothing could wipe away. That this sentiment should exist among slave-owners is comprehensible—there were good commercial reasons for it—but that it should exist & did exist among the paupers, the loafers the tag-rag & bobtail of the community, & in a passionate & uncompromising form, is not in our remote day realizable. It seemed natural enough to me then; natural enough that Huck & his father the worthless loafer should feel it & approve it, though it seems now absurd. It shows that that strange thing, the conscience—that unerring monitor—can be trained to approve any wild thing you want it to approve if you begin its education early & stick to it.9
[begin page 620]
This selection continued to receive high praise from newspaper reviewers throughout the tour. One Melbourne reporter commented:
In telling the half humorous, half pathetic story of Huck. Finn’s dilemma in sheltering a runaway slave, the author gives us in much greater detail than in the book the terrible struggle which goes on between Huck.’s sound heart and his “deformed conscience.” The audience fairly roared with laughter at Huck.’s naïve remark, “The truth is plenty good enough in ordinary places, but when you get into a tight place you can’t rely on it,” just as they accentuated with their perfect silence the pathos of the hunted slave’s cry across the water, rendered with tears in his voice by the author, “Dah you goes, de ole true Huck., de bes’ frien’ poor Jim ever had, de ony frien’ poor Jim has now.”11
And a reviewer in Bombay was moved to philosophize in earnest, if extravagant, terms about “Mark Twain’s power as a speaker, a writer, and a humorist”:
He is a personal embodiment of the truth that the springs of merriment and of pathos lie close together in the emotions of mankind. Mark Twain is not alone the laughter-maker that his books would pronounce him to be. That he has not allowed the humorous to smother the pathetic in his nature was abundantly evident in his narration of the escape of the slave by the aid of Huck Finn. It may be said that Mark Twain has the Virgilian sense of tears in human things, and he knows the acute suffering of the soul.12
Mark Twain clearly succeeded in achieving the effect he sought. The surviving Tauchnitz revisions for this and other passages in the book give us a rare opportunity to see the author at work as he shaped his own published text for platform delivery—more than ten years after it had been written.
The following marked pages of selections for reading are reproduced below. The titles are Mark Twain’s, taken either from his annotation on the cover of the Tauchnitz Huckleberry Finn or from his notebooks.
| “life at widow’s” | 12–15 |
| “Praying—Spiritual Gifts” | 28–29 |
| “Attacking the A-rabs” | 30–34 |
| “Jim tells Huck’s fortune” | 39–40 |
| “Reforming H’s pap” | 46–48 |
| “Encounter” | 82–84 |
|
|
|
| “Jim & the ‘bank’ ” (or “Bees & bank”) | 87,90 |
| “King Sollermun” | 140–42, 144 |
| “Small-pox & a lie save Jim” | 160–67 |
| “Arrival at Buck’s” | 173–82 |
| “Spidery Girl” | 183–85 |
| “The Feud” | 193–98 |
| “The Feud” | 203–208 |
No facsimiles are provided for five pages on which he merely marked where a selection began or ended: “Turning Robbers” began on page 21 and ended on page 26 (“So we unhitched a skiff . . . that settled the thing,” 8.33–12.10); “Call this a gov’ment” began on page 54, but Mark Twain did not indicate where he would end it (“I got the things . . . ,” 33.3); and the “Duke & Dauphin” began on page 217 and ended on page 225 (“One of these fellows . . . their own way,” 160.4–165.17).
Most of Mark Twain’s holograph revisions in the Tauchnitz Huckleberry Finn are reasonably legible in the facsimiles and have not been transcribed, but a few that present unusual problems have been transcribed using conventions similar to those in the transcriptions in other appendixes. Words underscored once are rendered in italics; deletions are shown with a horizontal rule (“lean”); and inserted words or characters appear enclosed by carets (“ sour & moral ”). Transcribed text is cued to the line where it was intended to be read, regardless of where on the page it was written. The revisions are all in a black ink that in places has faded to brown. The diagonal slashes drawn in the margins to mark the beginning and end of the selected passages are in pencil, occasionally overwritten or duplicated in ink, except for those on pages 12, 82, 84, 173, 194, 198, and 203, which are in ink only.
[begin page 622]
[begin page 623]
[begin page 624]
[begin page 625]
[begin page 626]
[begin page 627]
[begin page 628]
[begin page 629]
[begin page 630]
[begin page 631]
[begin page 632]
[begin page 633]
[begin page 634]
[begin page 635]
[begin page 636]
[begin page 638]
[begin page 639]
[begin page 640]
[begin page 641]
[begin page 642]
[begin page 643]
[begin page 644]
[begin page 645]
[begin page 646]
[begin page 647]
[begin page 648]
[begin page 649]
[begin page 650]
[begin page 651]
[begin page 652]
[begin page 653]
[begin page 654]
[begin page 655]
Included here in facsimile is a selection of documents prepared in 1884 and 1885 by Charles L. Webster & Company, New York, and by one of its general agents, the Occidental Publishing Company, San Francisco, to promote the sale of the first American edition of Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. Because the book was to be sold nationwide by subscription and because Clemens did not want to issue it before 40,000 copies had been sold, the Webster company needed to hire a large crew of local sales agents, or canvassers. Prospective canvassers received circulars such as the one issued by the Occidental Publishing Company of San Francisco, whom Webster had contracted to act as general agents for the entire Pacific Coast1 (see figures 1 and 2). Boasting that Mark Twain’s books were the “Quickest Selling in the World,” the advertisement offered financial incentives to agents who made large sales: “TO EVERY CANVASSER selling 50 copies of the book, we will send five additional copies FREE.”
The salesman’s prospectus included either of two advertisements geared toward the book-buying public, one signed by the Webster company (see figures 3 and 4), and the other by the Occidental Publishing Company (see figure 5). These assured the reader that every line was “FRESH AND NEW” and “NOT a sentence of this book has ever before appeared in print in any form.” Each company may also have issued a separate advertising brochure.
Charles L. Webster & Company’s first public announcements of the book appeared in the November 1884 issues of Youth’s Companion and the December issue of Century Magazine and served the dual functions of calling for local agents and advertising the book for the public (see figures 6, 7, and 8).
Webster and Company (and, after 1896, Harper and Brothers) continued
[begin page 656]
[begin page 657]
[begin page 658]
[begin page 659]
[begin page 660]
[begin page 661]
[begin page 662]
[begin page 663]
[begin page 664]
[begin page 665]
When Samuel Clemens turned forty at the end of 1875, he found himself a long way from the little river town in Missouri where he had grown up in genteel poverty. He was now a prosperous citizen of Hartford, Connecticut, and a literary celebrity known to the world as “Mark Twain,” the author of The Innocents Abroad and Roughing It. He had an open invitation to write for the Atlantic Monthly, edited by his friend William Dean Howells,1 and he was well on his way to having “the largest audience of any English writer above ground,” as Richard Watson Gilder put it nine years later.2
Clemens and his wife, Olivia (who celebrated her thirtieth birthday three days before he celebrated his fortieth), had recently built an elaborate brick mansion in Hartford,3 where they lived in modern splendor with their two young daughters, Susie and Clara, and a bevy of household servants.4
[begin page 666]
As recently as May 1875 Clemens had finished a rambling series of articles for the Atlantic called “Old Times on the Mississippi,” which drew extensively on his memories of those piloting days. And in July of that year he finished his first draft of The Adventures of Tom Sawyer, begun sometime in 1872, which drew even more extensively on memories of his Hannibal childhood.7 On 5 July he mentioned completing this draft in a letter to Howells:
I have finished the story & didn’t take the chap beyond boyhood. I believe it would be fatal to do it in any shape but autobiographically—like Gil Blas. I perhaps made a mistake in not writing it in the first person. If I went on, now, & took him into manhood, he would just be like all the one-horse men in literature & the reader would conceive a hearty contempt for him. It is not a boy’s book, at all. It will only be read by adults. It is only written for adults. . . .
By & by I shall take a boy of twelve & run him on through life (in the first person) but not Tom Sawyer—he would not be a good character for it.8
In July 1876, exactly one year after he thought of telling such a tale “in the first person,” and even as he was reading proof for the first chapters of Tom Sawyer, Clemens began work on the sequel. As predicted, he decided to tell it in the first person—and not in Tom’s voice but in the voice of Tom’s friend, Huckleberry Finn, described in chapter 6 of Tom Sawyer as the “idle, and lawless, and vulgar,” young outcast who horrified all the respectable mothers of St. Petersburg.9 More than seven years would pass
[begin page 667]
The typewritten copy of his book, which Clemens thoroughly revised before submitting it to that publisher, is lost. But the complete holograph manuscript from which the typescript was made is available for study—its first half, long assumed lost, having recently been reunited with the second half. Study of this manuscript, upon which the present edition is based, reveals how the text was altered before publication, by the author himself—often in previously unsuspected ways—and by his typists, typesetters, proofreaders, and publisher, sometimes with (but more often without) his active agreement. It also reveals, in greater detail than ever before, exactly when, and by what stages, Clemens composed and then meticulously revised his masterpiece.
From the moment it was published, Huckleberry Finn prompted questions about how and when Clemens wrote it. Brander Matthews and Jeannette Gilder were only the most prominent of the author’s contemporaries to ask him about these matters directly. Interviews with Clemens, and
[begin page 668]
Clemens’s biographer, Albert Bigelow Paine, who had access both to the author himself and to his private papers, published the first, brief chronological account of the book’s composition in 1912. Between 1912 and 1938, only a handful of critics wrote anything about the making of Huckleberry Finn, and of these, only one made use of the known manuscript, which was then still missing its first half.11 When DeVoto succeeded Paine as editor of the Mark Twain Papers in 1938, he welcomed the opportunity to examine, for the first time, the documents he hoped would permit him to speak with real authority about how Huckleberry Finn was written. In 1942 he published the result of his investigation, first as an introduction to a text of the novel, then in Mark Twain at Work. DeVoto’s remarkably detailed effort to describe and date the stages of composition was revolutionary, and was welcomed as “indispensable to scholars.”12 But over the years it was also gradually amended by those who reinterpreted the documents he had, and took advantage of evidence he did not.
Clemens was not especially forthcoming in his letters or notebooks
[begin page 669]
DeVoto, who added greatly to our detailed picture of how the text evolved (he was the first to appreciate the “working notes,” which he found in the Mark Twain Papers), rejected Paine’s middle stage because he said it lacked persuasive documentation.14 He opted instead for only two stages: (a) chapters 1 through 16 (except for chapters 12–14) up to “where Huck’s raft is rammed by a steamboat,” written in July and early August of 1876; and (b) all the rest of the book—chapters 12–14 and all of chapters 17–end—written in the summer of 1883. DeVoto was also the first to realize that a typescript (which he never saw, but which he understood was intended for the typesetter) must have been made of the first part of the book.15
Sixteen years later, Walter Blair (working, like DeVoto, from only the 1883 half of the manuscript) reanalyzed the physical evidence provided by the working notes, comparing their ink and paper to those which Clemens used in letters and other manuscripts found in widely scattered archives. He suggested that Huckleberry Finn had been written not in two stints, but most likely in four: (a) the first sixteen chapters (absent 12–14) in the summer of 1876, as DeVoto had first said; (b) the last three paragraphs of chapter 16 plus chapters 17 and 18 in 1879–80; (c) chapters 19 through 21 sometime between 1880 and 1883; and finally (d) chapters 12–14 and 22–end during the summer of 1883. Blair further argued that there had been two partial typescripts (both lost) made for the printer from the holograph manuscript. The first “consisted of that part of the book written before” the summer of 1883, the holograph for which he thought had been
[begin page 670]
Thirty years later, Blair and Fischer, for the Iowa-California scholarly edition of the novel, had access to more thorough collations of the manuscript and first edition than had ever existed before, and they also had access to documentary materials donated in 1977 to the Vassar College Library.17 They used both to refine the dating of the four stints originally posited by Blair. They also proved that there must have been three partial typescripts, two of which were revised by Clemens. They further suggested that two complete versions of the finally revised text—a copy for the illustrator and a copy for the printer—were assembled from these several typescripts, and that the holograph manuscript of the first half of the book had never been sent to the printer. They could not, however, advance any theory to account for the disappearance of that first half.18
Despite these gradual improvements and refinements in the dating of composition, important questions remained, such as exactly which parts of the text were influenced by Clemens’s 1882 river trip. Everyone agreed that only the missing first half of the manuscript was likely to resolve such questions, and its loss, however mysterious, was widely assumed to be permanent.
Then in the first days of 1991 a truly remarkable rumor swept through the rare book and manuscript world, eventually reaching the Mark Twain Papers in Berkeley. It was said that the first half of the Huckleberry Finn manuscript, which had not been seen for more than one hundred years, had in fact been found in a Hollywood attic, and that it was being evaluated for auction by Sotheby’s in New York. Another rumor had it that a number of manuscript dealers were pooling their funds to come up with the winning bid (estimated to be as high as $1.5 million) while planning to recover their investment by reselling the manuscript, page by page. In January 1991 Sotheby’s telephoned the editors of the Mark Twain Project and confirmed that it had recently authenticated a manuscript of some six hundred pages which was indisputably the missing first half of Huckleberry
[begin page 671]
In November 1885, nine months after he published the first American edition of Huckleberry Finn, Clemens received a letter at his home in Hartford from James Fraser Gluck (1852–97), a lawyer and a curator for the library of the Young Men’s Association in Buffalo. Clemens had never met Gluck, but he had been a member of that association when he lived in Buffalo in 1869–71, as had his friend and partner on the Buffalo Express, Josephus N. Larned (1836–1913), who was now superintendent of the library. Gluck wrote to Clemens, in part:
I can assure you sir, that it would be highly appreciated in this city where you have many readers, if it should seem to you proper to send to the superintendent of the Library Mr. J. N. Larned, or to myself, such manuscript or manuscripts as you might with i.e., wish to present to the Library. They will be accorded a place of honor and preserved in perpetuo.
If I were asking this for myself, I should expect to be refused, for the compliance with such a request would be merely the gratification of a desire for a selfish possession—but I ask it in behalf of a large and constantly growing public institution, in one of the largest cities of our country, where such manuscript will be seen daily by hundreds of people, and through the sight of which interest in literature and literary men will be increased and perpetuated.19
Clemens answered this letter on the day he received it, 11 November, saying in part: “I will comply, as far as I can, with the greatest pleasure—that is, to the extent of 50 per cent, of a MS. book (‘The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn.’)” He was referring to the second half of Huckleberry Finn—the half written last, in 1883. “I have hunted the house over, & that is all I can find,” he explained, adding that the first half of the manuscript must have been sent to “the printers, who never returned it.”20 Gluck acknowledged this letter on 12 November, offering to show Clemens “how pleasant an abiding place” in the library had been set aside for “the much-abused Huckleberry Finn. When Boston & Concord desert him then the home of the Presidents shall take him up.”21 This half of the manuscript was duly shipped and its receipt acknowledged on 14 November 1885: “The manuscript of Huckleberry Finn arrived this afternoon and was at
[begin page 672]
There the matter stood, and might have remained, except that some nineteen months later, probably soon after 24 June 1887, when the Clemenses arrived in Elmira for their usual summer stay, Clemens came across some more of his old manuscript. He promptly sent it to his business agent in Hartford, Franklin G. Whitmore (1846–1926), and instructed him to have it sent to Buffalo. Larned, superintendent of what was by then called the Buffalo Library, acknowledged its receipt on 5 July:
I have received by Express to-day the first half of the Ms. of “Huckleberry Finn” kindly sent to us at Mr. Clemens’ request (we had the second half of the Ms. already). Please express to Mr. Clemens the thanks of the Library and of myself personally.24
Just a few days later, Gluck also sent an acknowledgment: “Please accept my thanks for your kindness in forwarding the first part of Mss. of ‘Finn’ which Mr Larned has just rec’d. The whole can now be bound and placed on exhibition.”25
Despite these letters of acknowledgment from library officials, the first half of the manuscript was neither deposited nor put on display there. As far back as its records go, the library has no indication that it owned anything except the second half, the one sent in 1885. That explains why the 1887 letters were not correctly understood until 1991. The pages at Buffalo actually consisted of chapters 22 through “Chapter the last” (chapter 43), plus sixty pages from chapters 12–14. The assumption had always been, therefore, that Clemens sent chapters 22 through 43 in 1885, then found
[begin page 673]
This view of what must have occurred was understandable, but mistaken. In October 1990 one of James Fraser Gluck’s granddaughters, Barbara Gluck Testa, opened a trunk in her attic and found a stack of 665 manuscript pages in Clemens’s handwriting, together with a blue envelope labeled “MSS. of Huck Finn by Mark Twain.”26 She had found the great bulk of the first half, the part sent by Clemens and acknowledged by Larned and Gluck in July 1887. Clemens himself had been wrong about the printers’ having failed to return it (none of the holograph manuscript had ever gone to the printer). Having unsuccessfully searched the Hartford house in November 1885, Clemens must have found the first half belatedly among his papers in Elmira, in late June 1887. And when, ten years later, James Gluck died suddenly at the age of forty-five, he evidently had the pages of the first half still in his possession. They were presumably gathered up and stored along with his other papers, and these eventually passed to his daughter and then, in 1961, to his granddaughters. Exactly why he still had them instead of the library may never be known. What is clear is that the pages stayed within the Gluck family, tucked away in that trunk, until rediscovered by chance in the fall of 1990.27 The complete manuscript of Huckleberry Finn is now housed in the Mark Twain Room of the Buffalo and Erie County Public Library in Buffalo, New York (NBuBE).
The survival of the first half of the manuscript (here abbreviated MS1 for the whole, but MS1a and MS1b for its two constituent parts) confirms that Clemens kept it in his own possession, and that he must therefore have sent typewritten copy to his publisher instead of the holograph. It also shows that Paine’s 1912 account was essentially accurate, even though seemingly based on little documentation: there were just three (rather than two, or four) major stints or stages in the composition (1876, 1880, and 1883). Moreover it demonstrates for the first time exactly what parts of the text comprised each of these stints, since each can be identified from physical evidence: different writing materials used at different times. MS1
[begin page 674]
Beginning in 1874 and continuing as an almost unbroken habit for fifteen years, Clemens and his family spent at least part of the summer just outside Elmira, New York, at Quarry Farm, the home of Olivia Clemens’s sister and brother-in-law, Susan and Theodore Crane. There, isolated on a hilltop, in a small gazebolike octagonal study built especially for him by Sue Crane,28 Clemens wrote daily on whatever project interested him at the time. In 1874 he worked on the first half of Tom Sawyer, and in 1876 he read the proofs of that book and began a new project—Huckleberry Finn.
His method of working on books was well established by 1876. As he explained to Jeannette Gilder just two years after the publication of Huckleberry Finn, in a letter so frank he decided not to send it, it was his “habit to keep four or five books in process of erection all the time, & every summer add a few courses of bricks to two or three of them; but I cannot forecast which of the two or three it is going to be. It takes seven years to complete
[begin page 675]
It was in the course of one of our many conversations at Onteora that Mark described to me his method of work in writing ‘Tom Sawyer’ and ‘Huckleberry Finn.’ . . . He began the composition of ‘Tom Sawyer’ with certain of his boyish recollections in mind, writing on and on until he had utilized them all, whereupon he put his manuscript aside and ceased to think about it, except in so far as he might recall from time to time, and more or less unconsciously, other recollections of those early days. Sooner or later he would return to his work to make use of memories he had recaptured in the interval. After he had harvested this second crop, he again put his work away, certain that in time he would be able to call back other scenes and other situations. When at last he became convinced that he had made his profit out of every possible reminiscence, he went over what he had written with great care, adjusting the several instalments one to the other, sometimes transposing a chapter or two and sometimes writing into the earlier chapters the necessary preparation for adventures in the later chapters unforeseen when he was engaged on the beginnings of the book. Thus he was enabled to bestow on the completed story a more obvious coherence than his haphazard procedure would otherwise have attained.30
Clemens had earlier described how he hit a snag during the composition of Tom Sawyer. Having written a chapter that was “a failure, in conception, moral, truth to nature & execution,” he used for the first time what became a standard metaphor of his composition process: “I had worked myself
[begin page 676]
It was by accident that I found out that a book is pretty sure to get tired, along about the middle, and refuse to go on with its work until its powers and its interest should have been refreshed by a rest and its depleted stock of raw materials reinforced by lapse of time. It was when I had reached the middle of “Tom Sawyer” that I made this invaluable find. At page 400 of my manuscript the story made a sudden and determined halt and refused to proceed another step. Day after day it still refused. I was disappointed, distressed, and immeasurably astonished, for I knew quite well that the tale was not finished, and I could not understand why I was not able to go on with it. The reason was very simple—my tank had run dry; it was empty; the stock of materials in it was exhausted; the story could not go on without materials; it could not be wrought out of nothing. When the manuscript had lain in a pigeon-hole two years I took it out, one day, and read the last chapter I had written. It was then I made the great discovery that when the tank runs dry you’ve only to leave it alone and it will fill up again, in time, while you are asleep—also while you are at work at other things, and are quite unaware that this unconscious and profitable cerebration is going on. There was plenty of material now, and the book went on and finished itself without any trouble.
Ever since then, when I have been writing a book I have pigeon-holed it without misgivings when its tank ran dry, well knowing that it would fill up again without any of my help within the next two or three years, and that then the work of completing it would be simple and easy.32
Huckleberry Finn was written over seven years in three widely separated stints. There is ample textual evidence of adjustments made to early portions of the book, aimed at providing the “necessary preparation” for later episodes. From the beginning, Clemens had the idea of writing this story of a boy’s adventures in the first person—“autobiographically—like Gil Blas”—as he told Howells in 1875. Brander Matthews recognized a two-fold debt, in method and in form, to Le Sage’s Gil Blas (originally published in 1715–35) and mentioned it to Clemens:
I ventured to remind him that this composition at irregular intervals had been the method of Le Sage, whose ‘Gil Blas,’ the most popular of picaresque romances, was a prototype of ‘Huckleberry Finn,’ in so far as it presented an unheroic hero who is not the chief actor in the chief episodes he sets forth and who is often little more than a recording spectator, before whose tolerant eyes the panorama of human vicissitude is unrolled. And I was not at all surprised when Mark promptly assured me that he had never read ‘Gil Blas’; I knew he was not a bookish man.33
Clemens was probably being disingenuous, if not simply forgetful. As his 5 July 1875 letter to Howells reveals, he had Gil Blas specifically in mind as a model for his sequel to Tom Sawyer. In fact, he had read Gil Blas in 1869 and commented on it in a letter to his then-fiancée, Olivia L. Langdon:
[begin page 677]
I have read several books, lately, but none worth marking, & so I have not marked any. I started to mark the Story of a Bad Boy, but for the life of me I could not admire the volume much. I am now reading Gil Blas, but am not marking it. If you have not read it you need not. It would sadly offend your delicacy, & I prefer not to have that dulled in you.34
The other book that he “could not admire” was one that, like Gil Blas, undoubtedly influenced the creation of Tom Sawyer and Huckleberry Finn: Thomas Bailey Aldrich’s semiautobiographical Story of a Bad Boy, published in 1869. Aldrich described his Tom Bailey as “a real human boy, such as you may meet anywhere in New England, and no more like the impossible boy in a story-book than a sound orange is like one that has been sucked dry,” and involved him in various mischievous escapades.35 Writing to an unidentified correspondent in 1891, Clemens asserted that he had been drawn to “the boy-life out on the Mississippi” as a subject for literature by the “peculiar charm” it held for him, as well as for a second, more pragmatic, reason—the competition was less intense in the “boyhood field” of literature.36
Ultimately, of course, Adventures of Huckleberry Finn was not driven by literary models, nor by simple nostalgia. In creating the book, Clemens drew on his memories, his reading, his humor, his wide sympathies, his anger at cruelty and injustice, and his interest in discovering how to recreate the voices of the Mississippi Valley and how to reimagine the place and time so that it seemed profoundly real to his readers.
Settled in at Quarry Farm by the middle of June 1876, Clemens first tried to work on what he called his “pet book”—perhaps the same work referred to as the “double-barreled novel” in a letter to Howells.37 But his
[begin page 678]
You never have been here, I believe; therefore you don’t know what peace & comfort are; & you never can know till you come here one of these days & spend a week or so with us. . . . We are in the air, overhanging the valley 700 feet, & my study is 100 yards from the house. This is not my vacation, mind you—I take that in winter. I am booming along with my new book—have written ⅓ of it & shall finish it in 6 working weeks.
Tom Sawyer proofs come in slowly; received & read Chapter 8 yesterday.38
A few days later he wrote to Mary Mason Fairbanks: “I am tearing along on a new book & can’t interlard a vacation, being warned against it by the fate of my pet book, which lies at home one-third done & never more to be touched, I judge. Destroyed by a vacation. The mill got cold & could not be warmed up any more.”39 Finally in a letter of 9 August to Howells, he explicitly identified the new project:
The double-barreled novel lies torpid. I found I could not go on with it. . . . I waited & waited, to see if my interest in it would not revive, but gave it up a month ago & began another boys’ book—more to be at work than anything else. I have written 400 pages on it—therefore it is very nearly half done.40 It is Huck Finn’s Autobiography. I like it only tolerably well, as far as I have got, & may possibly pigeon-hole or burn the MS when it is done.41
Writing his new book as a first-person narrative—“Huck Finn’s Autobiography”—meant that Clemens had to create a transition from Tom Sawyer because the new book was both a sequel and a departure. In the very
[begin page 679]
The gang’s adventures are the subject of chapter 3 of Huckleberry Finn. In chapter 4, however, Clemens hints at an altogether darker narrative when Huck’s violent and drunken father, Pap Finn, reappears in his life (as Huck himself predicted he would in chapter 25 of Tom Sawyer).44 Saved from the widow’s “sivilizing” but trapped by his father’s violence and greed, Huck decides to escape. In chapter 7, he stages his own death and flees down the river in a salvaged canoe, deciding to stop at Jackson’s Island. He soon encounters a friend who is now a runaway slave, “Miss Watson’s Jim” (chapter 8). Jim’s plight as a fugitive slave introduces a subversive new element to the plot—slavery, a subject hardly touched upon in Tom Sawyer. In the next chapters, Jim tells a long “ghost” story about his experience with a cadaver in a medical college;45 the island floods; Huck
[begin page 680]
[begin page 681]
When, on 9 August, Clemens reported to Howells that he had “written 400 pages” of the new book,47 he still had about a month of his working summer season left. Even though he made no other reference to Huckleberry Finn in his letters of late August and early September, he seems to have continued to work on the book, albeit not exclusively: on 8 August he began compiling his “Record of the Small Foolishnesses,” unconscious witticisms of his two young daughters, and by 23 August he had written a sketch, “The Canvasser’s Tale,” which he sent to Howells for publication in the Atlantic.48 Despite these distractions, he probably finished the entire 446 pages of MS1a before he left Elmira on September 10 or 11.49
MS1a consists of manuscript pages 1 through 446 (1.1–80.29 and 99.1–146.11 in this edition) and comprises chapter 1 through the middle of chapter 12, and chapter 15 through the middle of chapter 18.50 The pages are all written in black ink on Crystal-Lake Mills stationery, with numerous revisions in pencil. There are some minor variations in handwriting and density of ink that might signal small breaks in composition, but the only evidence suggestive of a longer pause occurs on page 362, where his marginal notes refer to an as yet unidentified literary work.51 MS1a comprises just over a third of the full manuscript, which totals almost fourteen hundred pages. Clemens provided chapter breaks throughout, although only the first nine chapters were numbered. (Ultimately, he would reconfigure most of the chapter breaks before publication. The chapter numbers mentioned here and throughout the introduction are those of the first edition.)
Without access to the first half of the manuscript, and with the evidence of Clemens’s own reference to having completed 400 pages by 9 August, DeVoto and Blair speculated that he broke off his first writing stint where the steamboat collides with the raft in chapter 16. They assumed the collision
[begin page 682]
When Clemens put aside his manuscript in August or September 1876, he stopped rather abruptly at the top of page 446 in the middle of a conversation at the Grangerford house, where Huck asks Buck Grangerford to explain what a feud is. The six lines of inscription at the top of that page were the last of the manuscript written in black ink.55 Huck’s question apparently remained unanswered for more than three years, as Clemens worked
[begin page 683]
MS1b is the shortest of the three physically distinct sections of manuscript: it comprises pages 447 through 663, which became the remainder of chapter 18 through the end of chapter 21 (“ ‘Well . . . with.”, 146.12–188.16 in this edition). It is written in the same purple ink and on the same white wove paper as pages 367 through 414 of The Prince and the Pauper manuscript,57 and matches ten of the eleven pages of Group 2 of the working notes for Huckleberry Finn.58 Blair believed that Clemens might have written chapters 19 through 21 at some point between mid-June 1880 and mid-June 1883, but that time span can now be narrowed considerably: the newly discovered manuscript shows that those chapters were written, like the second half of chapter 18, in the purple ink that Clemens used only until mid-June 1880 and then not again for several years. Although it is possible that MS1b pages were written anytime between
[begin page 684]
On 6 May 1880 Clemens wrote to Howells that he had “knocked off” writing and did not “intend to go to work again till we go away for the summer, 5 or 6 weeks hence.”60 But at Quarry Farm that summer his time was for the most part devoted to his work on The Prince and the Pauper. Except for the draft of the “Notice” page, which he added to the beginning of the Huckleberry Finn manuscript toward the end of June (or possibly later), the manuscript was put aside for a second stretch of years.61 Despite this break in composition, he clearly had both books in mind when he wrote a letter to his sister dated by Paine “near the end of the year” 1880:
I have two stories, and by the verbal agreement they are both going into the same book; but Livy says they’re not, and by George I. she ought to know. She says they’re going into separate books, and that one of them is going to be elegantly gotten up, even if the elegance of it eats up the publisher’s profits and mine too.
I anticipate that publisher’s melancholy surprise when he calls here Tuesday. However, let him suffer; it is his own fault. People who fix up agreements with me without first finding out what Livy’s plans are take their fate into their own hands.
I said two stories, but one of them is only half done; two or three months’ work on it yet. I shall tackle it Wednesday or Thursday; that is, if Livy yields and allows both stories to go in one book, which I hope she won’t.62
The “verbal agreement” with publisher James R. Osgood was overruled: The Prince and the Pauper was eventually published separately, and Clemens apparently did no further work on Huckleberry Finn in 1880.63
In the 217 pages Clemens completed in the spring of 1880 he brought the Grangerford-Shepherdson feud to its bloody conclusion and reunited
[begin page 685]
Between the fall of 1880 and the spring and summer of 1883, various events and projects affected the completion of Huckleberry Finn. The first was the death on 28 September 1880 of Clemens’s publisher, Elisha Bliss, Jr., of the American Publishing Company. Long dissatisfied with Bliss’s management of his books, Clemens signed a contract with James R. Osgood, a sociable Boston publisher with an impressive list of English and New England authors and a wide circle of literary friends. Osgood, however, proved to know little about subscription publishing. Over the next few years, his friendship with Osgood strained by disappointment over sales of his books, especially Life on the Mississippi, Clemens began to contemplate becoming his own subscription publisher.
Another project, a long-deferred trip to the Mississippi River region,66 finally became reality in April 1882. Clemens, accompanied by Osgood and a hired stenographer, Roswell H. Phelps, traveled first to St. Louis, and
[begin page 686]
Clemens’s observations and impressions, coupled with his extensive reading for the trip, formed the basis for forty-six of the sixty chapters of Life on the Mississippi (chapters 4 through 17 reprinted his 1875 Atlantic Monthly series, “Old Times on the Mississippi”). The influence of the trip on the second half of Huckleberry Finn is undeniable, but its relationship to the first half was not well understood until the discovery of MS1. Because Life on the Mississippi was published two years before Huckleberry Finn, and because so little was known about the composition of chapters 17 through 21 of the latter book, it was generally accepted that passages in those chapters—the Grangerford-Shepherdson feud and the description of the Grangerford parlor, in particular—were reworkings of incidents and descriptions already composed for Life on the Mississippi.69 In fact, the order of composition was the reverse: the passages in Huckleberry Finn came first and were then reworked for Life on the Mississippi.
The return to the river certainly revived Clemens’s youthful memories, but it also stoked his anger. The advances in the social and legal status of blacks achieved during Reconstruction, while under siege from the beginning, had been further deteriorating since 1876, and racial violence against the former slave population was increasing. With unhindered mob rule, intimidation, arson, and lynchings, the justice system in the South seemed to have entirely broken down.70 The adult Clemens, a “northernized ex-Missourian” as Walter Blair styled him,71 had in “Old Times on the Mississippi” and in The Adventures of Tom Sawyer nostalgically recreated the times, places, and voices he knew in his youth. In 1882 he was confronted with the reality of riverside scenes and towns, with the speech
[begin page 687]
Once back in Hartford in late May 1882, Clemens immediately began work on Life on the Mississippi. In mid-July he and his family relocated to Quarry Farm. Despite intermittent health problems that interfered with his work all summer,73 he made some progress. Between 31 July and 15 September he started two Elmira typists, Harry M. Clarke and Jakob B. Coykendall, on the job of copying the holograph manuscript of Life on the Mississippi. They typed at least to the middle of chapter 44.74 This would be the first of his books for which he would submit typewritten printer’s copy to the publisher. Clemens’s decision to start using typewritten copy must have been, to some extent, the result of his own recent successful attempts to use the machine. He had acquired a Remington all-capitals typewriter early in 1882 (similar to, but not identical with, the machine that Clarke and Coykendall used in Elmira), and he began typing some of his own letters and also dictating some to a secretary who then typed them.75 (His earlier experiences, with an all-capitals machine purchased
[begin page 688]
On 15 September, from Elmira, Clemens wrote Osgood about Life on the Mississippi: “Am mailing you another chapter or two. . . . Book nearly done, now. Is mainly in the hands of the copyist. Will send you the seven (reprint) chapters, revised and corrected presently—the ones first illustrated by the artist. Also, title-page, etc. (‘Life on the Mississippi’), so that you can hurry up your canvassing specimen.” Osgood, himself just back from a summer in Europe, wrote to Clemens on 22 September pressing him for matter for the salesmen’s prospectus or canvassing book.77 Clemens probably also had the “raft episode” from his Huckleberry Finn manuscript typed at this time: he had decided to include it in chapter 3 of Life on the Mississippi, and it would appear in the prospectus. With all the pressure to complete Life on the Mississippi, however, it seems unlikely that he had the rest of MS1 of Huckleberry Finn typed at this time.
Back in Hartford at the end of September, Clemens continued to struggle with Life on the Mississippi. While attempting to complete the book by writing new chapters, he found himself distracted by also having to respond to the publisher’s editing and deletions in the portion already completed.78 To add to Clemens’s difficulties, the woman he employed in Hartford to type the remainder of his manuscript succumbed to scarlet fever in December, further delaying the book.79 On 15 January 1883, however,
[begin page 689]
Despite Clemens’s frustrating experience with Life on the Mississippi, the new technology of the typewriter transformed his way of working. It allowed him to make a clean copy of his manuscript, greatly facilitating his continued revision of the text. He described the process in a letter of recommendation for Harry M. Clarke:
this is to certify that mr. h. m. clarke copied a great portion of my forthcoming book, “life on the mississippi,” for me on a type-writer; that this was the first copying for the press done for me on the type-writer; that previously,⁁ my books had been copied for the press with the pen exclusively.
this experience with the type-writer has been of so high a value to me that not even the type-writer itself can describe it. it has banished one of the prime sorrows of my life. after one has read a chapter or two of his literature in the type-writer character, the pages of the sheets begin to look as natural, and rational, and as void of offense to his eye as do his own written pages; therefore he can alter and amend them with comfort and facility; but this is never the case with a book copied by pen. the pen pages have a foreign and unsympathetic look, and this they never lose. one cannot recognize himself in them. the emending and revamping of one’s literature in this form is as barren of interest, and indeed as repellant,as if it were the literature of a stranger and an enemy. my copying is always done on the type-writer, now, and i shall not be likely to ever use any other system.81
Although revision and proofreading on Life on the Mississippi continued briefly in late January and early February 1883,82 Clemens was able to report to Howells on 1 March:
i have been an utterly free person for a month or two; and i do not believe i ever so greatly appreciated and enjoyed and realized the absence of the chains of slavery as i do this time. usually my first waking thought in the morning is, . . . i have nothing to do today, i belong to nobody, i have ceased from being a slave. of course the highest pleasure to be got out of freedom, and the having nothing to do is labor. therefore i labor. but i take my time about it. i work one hour or four as happens to suit my mind, and quit when i please. and so these days are days of entire enjoyment.83
In all probability, Clemens’s “labor” included a return to Huckleberry Finn. He may have made new revisions to his manuscript (MS1a, 1–446, and MS1b, 447–663) at this time, mostly in pencil,84 but most of his revisions to this first part of the text would be made after he had it typed.
[begin page 690]
TS1, a typed copy of MS1, was most likely prepared sometime between October 1882 and 7 May 1883 (although possibly as late as 4 June) on the all-capitals Remington typewriter Clemens and his typist used in Hartford.85 Clemens probably began revising it immediately, and the 159-page typescript, at least partially revised, went with him to Quarry Farm in late June 1883. (When he began writing the last half of the manuscript there, he began with page 160.)86 The new typescript was a boon to him: as he testified in April 1883, having clean, typewritten pages made it possible to “alter and amend them with comfort and facility.”87
TS1 is lost, as are all subsequent typescripts. What is known about it has been inferred from (a) Clemens’s references to it in the working notes he made for Huckleberry Finn during the spring and summer of 1883; (b) his entries in his notebooks to identify passages for public reading; (c) the references to it which the illustrator made on his original drawings when he used it as a guide;88 and (d) the documentary evidence of Clemens’s other contemporary typescripts.89
[begin page 691]
They went off & I hopped aboard the raft, saying to myself, I’ve done wrong again, & was trying as hard as I could to do right, too; but when it come right down to telling them it was a nigger on the raft, & I opened my mouth a-purpose to do it, I couldn’t. I am a mean, low coward, & it’s the fault of them that brung me up. If I had been raised right, I wouldn’t said anything about anybody being sick, but the more I try to do right, the more I can’t. I reckon I won’t ever try again, because it ain’t no sort of use & only makes me feel bad. From this out I mean to do everything as wrong as I can do it, & just go straight to the dogs & done with it. I don’t see why people’s put here, anyway.
But Huck’s narration as revised on TS1 and published in the first American edition shows a clear advance in his ability to identify and rationalize his moral dilemma. He says:
They went off, and I got aboard the raft, feeling bad and low, because I knowed very well I had done wrong, and I see it warn’t no use for me to try to learn to do right; a body that don’t get started right when he’s little, ain’t got no show—when the pinch comes there ain’t nothing to back him up and keep him to his work, and so he gets beat. Then I thought a minute, and says to myself, hold on,—s’pose you’d a done right and give Jim up; would you felt better than what you do now? No, says I, I’d feel bad—I’d feel just the same way I do now. Well, then, says I, what’s the use you learning
[begin page 692]
By the time Clemens finished revising TS1, its pages must have been dense with his markings.91
[begin page 696]
Clemens referred to TS1 in a marginal note in MS1a and in his 1883 working notes (Group 3, notes 3–1, 3–2, and 3-4, in Mark Twain’s Working Notes, pp. 503–5) when he was reviewing what he had written so far. In addition, he referred to TS1, to the raftsmen’s passage from LoM, and to TS2 in the notebook he kept in late 1884 when he was choosing readings for his upcoming lecture tour. Between April and July 1884, Kemble annotated his illustration boards with references to TS1, TS2, and TS3. All the known references are listed below: in the first column, the typescript page, followed in parentheses by the page and line in the present edition; in the second column, the words mentioned by Clemens or Kemble; and in the third, the source of the information, whether from Kemble’s notations or from Clemens’s (SLC) marginal notes, working notes, or notebook (as published in N&J3).
TS1
| 13 (14.12–28) | “old Finn supposed to” | SLC, 3-1 |
| 19 (19.27–20.7) | “GaveSold $6000 to Judge” | SLC, 3-1 |
| 36 (39.16–17) | “Log raft. . . Plank raft 12 × 16.” | SLC, 3-1 |
| 43 (47.17) | “ ‘Bessie’ or Becky?” | SLC, 3-1, 3-2 |
| 62 (61.3–14) | “Huck’s father in floating house” | SLC, 3-1 |
| 64 (63.1–16) | ″ | SLC, 3-1 |
| 68 (67.8–12) | “I started . . . quarters” | MS1a, 235 |
| 70 (69.33–70.1) | another reference to “Huck’s . . . house” | SLC, 3-1 |
TS2 interpolation at TS1 page 81
| 81–10 (88.23) | “ ‘Hello whats up’ ” | Kemble |
| 81–15 (92.7) | “ ‘We turned in & slept like dead people’ ” | Kemble |
| 81–19 (96.2–13) | “ ‘The story of Solomon’ ” | Kemble |
TS1
| 83 (100.24) | “ ‘Amongst a lot of snags’ ” | Kemble |
| 84 (100.29–103.3) | “waking Jim” | SLC, N&J3, 60 |
| 86 (102.18) | “Asleep with one arm across the oar” | Kemble |
LoM tear sheets interpolated at TS1 page 89
| 89½ (107.1) | “Raftsmen fight” | SLC, N&J3 , 60 |
TS1
| 90 (123.30–124.3) | “Troubled conscience & smallpox” | SLC, N&J3, 60 |
| 90 (124.20–22) | “Jim has wife & 2 children.” | SLC, 3-1 |
| 95 (127.10–15) | “$40 from men” | SLC, 3-1 |
| 100 (132.29) | “Betsy” | SLC, 3-1 |
| 101 (133.1) | “Shepherdson” | SLC, 3-1 |
| 105 (136.25–137.26) | “Art & Bible” | SLC, N&J3, 60 |
| 106 (137.12) | ″ | SLC, N&J3, 60 |
| 109 (140.1) | “Grangerford” | SLC, 3-1 |
| 136 (163.7–165.3) | “Duke & K” | SLC, 3-1 |
| 143 (170.21–172.8?) | “let ’em tell these adventures” | SLC, 3-4 |
| 147 (174.6–30?) | “Another ref” follows “Duke & K” | SLC, 3-1 |
TS2 begins at 160–1
| 160–64 (241.20) | “ ‘There! Royal Nonesuch, Brickville’ ” | Kemble |
| Ch. 33 (271.1 Ch. 31) | “ ‘All right, I’ll go to hell.’ ” | SLC, N&J3, 61 |
| 120 (285.27–30) | “Then he makes a graceful bow.” | Kemble |
| 191 (341.2–3) | “I doan go from heah widout a doctor” | Kemble |
| 194 (345.2–3) | “I nearly ran into him” | Kemble |
TS3 references to chapters 18–20 of TS3, the retyped version of TS1
| 123 (144.15) | “ ‘Pretty soon . . . galloping down the road’ ” | Kemble |
| 134 (152.9) | “ ‘A couple of young chaps behind a wood pile’ ” | Kemble |
| 149 (163.22) | “ ‘I am the late Dauphin’ ” | Kemble |
| 156 (169.23–170.2) | “ ‘The King as Juliet’ ” | Kemble |
In mid-June 1883 the Clemens family once again traveled to Elmira for the summer, and by the end of the month they were at Quarry Farm, with Clemens enthusiastically at work. “The three summer months being my chief working time,” he wrote to Charles A. Dana on 19 July, “I slave it without losing a day while we are here. I have written one small book, & am far along in a bigger one—& shall finish it if I don’t run around any.”92 (The “small book” was his long-winded burlesque, “1,002. An Oriental Tale.” The “bigger one” was Huckleberry Finn.) The next day, he shared his good spirits in a letter to Howells:
I haven’t piled up MS so in years as I have done since we came here to the farm three weeks & a half ago. Why, it’s like old times, to step straight into the study, damp from the breakfast table, & sail right in & sail right on, the whole day long, without thought of running short of stuff or words. I wrote 4000 words to-day & I touch 3000 or & upwards pretty often, & don’t fall below 2600 on any working day. And when I get fagged out, I lie abed a couple of days & read & smoke, & then go it again for 6 or 7 days. I have finished one small book, & am away along in a big one that I half-finished two or three years ago. I expect to complete it in a month or six weeks or two months more. And I shall like it, whether anybody else does or not. It’s a kind of companion to Tom Sawyer. There’s a raft episode from it in second or third chapter of Life on the Mississippi.93
Clearly, the “tank” had refilled.94 With his invention and enthusiasm in full swing, Clemens produced 695 new manuscript pages before summer’s end. This final half of the manuscript (MS2) was written on Old Berkshire Mills stationery in blue ink. He also accumulated fourteen pages of working notes for this section of the manuscript.95 His summer’s work included sixty pages that he wrote, had typed, and eventually inserted into TS1 at page 81, comprising the adventure aboard the sinking Walter Scott and Huck’s conversations with Jim about the ways of royalty, Frenchmen, and cats (the second half of chapter 12 and all of chapters 13 and 14).
Aside from that long insertion, he picked up the main thread of his narrative
[begin page 693]
How odd it seems, to sit down to write a letter with the feeling that you’ve got time to do it. But I’m done work, for this season, & so have got time. I’ve done two seasons’ work in one, & haven’t anything left to do, now, but revise. I’ve written eight or nine hundred MS pages in such a brief space of time that I mustn’t name the number of days; I shouldn’t believe it myself, & of course couldn’t expect you to. I used to restrict myself to 4 & 5 hours a day & 5 days in the week; but this time I’ve wrought from breakfast till 5.15 p.m. six days in the week; & once or twice I smouched a Sunday when the boss wasn’t looking. Nothing is half so good as literature hooked on Sunday on the sly.99
A little more than a week later, on 1 September 1883, Clemens reported to his publishers the result of his summer’s efforts. To James R. Osgood, he wrote: “I’ve finished ‘1,002’ (Arabian Nights Tale,) & likewise ‘The Adventures of Huck Finn’; had written 50,000 words on it before; & this summer it took 70,000 to complete it.” (MS1 and MS2 are actually closer in length: about 55,000 words and 58,000 words.) To his English publisher, Andrew
[begin page 694]
When Clemens wrote to his publishers on 1 September 1883 that he had “just finished,” he was in fact far from done. He had just completed the holograph manuscript for the second half of the book (MS2), chapters 22 through “Chapter the last,” as well as the new material to be interpolated into the first half of the book (half of what is now chapter 12 and all of chapters 13 and 14). So he now had in hand a full-length holograph manuscript (MS1 + MS2). But half of this holograph was already superseded—by TS1, the much-revised typescript of the first half of the book. And by the time Clemens left Elmira for Hartford on 13 September, MS2 was also superseded—by TS2, typed (on a machine that produced both capital and lowercase letters) by Harry M. Clarke, who almost certainly made both a ribbon and a carbon copy.101 That Clarke typed only the new manuscript material (MS2), and did not retype TS1, is established by E. W. Kemble’s later references to certain distinctive page numbers when identifying his drawings for the long interpolation.102 When Clarke was done, Clemens had a complete typed copy of his draft manuscript: it consisted of a single copy of the first half of the text (TS1, probably typed without a carbon), into which he placed Clarke’s typed version of the long interpolation,
[begin page 695]
More than six months would pass before Clemens relinquished this assembled typescript. During that time—from September 1883 to mid-April 1884—he continued to revise it. Collation of MS1 and MS2 with the first American edition makes clear that on the now missing typescript he rewrote incidents, deleted passages, settled on new chapter divisions, and perfected the distinctions among the various dialects.
It was probably sometime during these months that he wrote a dedication for the book and added it (in holograph manuscript) to his assembled typescript—although he ultimately deleted it before publication:
To the Once Boys & Girls
who comraded with me in the morning of time &
the youth of antiquity, in the village of
Hannibal, Missouri,
this book is inscribed, with affection for
themselves, respect for their virtues, &
reverence for their honorable gray hairs.
The Author.104
Instead he substituted his “Explanatory” about the dialect distinctions he had so carefully perfected. (This is one of the few pages of the published text for which no holograph manuscript is known to survive.)
Of course, even before completing his holograph draft of Huckleberry Finn, Clemens had thought about how best to publish it. He considered serialization in the “Century or N.Y. Sun,” noting in early September 1883 that he ought to confer with the editors of both journals.105 He evidently approached both Richard Watson Gilder (1844–1909), editor-in-chief of the Century Illustrated Monthly Magazine since 1881, and Charles A.
[begin page 697]
At the same time, Clemens began to consider replacing his current publisher, James R. Osgood and Company, with another. By 13 September he was considering a new contract with the American Publishing Company, which (through Elisha and then Frank Bliss) had published all of his major books from The Innocents Abroad in 1869 through A Tramp Abroad in 1880. Clemens’s nephew by marriage, Charles L. Webster (1851–91), who acted both as Clemens’s business manager and Osgood’s subscription agent in New York, was charged with comparing the author’s financial returns from sales of his books by the two companies.106 On 15 October, having received the American Publishing Company’s record of sales, Clemens could report to Howells:
Tom Sawyer has been steadily climbing for years—& now at last, as per enclosed statement, has achieved second place in the list of my old books. I think that this promises pretty well for Huck Finn. Although I mean to publish Huck in a volume by itself, I think I will also publish it in a combine jam it & Sawyer into a volume together at the same time, since Huck is in some sense a continuation of the former story.107
By contrast, the record of sales for Life on the Mississippi (published earlier in 1883) grew steadily worse, and by December caused Clemens to break openly with Osgood. On 21 December he complained that Life on the Mississippi
could not have failed if you had listened to me. . . . The Prince & Pauper & the Mississippi are the only books of mine which have ever failed. The first failure was not unbearable—but this second one is so nearly so that it is not a calming subject for me to talk upon. I am out $50,000 on this last book—that is to say, the sale which should have been 80,000 (seeing that the Canadians were for the first time out of competition,) is only 30,000.108
[begin page 698]
Let us canvass Huck Finn & Tom Sawyer both at once, selling both books for $4.50 where a man orders both, & arranging with the Pub Co that I shall have half the profit on all Sawyers so sold, & also upon all that they sell while our canvass lasts.
Also, canvass Finn, Sawyer & Prince all at once—a reduced price where a man orders the three.
It’s a good idea—don’t forget to arrange for it.113
Webster answered on 1 March, “Your idea about the three books is certainly good.” A week later he asked: “In regard to canvassing Huck & Tom
[begin page 699]
Sometime during March, Webster went to Hartford, where he and Clemens discussed choosing an illustrator. At this time Clemens had only one complete copy of his text, the combined typescripts, TS1 + TS2
[begin page 700]
Is that artist’s name Kemble?—I cannot recall that man’s name. Is that it? There is a Kemble on “Life,” but is he the man who illustrated the applying of electrical protectors to door-knobs, door-mats &c & electrical hurriers to messengers, waiters, &c., 4 or 5 weeks ago. That is the man I want to try.116
Edward Windsor Kemble (1861–1933), who in 1884 regularly served as featured cartoonist in both Life magazine and the New York Graphic, had little formal training and no experience in book illustration.117 Webster replied on 3 April:
I have picked up an artist here by the name of Hooper, who has done some work on Life, and on the Graphic.
He is a very cheap man, I have given him one or two of the first chapters to make a trial on so that we can see what he can do.
I have also seen Kemble he will do the work for $120000.
Shall I bring the drawings up Monday or Tuesday so that we can decide who we will have do the work?118
Clemens may already have decided on Kemble. He wrote on the envelope of this letter: “Kemble will do the drawings for $1200.” On 5 April Webster wrote again:
I have seen two artists and by Monday will have specimens of work taken from the ideas in the book from each of them. Mr Kemble is one of them, his price is a little lower, or about the same as we have paid before, but much higher than the other mans, it i.e., Kemble’s work is also much better.
This is rather of an important subject, and ought to be grinding so I thought it wise to ask if you wanted me to run up with the specimens about Tuesday?119
Clemens replied the next day, “Yes, come up & bring the pictures.” Webster probably went to Hartford with the samples on Tuesday, 8 April and returned to New York, accompanied by Clemens and Olivia, on Wednesday,
[begin page 701]
Here is a question which has been settled not less than 30 times, & always in the same way——& yet you asked me about it once more in the cars. This is the answer—& it has never received any other: The book is to be issued when a big edition has been sold—& not before.
Now write it up, somewhere, & keep it in mind; & let us consider that question settled, & answered, & done with.
There is no date for the book. It can issue the 1st of December if 40,000 have been sold. It must wait till they are sold, if it is seven years.
Write it up, & don’t forget it any more.
I sent the MS. to-day. Let Kemble rush—time is already growing short. As fast as he gets through with the chapters, take them & read & select your matter for your canvassing book. . . .
Remember, Osgood fooled away no end of time on his canvassing book, & then got out one that was eminently calculated to destroy the sale.122
Clemens’s reference here to “the MS.” was not to the original holograph manuscript, but simply to the balance of his revised typescript, the first few chapters of which Webster had taken for the trial pictures in March.123 Clemens kept the holograph with him in Hartford (although he may have already lost track of MS1, which turned up in Elmira in 1887).
The canvassing book (or prospectus) for which Webster was to “read & select . . . matter” was a bound selection of pages from Huckleberry Finn to be used by salesmen to interest prospective customers. Such prospectuses usually included a generous selection of illustrated pages, as well as sample bindings.124 Clemens attributed the “failure” of Life on the Mississippi in part to Osgood’s creation of a disastrous prospectus. Nearly half of
[begin page 702]
Keep it diligently in mind that we don’t issue till we have made a big sale. Bliss never issued with less than 43,000 orders on hand, except in one instance—& it usually took him 5 or 6 months’ canvassing to get them.
Get at your canvassing early, & drive it with all your might, with the intent & purpose of issuing on the 10th (or 15th) of next December (the best time in the year to tumble a big pile into the trade)—but if we haven’t 40,000 orders then, we simply postpone publication till we’ve got them. It is a plain, simple policy, & would have saved both of my last books if it had been followed. There is not going to be any reason whatever, why this book should not succeed—& it shall & must.
If we make any change, it must be simply a change from 40,000 to 50,000 before issuing. The Tramp issued with 48,000.
Almost as an afterthought, he added: “Be particular & don’t get any of that old matter into your canvassing book—(the raft episode).”125 Clemens had already published the raft episode from Huckleberry Finn in chapter 3 of Life on the Mississippi (and in the prospectus for that book), “by way of illustrating keelboat talk and manners.” He clearly did not want to repeat the mistake of the Life on the Mississippi prospectus, that is, including previously published material that might lead prospective customers to assume they were being offered a mere reprint.
Webster, eager to avoid Osgood’s fate, for more than a month had been pondering the best way to market Huckleberry Finn. He assumed he could successfully negotiate with Frank Bliss, now in charge of the American Publishing Company, for a discount on Tom Sawyer, and he planned to sell it in tandem with Huckleberry Finn as Clemens had proposed at the end of February. Now, on 17 April, he wrote to Clemens, reassuring him that he had “started Kemble with the drawings,” and addressing some of the problems of selling the books as a set:
I have carefully measured both books and find that while Tom Sawyer only contains about 73,000 words, the new book contains 108,000 words. We will be obliged to drop a few pictures, print on thinner paper, and with smaller type than the Prince & Pauper. That book is printed on Small Pica, while Sawyer is on Long Primer. Of course the former looks much better but we will have to sacrifice appearance in this case. It is equally plain that it will not do to put the book in smaller type than Long Primer so we shall have to put it on thinner paper and have more pages & not increase the cuts over Sawyer, although there is more matter in the book.126
[begin page 703]
Now in regard to cover: Kemble is getting up a very pretty design, which I will send you when finished. The cover is one of the most important things about a book, and often decides its selling qualities as you know.
What I want to know about, is: What color shall we have it? You said some time ago we would have several colors but in that case agents will be continually changing, and customers shilly-shallying between two colors.
It seems to me we had better decide on some one color. Tom Sawyer is blue, but there is a growing dislike to that color. We are continually getting orders on different books, “Any color but blue.” Do you consider it necessary to have the color the same as Sawyer? the design is different you know.127 I had not forgotten not even for an instant, that we intended not to issue the book until a large edition were sold. When I asked you about it on the train it was simply my over cautiousness that prompted me. I was afraid the holiday question had been overlooked, although I then agreed with you, & still do in regard to holding it until such edition is sold . . . .
I shall start the Prospectus as soon as I get the cover & pictures which will be soon.128
The following day, 18 April, Webster reported receiving “the manuscript”—that is, the remainder of the typescript, which Clemens had mailed on 12 April—adding that “part of it is in the hands of the artist.129 . . . Mr Osgood is here. We have been unable to make any arrangement as yet about the office. I expect Mr Howells here tomorrow. I am getting estimates from the printers.”
In addition to making plans for Huckleberry Finn, Webster had been attempting to interest an actor or producer in “Colonel Sellers As a Scientist” (he was then negotiating with John T. Raymond [1836–87], who for almost ten years had appeared in the title role of Clemens’s most successful
[begin page 704]
Although there was no mention of Huckleberry Finn at this point in the correspondence between Howells and Webster, Howells had clearly been informed of its progress by early April, when he offered, probably through Webster, to read “proof.” Ever since he had edited “Old Times on the Mississippi” for the Atlantic, Howells had given Mark Twain’s writings (whether articles or books) a critical reading before publication. He had made suggestions for revising the manuscript or proofs of The Adventures of Tom Sawyer, A Tramp Abroad, and The Prince and the Pauper.131 None of those books had been typed, however, and Howells’s reference here to “proof” meant the typewritten copy, a product of new technology which as yet had no customary term. But Clemens, hearing of the offer through Webster, understood Howells to mean he would take on the wearying job of reading galley proofs before publication. On 8 April, even before sending the typewritten copy to Webster, Clemens wrote Howells:
It took my breath away, & I haven’t recovered it yet, entirely—I mean the generosity of your proposal to read the proofs of Huck Finn. Now if you mean it, old man—if you are in earnest—proceed, in God’s name, & be by me forever blest. I cannot conceive of a rational man deliberately piling such an atrocious job upon himself; but if there is such a man, & you be that man, why then pile it on. It will cost me a pang every time I think of it, but this anguish will be eingebüsst i.e., compensated to me in the joy & comfort I shall get out of the not having to read the verfluchtete i.e., cursed proofs myself. But if you have repented of your augenblichlicher Tobsucht i.e., momentary delirium & got back to calm cold reason again, I won’t hold you to it unless I find I have got you down in writing somewhere. Herr, I would not read the proof of one of my books for any fair & reasonable sum whatever, if I could get out of it. The proof-reading on the P & Pauper cost me the last rags of my religion.132
Howells replied on 10 April:
[begin page 705]
Clemens and Howells met in Boston between 17 and 19 April.134 Howells must have clarified his offer then, agreeing that he would read the complete text of the book before it was set in type—the typewritten copy he called “proof”—just as he had earlier read Tom Sawyer and Prince in manuscript. Since Webster was in a hurry to choose selections for the canvassing book, he had probably asked Kemble to finish his notes about illustrations for the early chapters. Kemble was able to return the first part of TS1 with his first batch of six pictures, which he delivered sometime before 21 April. Howells, in New York for a conference with Webster, was therefore able to take away the whole typescript (TS1 + TS2) on that day. He remained in New York, reading it and carrying on further business with Webster, until 26 April, when he took the train to Hartford and spent a day or two with Clemens before continuing home to Boston.135
Howells now became a regular figure in Webster’s progress reports. On Monday, 21 April, Webster wrote to Clemens about several business matters. In regard to Huckleberry Finn, he reported Kemble’s progress and transmitted a question from Howells. He also seized upon Clemens’s 14 April instruction to be sure to exclude “the raft episode” from the prospectus, treating it as a means of solving a manufacturing problem with the matched set of Huckleberry Finn and Tom Sawyer:
Now as fast as the artist draws the sketches shall I send them to you? I have several here & will get more by Saturday. . . .
Mr Howells wanted me to ask you if he was to have a carte-blanche in making those corrections. the book is so much larger than Tom Sawyer would it not be better
[begin page 706]
The next day, Clemens acquiesced to this suggestion to radically revise his text with surprising docility:
Yes, I think the raft chapter can be left wholly out, by heaving in a paragraph to say that Huck visited the raft say Huck visited the raft to find out how far it might be to Cairo, but got no satisfaction. Even this is not necessary unless that raft-visit is referred to later in the book. I think it is, but am not certain. . . .
Yes, send me the pictures by batches of half a dozen or more.
Yes, I want Howells to have carte blanche in making corrections.137
Clemens did not again mention the raft episode in the known correspondence with his publisher. A few weeks later, as the account in the next two paragraphs shows, Webster removed it from the text.
The manuscript of the raft episode, which had been typed for Life on the
[begin page 707]
Comparison of the manuscript with the first edition makes clear that (a) Clemens did not heave in “a paragraph to say Huck visited the raft to find out how far it might be to Cairo”; and (b) that the “raft-visit” was not mentioned later in the manuscript, except for two sentences that began a new chapter immediately following the episode: “I had to tell Jim I didn’t find out how far it was to Cairo. He was pretty sorry.”141 When Webster removed the raft episode tear sheets, he had only to delete these two sentences
[begin page 708]
Around 21 April, the day Webster had written Clemens about omitting the raft episode, Kemble gave Webster his first batch of illustrations, promising another batch by 26 April. On 25 April he postponed that date to 28 April: “Monday, I shall bring 17 or thereabouts of the illustrations, which with the 6 you have will be 23 in all. I would like to rob you of a hundred dollars or more, please advise me when I will find you in.”144 Clemens wrote Webster on 28 April, setting up a meeting in New York for “Wednesday morning 9 o’clock” (30 April): “Remind me to give you all of Huck Finn that Howells has revised for the artist & printer.”145 Kemble evidently brought the promised “17 or thereabouts” illustrations, on Tuesday, 29 April, in time for Webster’s meeting with Clemens the next morning.146 Clemens was then able to see the first two batches of illustrations, twenty-three in all. Except for the cover design, he saw no more pictures
[begin page 709]
At their 30 April meeting, Clemens did not in fact give Webster, as
[begin page 710]
Mr. Clemens told me to get the copyMS. of “Huck” copied here up to a certain point, where another duplicate begins; and to-morrow I will send you one copy of up to of that part, and Tuesday another neat copy. You can work from either, for both are ready to go into the printer’s hands.148
Since evidently there were two copies of TS2, a ribbon and a carbon, it follows that the text Clemens told Howells to have “copied” was some or all of the text that preceded TS2. This text was not in fact “MS.” as Howells put it, but the 159-page TS1, which was heavily revised by Clemens and included at least two long interpolations—one typed to follow typescript page 81 (the Walter Scott passage), and one in the form of tear sheets to follow typescript page 89 (the raft episode). Clemens had at least two motives for asking Howells to have this early section typed: he needed a duplicate of it in order to provide two complete copies of the whole text to Webster, one for the artist and one for the printer; and he must have felt that the heavily revised TS1 was not clear enough for the printer. Such a request of Howells was not entirely surprising. Clemens had earlier marveled at a letter Howells wrote him on his new typewriter, which produced italic type with capital and lowercase letters: “You make a mighty clean proof with your type-writer.”149 In the present case, Howells apparently hired a typist, and on 9 May Webster paid fifteen dollars for the new typescript (TS3), which may have also included a carbon copy.150
While Howells was having TS1 retyped and proofreading the fresh typescript (TS3), Kemble was making progress on the illustrations. By 5 May he had delivered the cover illustration and design to Webster, who in turn sent it to Clemens “by express,” asking its return “as soon as possible with your approval or objections.”151 Clemens returned it on 7 May, saying “All
[begin page 711]
Webster had a good deal to report. He had already won a lower price for the same grade of paper used in Life on the Mississippi, but, hoping for an even better deal, he had been negotiating with other suppliers and manufacturers. He showed Clemens Kemble’s new illustrations, of which Clemens was evidently somewhat critical, and took them away with him after the meeting; and he probably reported on Howells’s progress in preparing TS3, which turned out to be slower than Howells at first predicted. On 10 May Howells sent Webster the proofread portion of TS3 which he had hoped to have ready and in the mail by 6 May. “I sent you the duplicate of the pp. of H. Finn which I’d gone over, yesterday, and I’ll soon send you the rest,” he wrote on 11 May.154 On 16 May he wrote again, “I send by express this p.m. nearly all the rest of Huck Finn; and I’ll try to let you have the last on Monday.”155 Probably by Tuesday, 20 May, Webster had received all of TS3, proofread by Howells and ready for the printer, as well as the heavily revised TS1, corrected by Howells, from which TS3 had been made. It was probably at this point, as he assembled the printer’s copy, that Webster removed the raft episode from TS3 and renumbered the subsequent chapters to reflect the excision. Within a week or two, Webster contracted with a printer, J. J. Little and Company of New York, and the typesetting of the assembled printer’s copy (TS3 + TS2 ribbon or carbon) would begin.
Meanwhile, on 16 May, Kemble had written to Webster, promising a fourth batch of illustrations: “I shall call on you Tuesday forenoon i.e., 20 May & bring you twenty or more illustrations together with the headings. I shall hope to pluck one hundred & fifty dollars from your wallet. I hope you will stand the ordeal, nobly.”156 Kemble delivered only seventeen of the promised “twenty or more,” some of which Webster had already seen. Since Kemble drew his illustrations roughly in sequence, he had doubtless already drafted and submitted the pictures for the first eight or nine chapter
[begin page 712]
Webster was concluding his arrangements for paper and binding. He had returned from his trip to Boston, where he had investigated Osgood’s manufacturing costs for The Prince and the Pauper and Life on the Mississippi. Now able to compare those contracts with his own, he wrote exultantly to Clemens on 22 May:
I have seen the vouchers and know that they paid the prices charged for the work, but contrast them with what I get the same work done here for. The binding of P. & P. & the new book is the same, but while their binding costs sheep, 55 cents, mine cost 35 cents, or 20 cents per book less. Their Half Mor. cost 70 cents, mine 60 cents. Their cloth 22 cents. I have not let that contract yet, but have one bid of 20 cents. These prices of theirs are without wrapping &c, while wrapping is included in my prices, which makes another difference in my favor. They paid 9 cents for their paper. I have made a splendid paper contract at Holyoke. I get the same paper in every particular as was put in Miss. & which cost 8¼ cents for 687/100 cents. I got two mills bidding against each other strong & thus got it at that price. I have agreed to take 900 reams which will cost $4,01895, and this amtt, will make 30,000 books & 1,000 prospectuses as near as we can figure at present. I have an agreement that they shall store what we don’t wish to use for a year if we wish, also that if at any time within the year we wish more paper we are to have it at the same price, up to two thousand reams, which will make about 65000 books. They made the last bargain rather reluctantly, but I have it all in the contract so that we are sound on that point. Enclosed is a sample of the paper. I promised the mills that I would not give the price to any one, as they said it was less than they were selling it to the N.Y. jobbers.
[Note: print pp. 713–15 occur out of sequence, for sense.]
[begin page 716]
Later the same day, Webster wrote again, asking, “How many cloth books shall I contract to bind at 20c or less? How many books shall I print in sheets?”160 Clemens answered on 23 May:
The paper bargain is splendid—& also the bargains for binding. . . .
Order 30,000 copies of Huck Finn to be printed & bound. The same to be paid for in cash on delivery.
Of course get into the contract as good terms as you can for subsequent editions to consist of 2,000 or 3,000 or 5,000 each.
Begin your canvass early, & drive it; for if, by the 5th of December, we have 40,000 orders, we will publish on the 15th, & “dump” books the same day & catch the holiday trade. Otherwise we will continue the canvass till we strike the full figure of 40,000 orders.
Now let’s never allow ourselves to think of issuing with any less than 40,000 while there’s the ghost of a show to get them.161
On 23 May Webster sent Kemble’s fourth batch of drawings. His covering letter shows that the author had expressed dissatisfaction with the earlier drawings and had required revisions in them:
I send you by express 17 drawings which are much better than the last. I think the Frontispiece very fine, it looks even better when reduced. Kemble has fixed the last lot so that they are all right, and he is going to make some landscape drawings next.
Please send them back as soon as possible with your suggestions.162
Clemens had now seen and criticized the illustrations for nearly a third of the book. Still somewhat dissatisfied, he replied on 24 May:
Some of the pictures are good, but none of them are very very good. The faces are generally ugly, & wrenched into inhuman distortions over-expression amounting sometimes to distortion. As a rule (though not always) the people in these pictures are forbidding & repulsive. Reduction will modify them, no doubt, but it can hardly make them pleasant folk to look at. An artist shouldn’t follow a book too
[begin page 717]
The pictures will do—they will just barely do—& that is the best I can say for them. Suppose you submit them to t
The frontispiece has the usual blemish—an ugly, ill-drawn face. Huck Finn is an exceedingly good-hearted boy, & should carry a good & good-looking face.
Don’t dishearten the artist—show him where he has improved, rather than where he has failed, & punch him up to improve more.
Suppose you have one of the pictures reduced & printed—then we can get a satisfying idea of the thing.163
On 29 May Webster wrote that he had made a contract for binding the prospectuses and had struck “a splendid bargain for binding the cloth books” and ordered 20,000 bound as soon as printed. He had not yet formally contracted for the typesetting and printing of the book, although he
[begin page 718]
Sometime in late May, Webster delivered at least thirty-one of Kemble’s
[begin page 719]
[begin page 720]
Will you be kind enough to send me the manuscript from the XIII chapter on as there are Illustrations here & there which are described very minutely. I am afraid to touch them without the reading matter to refer to. I will bring in a detachment this week about Thursday or Friday.170
Webster must have complied with this request for “manuscript” (i.e., typescript) promptly, for within a week Kemble delivered a batch of thirty-four illustrations, apparently largely for chapters 13 through 20. His page references, penciled on the surviving illustration boards, show that he consulted two versions of the text: his references to chapters 13 through 15 are consistent with the pagination of the typescript (TS1 + TS2) that he had used in April to make his notes, and his references to chapters 18 through 20 are consistent with the pagination of the newer typescript, TS3.171
When Kemble brought in the batch of thirty-four drawings (his fifth batch) on Saturday, 7 June, Webster sent them to Clemens, who replied on 11 June:
I have reshipped the pictures to you. I knew Kemble had it in him, if he would only modify hims his violences & come down to careful, painstaking work. This batch of pictures is most rattling good. They please me exceedingly.
But you must knock out one of them—the lecherous old rascal kissing the girl at the campmeeting. It is powerful good, but it mustn’t go in—don’t forget it. No doub Let’s not make any pictures of the campmeeting. The subject won’t bear illustrating.
[begin page 721]
Spread your general agencies all around—this book will have a big sale.172
Except for the rejected picture, Webster turned over this batch of drawings to the engravers, who processed them on 19 and 21 June and probably completed plates for them by 23 or 24 June. (Kemble ultimately found a camp meeting passage that would “bear illustrating”; his drawing of it appeared in the book as “Courting on the Sly,” on page 171 in this edition.)173 With these new illustrations—which included drawings of the Walter Scott, Huck and Jim lost in the fog, the Grangerford-Shepherdson feud, and the first appearances of the king and the duke—Kemble had submitted about eighty-four drawings in five batches (nearly half the total number in the book). Webster had now paid for eighty-one plates of approved pictures, presumably leaving the Moss company without any further work for the moment.174
[begin page 713]
This chart shows in stages the documents Mark Twain wrote, had copied by typewriter, and revised as he prepared Adventures of Huckleberry Finn for publication. When he submitted the book to his publisher in April 1884, there was only one complete copy, here designated “Mark Twain’s Copy,” essentially a composite of two typescripts (TS1 + TS2), which had been made from the two halves of the manuscript at different times and by different typists. By the end of May 1884, the first typescript (TS1) had been retyped, incorporating late revisions by both Mark Twain and William Dean Howells (TS3). A new, completely revised copy of the text was now assembled—TS3 + the duplicate of TS2—to serve as the “Printer’s Copy” for the first American edition.
All page references to the manuscript (MS1a, MS1b, and MS2) correspond to the actual MS in the Buffalo and Erie County Public Library (NBuBE). All references to chapters are to those in the published book. All information about the typescripts (TS1, TS2, and TS3), none of which is known to survive, is inferred from references to them by Mark Twain or the illustrator of the book, Edward Windsor Kemble, and from reconstructed models of them at the Mark Twain Project based on those references and other documentary evidence. In these models, TS1 is 159 pages long; TS2 consists of 216 pages (numbered 160-1 through 216) and includes an additional sequence of pages (numbered 81-1 through 81-22) intended to be inserted into TS1 at page 81; and TS3 is 175 pages long.
[begin page 714]
1876:
Mark Twain begins Huckleberry Finn at Quarry Farm in July. By September his working copy consists of:
| MS1a | pages 1–446 became chapters 1–12½, 15–18½ |
1880:
Mark Twain brings the MS to the halfway point, most likely in Hartford from March through mid-June 1880, by which time his working copy consists of:
| MS1b | “Notice” added in late June or after |
| MS1a | pages 1–446 |
| MS1b | pages 447–663 became chapters 18½–21 |
1882–83:
The raft episode (MS1a pages 309–62) is typed for inclusion in the printer’s copy of Life on the Mississippi (LoM), probably by Harry Clarke in Elmira in September 1882. By December 1882 the raft episode is typeset and printed tear sheets are available. MS1a and MS1b are typed (TS1), probably in Hartford between October 1882 and early May 1883. At that time, Mark Twain’s working copy consists of:
| TS1 | “Notice” |
| TS1 | pages 1–159 with raft episode tear sheets at TS1 page 89 |
1883:
Mark Twain completes the rest of the book (MS2) at Quarry Farm between mid-June and 1 September, then has MS2 typed (TS2) with a carbon copy.
| MS2 | title page | |
| MS2 | pages 81-A-1 through 81-60 became chapters 12½–14 | |
| MS2 | pages 160–787 became chapters 22–43 | |
| ↓ | ||
| TS2 | title page | |
| TS2 | pages 81-1 through 81-22 | |
| TS2 | pages 160-1 through 216 |
By late September 1883 the holograph manuscript has been entirely superseded by Mark Twain’s new working copy: TS1 + TS2.
[begin page 715]
1883–84:
Mark Twain’s Copy
Mark Twain’s complete typescript (TS1 + TS2) has 45 chapters (2 more than the first edition because the raft episode is still in place). He adds a “dedication” (which he later replaces with the “Explanatory”). In April 1884 he sends the complete typescript to Webster and Company so that the artist can begin work. This copy is returned to Mark Twain by late September 1884.
| TS2 | title page |
| TS1 | “Notice” |
| MS | “dedication” possibly added at this stage |
| TS1 | pages 1–81 |
| TS2 | pages 81–1 through 81–22 |
| TS1 | pages 82–89 |
| LoM | raft episode tear sheets |
| TS1 | pages 90–159 |
| TS2 | pages 160–1 through 216 |
April–July 1884:
The Artist’s Copy
The illustrator, E. W. Kemble, initially uses Mark Twain’s copy to plan drawings for the first 12 chapters. In late May, after TS1 is retyped to create TS3, the raft episode is dropped; Kemble makes no drawings for it. In June and July he consults first TS1, then TS3, and then one of the copies of TS2. He finishes all illustrations by 12 July and returns all book copy to Webster and Company. His drawings are processed into electroplates between 29 May and 29 July.
May–August 1884:
The Printer’s Copy
The “ghost” story is dropped from chapter 9 before TS1 is retyped to create TS3; the raft episode is dropped in late May. The printer’s copy for the text—TS3 + TS2—is assembled, so that typesetting can begin in early June. The “Explanatory” is probably added about this time. The picture captions, running heads, and tables of contents and illustrations are ready by early August.
| TS3 | title page + “Notice” + “Explanatory” |
| TS3 | pages 1–89 chapters 1–12½ |
| TS2 | pages 81–1 through 81–22 chapters 12½-14 |
| TS3 | pages 90–175 chapters 15–21 |
| TS2 | pages 160–1 through 216 chapters 22–43 |
The printing of the first American edition begins by late August 1884.
In mid-June, before the illustrations for chapters 13–20 were ready for the printers, galley proofs began to arrive at Webster’s office. Each galley held
[begin page 722]
[begin page 723]
The three pages in each galley proof showed pictures and text only. They lacked running heads, “page titles,” picture captions, and final page numbers. Running heads, “the fixed or general title of the volume,” appeared on left-hand pages and were distinct from “page titles,” which appeared on right-hand pages and were based on the specific contents of that page, and thus could not be composed until the pages were “final.”176 At this early stage the captions for the illustrations had also not been fully prepared, and the number of pages of “front matter” which would precede the text was not known, so page numbers remained indeterminate. (The front matter, paged in sequence with the text, would include a table of contents which repeated the page titles, and a list of illustrations which repeated the captions. Both would of course require the actual page numbers as well, but could be set up pending those final numbers, and the numbers
[begin page 724]
Webster evidently ordered two sets of author’s galleys for these early chapters, one for Clemens and the other for Howells. (Howells’s clarification of what he had meant in offering to read “proof” had evidently not been passed along to Webster.) Howells may have felt some irritation when he received these proofs for the early chapters. He wrote to Webster on 16 June: “You need not send me proof of Huck Finn. I read the copy so carefully that a good proof-reader’s revision is all that is now necessary.”178 In the midst of final preparations for the annual move from Hartford to Elmira, Clemens also wrote Webster, chastising him for sending the proofs by letter rate rather than manuscript rate.179
Webster sent “more proof” on 25 June.180 By then the typesetters had certainly reached chapter 12, and possibly chapter 13—that is, twenty-five to twenty-eight galleys in all. Clemens complained to Howells on 28 June: “My days are given up to cursings—both loud & deep—for I am reading the H. Finn proofs. They don’t make a very great many mistakes; but those
[begin page 725]
For the time being, the question of who was to read the proofs was left in abeyance. Other procedures, however, for completing the illustrations and making electrotypes of them, and also for setting the type, were going smoothly. Kemble had to stay well ahead of the printers, continuing to work in sequence, and he did so. On 25 June he wrote Webster: “I shall be down Saturday noon i.e., 28 June with thirty or forty pictures. I would like to draw $200.00 or more. Will you be in. I would like to talk with you concerning the rest of the pictures.”183 By the time Kemble arrived with thirty-five pictures, Webster had new instructions from Clemens about an illustration he had already approved (and that had probably been processed by the electrotypers on 19 or 21 June):
It occurs to me, now, that on the pilot house of that steamboat-wreck the artist has put TEXAS—having been misled by some of Huck’s remarks about the boat’s “texas”—a thing which is a part of every boat. That word had better be removed from that pilot house—that is where a boat’s name is put, & that particular boats name was Walter Scott, I think. It is mentioned in a later chapter.184
The word “texas” was removed, probably by the engravers, from the electrotype of this illustration, but it was not replaced with “Walter Scott,” no doubt because that would have been more complicated or more expensive or both (see the illustration on page 91). Belated corrections were rare, however, since Clemens’s suggestions had been transmitted through Webster early enough to be incorporated before engraving. Of the 28 June batch of thirty-five drawings, sent to Clemens immediately after Webster received them, Clemens said on 1 July, “Kendall’s Kemble’s pictures are mighty good, now.”185 At this point, Kemble had completed at least one hundred and sixteen illustrations, or those for two-thirds of the book (up to about page 241, “How to Find Them”). He was well ahead of the typesetters: plates for his most recent drawings would not be ready until 14 July.186
[begin page 726]
The captions that ultimately appeared in the book often differ significantly from Kemble’s working captions, but only some of these differences are traceable to Clemens. He had of course seen Kemble’s working captions when he approved the original drawings, and he could have asked to see the printer’s copy for captions before it went to the printer, but he probably waited to review them in proof, as Webster suggested. He had followed just this procedure during production of The Prince and the Pauper.189 When he did see proof, however, he must have supplied some captions that depart from the text in ways characteristic of him—for instance, “Solid Comfort” (page 30), which he liked so much that he had it repeated in chapter 26 of A Connecticut Yankee.190 Nonetheless, the captions show the work of Kemble and Webster as well as Clemens. Kemble, as a staff cartoonist on the New York Graphic and Life magazine, had experience in writing captions and was capable of doing so for Huckleberry Finn, though in his working captions he had been careful to quote the text.
[begin page 727]
Webster’s letter of 9 July said that he was sending “more proof,” but he did not actually send it until the following day, when he again wrote:
I send you by mail today 11 galleys of proof.
Please send them back as soon as you can without too much trouble, as: on account of Annies sickness, I did not send them to you as soon as I should.192
[begin page 728]
Having received on 10 July a promise from Kemble to bring the “remainder of the sketches” by the end of the week, Webster reported: “I will send you the last batch of pictures I hope by Saturday.”193 Kemble delivered his final batch of drawings on Saturday, 12 July, and was paid $585, the balance of his $1,000 fee. Webster sent them to Clemens the same day, calling them “another batch of good pictures.” On 15 July Webster picked up “1002 Sheep backs & 1002 ½ mor. backs of Huck”—the binding samples that were to be pasted on the inside covers of the salesmen’s prospectuses—and, presumably having received the last batch of illustrations back from Clemens, promised to have “everything, cuts and all, in the printers hands early next week.”194 He was too optimistic by a matter of two weeks: the final fifty-seven illustrations were not electroplated until 29 July, and Webster did not finish preparing the front matter until the first week in August.195
In mid-July Webster’s time was taken up with matters other than production of Huckleberry Finn, despite his continuing task of transmitting pictures and proofs between author, printer, and electrotyper. In addition to Webster’s increased responsibilities at home because of the birth of his son, Samuel Charles Webster, he had been asked by Clemens to: (1) intercept a statue by Karl Gerhardt that was being mistakenly shipped to Hartford; (2) search for reference books on the West (Clemens was then writing “Huck Finn and Tom Sawyer among the Indians”); (3) look into some financial matters; (4) “heave” his “surplus energies” into Clemens’s “to-be-patented portable calendar”; (5) hire someone to fix the furnace in the Hartford house; (6) negotiate a contract with John T. Raymond for production rights to “Colonel Sellers As a Scientist”; (7) work on the manufacture of the history game Clemens had invented the previous summer; and (8) prepare a detailed contract with James B. Pond for the reading tour Clemens was about to undertake with George Washington Cable, in part to publicize the new book.196 Webster was also making arrangements to hire general agents to sell Huckleberry Finn.
[begin page 729]
Can you alter the title-page so as to say,
“Time, forty to fifty years ago”
instead of
“Time, forty years ago.”
If the printing isn’t begun, you can make the alteration, of course—so do it; but if it has begun, never mind, let it go.201
The printing had not begun. When the galleys sent to Clemens on or about 16 June and those sent on 25 June had been returned, the typesetters could have corrected the type and paged only as far as the end of chapter 12, and they would not electroplate the pages until they had been approved in
[begin page 730]
By 6 August Clemens had certainly received galleys up to chapter 26, for on that day Webster transmitted a new batch containing most of chapters 26 through 29. Smarting from an impatient complaint about the history game, Webster wrote:
I send you more proof today. I am very busy making up the table of contents & illustrations, planning my Prospectus & getting matter together for circulars so I have had to drop the game again.
I work hard from morning to night, there is no loafing in the office but I haven’t had a moment for a week to touch it. the very first time I do get a chance I shall do so.204
Because Webster had now given his attention to the captions, and the printers had all of the electrotyped illustrations for the book, it was possible for the compositors to include captions as well as pictures in the galleys—clearly impossible for the first chapters—and they evidently did
[begin page 731]
I have no doubt I am doing a most criminal & outrageous thing—for I am sending you these infernal Huck Finn proofs—but the very last vestige of my patience has gone to the devil, & I cannot bear the sight of another slip of them. My hair turns white with rage, at sight of the mere outside of the package; & this time I didn’t even try to glance inside it, but re-enveloped it at once, & directed it to you. Now you’re not to read it unless you really don’t mind it—you’re only to re-ship it to Webster & tell him, from me, to read the remnant of the book himself, & send no more slips to me, under any circumstances. Will you?
Blackguard me if you want to—I deserve it.205
On the same day, Clemens explained to Webster what he had done:
I miscalculated my fortitude. I can’t read any more proof. I sent this batch to Howells without glancing at it—except to note that that proof reader had left it to me to mark turned letters under cuts! i.e., characters inadvertently set upside down in the newly set picture captions Howells will maybe return it to you to be read—in which case you may send it to me again, & I will get my profanity together & tackle it.206
Although he planned to be traveling the rest of the month, Howells gracefully agreed to take on the job, and he wrote Clemens on 10 August: “If I had written half as good a book as Huck Finn, I shouldn’t ask anything better than to read the proofs; even as it is I don’t. So send them on; they will always find me somewhere.”207 Two installments found him the next day in Boston, and he returned them to Webster two days later.208
Clemens, meanwhile, having skipped the galleys he packed off to Howells on 7 August, regained his composure and began to read the succeeding batch, which arrived soon after. First, though, he finished reading the galleys he had up to the beginning of chapter 26. He then read one later, out-of-sequence galley and the remainder of this newest batch, which began with chapter 30, after which he conscientiously asked Webster for the galleys he had passed on to Howells, which fell between the beginning of chapter 26 and chapter 30:
Most of this proof was clean & beautiful, & a pleasure to read; but the rest of it was read by that blind idiot whom I have cursed so much, & is a disgraceful mess.
[begin page 732]
Send me also slips from No. 75 up to 81.
And insist that the rest of the proofs be better read.209
Before reading this letter, Webster received more galleys from the printers, who wrote: “Will you please return us some of the galleys you have as we are compelled to come to a stand still for want of type. With these two galleys we send you, you now have about 90 pages.”210 With so much type standing, they had exhausted the font and could not continue to set type until some of the pages had been plated, thus releasing the type. Webster sent this letter to Clemens with the note “Please send if possible,” and added:
I have not heard from Howells, and you see what printers say. I have nothing here to send them.
I want to hurry them, as I cant leave to make contracts with General Agts, until the book is in binders hands & the prospectus finished, & this of course will delay Canvass that much.211
Webster must have received the corrected galleys from Clemens on 12 or 13 August, and on 14 August he reported the arrival of the package from Howells: “I have received from Mr Howells those galleys that you wanted returned, properly corrected, so that I need not send them to you again.”212 Clemens came to the same conclusion about the galleys he had missed reading, but again complained about the printer’s proofreading:
The missing galleys are the ones I sent to Howells, no doubt. In that case I don’t need to re-read them.
If all the proofs had been as well read as the first 2 or 3 chapters were, I should not have needed to see the revises i.e., second galleys at all. On the contrary it was the worst & silliest proof-reading I have ever seen. It was never read by copy at all—not a single galley of it.213
If we calculate from the first page of the text proper in the first edition (page numbered 17), and count three pages for each galley, the “missing galleys” that Clemens never proofread included first edition pages 221–35 (“slips” or galleys 69–73), and pages 239–59 (“slips” or galleys 75–81).214 Although he probably later saw foundry proofs for these pages, they would afford less latitude for revision. Any major revision in galley proof could
[begin page 733]
By mid-August the typesetting had begun again. At least the first twelve chapters had been approved in foundry proof and presumably plated. With Howells’s and Clemens’s recent submissions, galleys running through chapter 30 had been returned to Webster. By now the printers had not only all the captions and running heads, but the table of contents and list of illustrations, which Webster had finished preparing the first week of August. Now able to paginate the front matter, the printers began including page numbers along with pictures, captions, running heads, and page titles in all subsequent galleys. By mid-August, too, seeing that Clemens was resigned to reading proof himself instead of depending on Howells, Webster sent him galleys for the rest of the book, and quite possibly some additional foundry proofs as well. On 23 August Webster wrote, doubtless with some relief, “I have sent you the last batch of galley proofs.”216
The fifty pages of foundry proofs which survive show very little revision.217 But the author did make a few alterations in response to queries
[begin page 734]
canoe lost”—referring to the point in chapter 16 where Huck and Jim discover that “the canoe was gone.” Clemens crossed out the query and altered Huck’s “took the” to “found a,” a change that was made in the type before plating (see the illustration on page 427). On page 164, the editor circled the identification of a speaker as “Baldy” (the king) and asked whether he should in fact be identified as the duke. Clemens so altered it, and the change was also incorporated in the type before plating. On page 188, the editor questioned whether the crowd following the “long lanky man” ought to be “stooping . . . to watch him mark the places on the ground” rather than “stopping,” as it was then in type. Clemens, probably remembering that he had written “stooping” in his manuscript, made the correction (see the illustrations of the proofs below). All three corrections appeared in the first American edition, corrected in the type before plates were cast.
With the return of these finally corrected pages and also the newly typeset final portion of the book then still in galleys, which Clemens “cursed his way through” by the end of August, Webster was finally able to authorize J. J. Little to begin printing and manufacturing the prospectus. He wrote Clemens on 30 August: “The prospectuses will be ready in a week or so, now. The book is being beautifully printed and will please you.”218
As it turned out, Webster was overly optimistic: the prospectus would not be ready for another month. In the meantime, he turned to other matters. In his letter of 23 August, he had enclosed an advertisement placed by the Frank Coker News Company of Alabama which offered unauthorized copies of seven of Mark Twain’s books in paper covers for fifty cents each, noting, “Something must be done about it soon.” He had also enclosed one of the Webster company’s “new circulars to agents, with prizes for selling books on the new plan.” Evidently having second thoughts about the “new plan,” Webster reverted to the matter in his letter of 30 August, hoping finally
[begin page 735]
Clemens, who had been in the dental chair or ill a good deal of the summer, and had just “cursed” his way through the last proofs, had had enough. The season in Elmira was nearly over and he now needed to get ready for his return to Hartford, then for the speaking tour he was to begin in November. Webster’s letter provided an excuse for a salutary explosion, which is worth quoting in full:
That question appears to answer itself: if the Am. Pub. Co. will not give you terms on Tom Sawyer which will afford you a profit, does not that end the project?
When you send me pirate ads which are calculated to enrage me, I wish you would also send me a form for a letter to the Am. Pub. Co to fit the case. You lay me liable to make trouble under a sudden & frantic impulse when there is no occasion for it. Besides, the episode unfits me for work for a week afterward. I have lost $3000 worth of time over this pirate business, & I do not see where any good has been done, unless the erection of a quarrel with the Pub. Co can come under that head.
If you would help me get along with the Pub Co, we could doubtless manage them to our advantage; but I have no diplomacy in my own nature, & you don’t suggest any to me. Try to remember that I fly off the handle altogether too easily, & that you want to think twice before you send me irritating news.
As to the prizes, you can think that out & decide upon it much better than I
[begin page 736]
This is the first summer which I have lost. I haven’t a paragraph to show for my 3-months’ working-season. But there was no help for it—been in the doctor’s hands the greater part of the time.
I have foolishly gone so far with the Am Pub Co that I must now go on, if Whitford thinks it a winning case—which he won’t.
We shall reach our hotel the evening of Sept. 16. And thenceforward we can meet when there is business to be discussed—it is the only good way. . . .
Do not imagine from anything in this, that I misappreciate you. No, I am at loggerheads with myself.220
Clearly Clemens was in no mood to participate in business decisions, still less to ponder the consequences of abandoning the plan to market Tom Sawyer and Huckleberry Finn together. Although the original motive for omitting the raft episode from Huckleberry Finn was now moot, to restore the episode at this time would require having new pictures drawn and plated; new type set and proofread; new captions, page titles, and contents written and typeset; the illustrated chapter headings for each succeeding chapter altered to reflect new chapter numbers; and the plates for the remainder of the book newly made or altered to conform with the new chapter headings and new foliation. In short, to restore it would halt production, reimmerse everyone in book-making details, delay publication for some weeks, and cost a good deal of money. Even if restoring the episode crossed Clemens’s mind, he must have dismissed it as unfeasible. Webster was eager to get the prospectuses in hand and the printing and binding of the book underway so that he could leave on his cross-country trip to contract with general agents. If he remembered the raft episode, he restrained any impulse to mention it (“you want to think twice before you send me irritating news”).221
[begin page 737]
stooping” and drew a line to “stopping” in the type. Clemens underlined the suggested reading in ink, crossed out “Qy,” and supplied an o over the first p of “stopping.”
In fact, before Webster left on his trip he hoped to have, in addition
[begin page 738]
Although he had not suggested pulling apart the book to restore the raft episode, Clemens did have a new idea that might cause a delay—a second frontispiece. A young sculptor, Karl Gerhardt (1853–1940), recently arrived back in the United States after three years of art studies in Europe supported by the Clemenses, had made a clay bust of him in Elmira and cast it in plaster, and the author proposed to include a picture of it in the book. He wrote to Webster on 8 September, enclosing a photograph taken by Elisha M. Van Aken of Elmira:
Here is a photograph from the bust. How would it do to heliotype it (reducing it to half the present size), & make a frontispiece of it for Huck Finn, with
Mark Twain
from the bust by Karl Gerhardt
printed under it.225
[begin page 739]
I think it would help the sale of the book and would go nicely. As we have a frontispiece entitled “Huck Finn” & as it has been written in the table of contents which is already printed we could not leave it out, but we would have to face your picture against it, the same as in “Tramp Abroad . ” I find I can get it Heliotyped and inserted for just .02¢; this would cover the whole business. . . . There will be no difficulty about delaying the canvassers copies, so they promise me.226
Clemens replied on 15 September, reminding Webster, “Be sure & attach the words ‘From the bust by Karl Gerhardt.’ ” By 17 September Webster had “made a contract with the Heliotype people,” and two days later he sent “by express a bottle of Heliotype ink” to Elmira for Mark Twain to use in inscribing his signature, a facsimile of which was to be used as the caption to the photograph.227 The ink was delayed but evidently caught up with Clemens in Elmira before 23 September, or soon thereafter in New York or Hartford.228 Webster paid J. J. Little and Company sixty-nine dollars for “ptg. and electrotyping pages for 1000 prospectuses” on 23 September, but the new frontispiece, which had to be tipped into each prospectus or book, could not have been ready for several days.229 The author’s heliotyped signature appeared on the frontispiece along with the picture of the bust and his proposed caption identifying the sculptor.230
[begin page 740]
The corrections that Clemens marked on the foundry proofs were made in the standing type before plates were made: both the prospectus and book have the correct reading on page 164 (“the duke” instead of “Baldy”; 163.23 in this edition). One other correction, which had been overlooked in proof, was made after the first printing of the prospectus: the incorrect reading “base” was altered to “race” on page 174 (173.4 in this edition). The corrected reading appeared in even the earliest impressions of the book and in the late impressions of the prospectus. The implication is that
[begin page 741]
At the time the offending illustration was first noticed, Webster was away in the West, contracting with book agents. When he left in late September (he had already made brief trips to see some general agents in Washington, D.C., Baltimore, and Philadelphia earlier in the month), he was confident that he had indeed “engineered the book through all its critical periods, and everything is in working order.”232 The prospectus would soon be in print with the new frontispiece tipped in, ready for delivery to the general agents; the advertising campaign was begun; the New York canvassers were ready to begin their work; and the first impression of the book may have been completed—some copies would be bound before the middle of November. Perhaps as early as the first week of November, when he was in San Francisco, Webster was informed of the discovery of the obscene illustration in the prospectus. The picture of Uncle Silas on first-edition page 283 (page 281 in this edition) had been altered so that it appeared his genitals were exposed.233 Webster later said that no more than
[begin page 742]
Webster’s search for the culprit led him to suspect that the damage had occurred after the entire page (with type and illustration) was plated but before printing had begun. On 28 November he explained to a reporter from the New York Tribune why he believed the plate had been altered at that stage:
The original drawing, photo-engraving and stereotype i.e., electrotype plates are all right. The proofs were first examined by the printers’ proof-reader, next by Mr. Clemens himself, then by W. D. Howells, and finally by myself, and were found to be correct. Stereotype plates were then made, proofs taken therefrom, read, and found correct, and sent to the printers for publication. I am satisfied that the printers knew nothing of the matter. If the first edition had been printed
[begin page 743]
The first Canadian issue of Huckleberry Finn, printed from a duplicate set of the Webster company plates and published by Dawson Brothers on 10 December 1884, shows the illustration in its repaired state. The first English edition, published by Chatto and Windus on 10 December 1884, likewise shows the repaired illustration. Clemens made no changes to the text of either the Canadian issue or the English edition.
The first American edition’s official publication date was 18 February 1885. The first impression of 30,000 copies and most of a second impression of 10,000 copies were exhausted in less than a month. On 14 March 1885 Webster reported that he had ordered “paper for 10000 more books and shall print them right away, this will make 50,000 printed.”238 The book sold steadily thereafter; Webster continued to have the printers run off new impressions of the book as needed. Signatures from these impressions were in turn given to the binders, who produced new books essentially on demand. Because not all signatures from the earlier impressions were bound into books before the new impressions were printed, unbound
[begin page 744]
Before the first American edition was published, three excerpts from Huckleberry Finn appeared in the Century Illustrated Monthly Magazine of December 1884, and January and February 1885. In the mid-1880s the Century enjoyed an extraordinary expansion of its popularity and influence.240 In January 1885 its circulation was estimated at 180,000 copies per month, with some issues reprinted several times to meet subsequent demand; in April 1885 the cover advertised a “first edition” of 225,000 copies.241 According to Arthur John, during the next ten years the magazine “reached a pinnacle of prestige and influence unprecedented in American magazine history.”242
The excerpts from Huckleberry Finn were edited by Richard Watson Gilder, probably with the help of one or both of his Century colleagues—Robert Underwood Johnson, first associate editor, and C. C. Buel, second assistant editor.243 In 1932 Bernard DeVoto characterized Gilder as a liberal
[begin page 745]
[begin page 746]
In fact, the Century excerpts were not set from manuscript or from galley proof but, as Gilder’s letters show, from final book pages—most likely folded and gathered sheets (unbound signatures), marked to incorporate Gilder’s changes. Although Gilder or his editors proposed the major omissions and changes, Clemens evidently saw proof of what they proposed to publish, because the Century text exhibits some evidence of authorial change. There was no subsequent need to “restore” readings to the first American edition since they had not been affected by the Century revision: the first impression of the book was already printed (even though not formally published) before the last two episodes appeared. The author willingly acquiesced in the extraction and editing of his text for a magazine audience.
Clemens seems not to have pursued his idea of serializing Huckleberry Finn in the Century or the New York Sun after speaking with the editors, Gilder and Charles A. Dana, respectively, in September 1883. Both editors must have expressed their desire to publish something by Mark Twain, however, and in August, Clemens did give the Sun a brief sketch, but insisted it be published anonymously.246 Gilder, however, had not forgotten Huckleberry Finn. Perhaps in late September 1884 when Clemens stopped off in New York on the way to Hartford from Elmira, Gilder approached him, hoping to revive the idea of publication in the Century in advance of the book. Clemens gave permission for a short excerpt, and probably gave Gilder a set of folded and gathered sheets from which to choose it.247 Gilder had read at least through chapter 18 by 10 October, when he wrote asking for a much longer excerpt than Clemens had offered:
Take a long pull & a strong pull & a pull altogether & listen to what I have to say & dont get wrothy till you get through. You say Huckleberries won’t be ripe for the public for a month or two——make it a bit longer before the book comes out & let
[begin page 747]
Its against your rule. Yes—but we find that the best thing we can do now & then is to break a rule—as we did when, for instance, we went against nature & philosophy & reprinted Mrs. Burnetts Louisiana from the back numbers of Peterson’s magazine! We could just skim through that book, make up a jolly thing of it for four or five numbers—conservative, interesting & in every way creditable to you & the magazine—then you could in announcing your book through agents &c. say that the book version contained twice as much matter—or one third—or one fourth as much. It would not kill the sale in book form for two reasons—one is that it would not all be in the magazine—& the second is that a very large part of your audience lies outside of the magazine’s regular readers.
Then, please take this into consideration: The advertising & notoriety of the serial publication could not hurt & might help your winter readings. You could moreover, as did Cable, with Sevier, run ahead of the serial publication in your readings and thereby secure greater novelty & freshness for these. In my opinion the whole scheme would work together finely.
In making this suggestion I know I am thinking largely of the magazine’s interest—mainly thereof—for I am trying to get an unusual & highly desirable “card”: I can hardly think of a better one. But I believe there is nothing in the proposition or in the scheme that could work injury to your interests—if you can arrange matters with your publishers.
We would, in such a case as this, let you precede in your publication the issue of the book by subscription, if you so demand.
Consider the matter well & telegraph the result of your cogitation. If you can do it—what would you charge—in any offer you make us please throw in any of the pictures which we might wish—248
In his eagerness to secure a large portion (“half or three quarters”) of Huckleberry Finn for the Century, Gilder was replying to objections Clemens had already expressed, and also trying to forestall any new ones that might arise from his offer. Clemens’s “rule” must have been that he would not allow periodical publication of a significant portion of a book to precede book publication: a short extract might awaken interest, but a longer one would undercut book sales. Although Gilder began by asking him to break this “rule” by delaying book publication, four paragraphs later he offered to let publication by subscription precede or coincide with publication in the Century.249 In the remainder of the letter he set out some of the criteria that would guide him in editing the text for a Century audience:
There are some few expressions “not adapted to our audience” (I do not find many) that we would wish the liberty of expunging, and a good deal would have to
[begin page 748]
The book has some telling points—such as the old daddies talk about the mulatter.—That is one of your best things.251
If we can only use one installment it may be somewhat awkward to select as the story runs in and out. I am thinking of that part about the feuds—but it would be hard to dove-tail it in—can you suggest a way—without making it a mere extract from the book.
In naming a price please remember that you have the largest audience of any English writer above ground—also dont name a price so high that all advantage to the magazine would be discounted in advance.
I want this badly. . . . We are holding things over for your telegram. (The extra sheets have come.)
What Gilder meant by the “extra sheets” is uncertain. If he had been given only a partial set of folded and gathered sheets, he might have meant that the remainder had arrived. More likely, however, he had been given a complete set, and had requested a second. (Since the book pages were printed on both sides, two sets would be needed to allow him to cut and paste copy for the Century typesetter.)
Clemens replied in a telegram (not known to survive) on 10 or 11 October. Apparently he was not upset by Gilder’s proposed editing of Huckleberry Finn for the Century. His major concern seems to have been financial—what effect this partial magazine publication would have on sales of the book. Despite his “rule,” he apparently agreed at least to experiment,
[begin page 749]
Gilder, who had preferred the feud episode for the December issue if allowed only one excerpt, was now faced with selecting from the whole narrative. He therefore dropped the idea of using Huckleberry Finn in the December issue, and wrote Clemens on 11 October about a new plan:
Your telegram has been received & I have ordered the Dec. no closed up without delay. Four numbers is what we would like to have. Jan. Feb. March April—(April closes a volume.) At the former price—(“what you paid me last time”) do you mean lump price $400—or $30 a page?252
The more I read the story the more I am impressed with the feasibleness of the scheme. I hope you will go into it heartily.—Of course it is something of an experiment—but I hope you will not feel it is a dangerous one. I spoke to Cable about it to-day—he seemed to think the serial idea a capital one.
I am extremely delighted that you favor the plan.253
Soon after Clemens sent his telegram, however, he had second thoughts. On 11 or 12 October he wrote Gilder a long letter (also lost) explaining his change of heart. Presumably worried that extended selections in more than one issue of the Century would look like full serialization and therefore undercut book sales, he withdrew his consent to the experiment. He apparently renewed his offer of a single episode, of any length, before book publication. In response, Gilder returned to his original idea of using the feud episode for the supposedly “closed up” December issue. He devised a way to edit it that resolved his earlier worry about dovetailing it in “without making it a mere extract from the book.” On 13 October he wrote Clemens:
Your long letter is at hand. We’ll drop the idea of a serial (with profound regret on my part.) If you are so doubtful about it, I don’t think we ought to consider it. Perhaps you’ll live up to the idea, yet; with another book.
I am sending to the printer an eleven or twelve magazine page episode—for the December no, which I’ve wrenched open again for the purpose.
AN
ADVENTURE OF HUCKLEBERRY FINN:
Being an Account of the Famous Grangerford-Shepherdson
Feud.
By Mark Twain.
We use as a prelude the description of the river—beginning “Here is the way” p. 157 to dern the dern fog p. 159—254
The story begins p. 130—We shoved out after dark on the raft—omit the next paragraph about the snake-skin—resume with the words “The place to buy” & continue
[begin page 750]
Gilder’s solution to the problem of editing the feud chapters for the Century turned out to be a simple one after all. To set the scene he chose the opening paragraphs of chapter 19, describing Jim and Huck’s life on the river, and then planned to use the end of chapter 16, and chapters 17 and 18 in full. His letter shows that he (or his deputy on the staff) made the editorial choices assuming Clemens’s consent, but without his guidance. Gilder was evidently primarily concerned with making the episode coherent to a magazine reader who was not familiar with the earlier part of the book, and for that purpose he omitted the “paragraph about the snakeskin”: “Anybody that don’t believe, yet, that it’s foolishness to handle a snake-skin, after all that that snake-skin done for us, will believe it now, if they read on and see what more it done for us” (130.4–6). Clemens supplied a paragraph identifying Huck and Jim, and by 17 October it had been typeset, having undergone at least two minor modifications by Gilder. It appeared in the December Century as follows:
[The following episode is taken from an unpublished book called “The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, Tom Sawyer’s Comrade.” A word will explain the situation: The negro Jim is escaping from slavery in Missouri, and Huck Finn is running away from a drunken father, who maltreats him. The two fugitives are floating down the Mississippi on a fragment of a lumber-raft, doing their voyaging by night and hiding themselves and the raft in the day-time. When this chapter opens they have already floated four hundred miles—a trip which has occupied ten or twelve adventurous nights. Readers who have met Huck Finn before (in “Tom Sawyer”) will not be surprised to note that whenever Huck is caught in a close place and is obliged to explain, the truth gets well crippled before he gets through.—M.T.]257
Gilder had altered the opening sentence of the paragraph and made a few more cuts in the story:
The little note is in print. I only changed “brief chapter” to “episode”—and omitted the words “now in press” which gave an advertising & second hand look to the thing. Considering that this is an episode—& has not quite the completeness & value of an original story—would $30 per page (the same rate as before) be out of the way. I think that would be fairer than the round sum before given of $400. Indeed I think that the price of the last story was regulated by the rate per page—which would make this the same price. (This includes electrotypes for the pictures.)
I enclose the first page which we have sent to press. I have only omitted the poem, and a few cuss words—about the fog.—
With many thanks for letting us have this & hopes that you will do it again—& next time earlier in the enterprise—258
[begin page 751]
Although no further correspondence about the December episode has been found, it is likely that Clemens saw not only “the first page . . . sent to press,” but other proofs as well. It was customary for the Century to send author’s proofs,260 and only time constraints might have forced Gilder to abandon his usual practice. If Clemens did see proof for this episode, however, he made little or no detectable alteration to it. Collation of the December Century against the first edition reveals only twenty-seven small substantive changes (and changes in accidentals affecting dialect) other than those already mentioned by Gilder. Three of them, while possibly authorial, do not constitute enough of a case to establish Clemens’s intervention. The change from “hands” to “hand” at 133.33 could as easily have been made by an editor or compositor. Similarly, the change from “was” to “is” at 143.33 (in which the substitute reading is clearly inferior to the original) is most likely a compositor’s error. The change from “him” to “it” at 142.28 (making “no frivolishness” refer only to the Colonel’s mahogany cane rather than to the Colonel himself) so trivializes the meaning that it is unlikely to be authorial. The remaining changes are all attributable to editorial intervention: the process of excerpting, the imposition of house style, and the sophistication of nonstandard grammar and dialect to more standard usage.261 Consistency of dialect spelling was also imposed, not only by the Century editors but by the proofreaders and compositors in the De Vinne print shop, which produced the magazine. Theodore De Vinne’s manual asserted that dialect “must be made uniform in its spelling, even if it is irregular in copy. Different abbreviations or clippings of the same word by the same speaker or writer should not be
[begin page 752]
Two additional extracts from the book did subsequently appear in the Century. Just when Clemens gave his consent for them remains uncertain. Negotiations may have been reopened as early as October when Gilder sent the proofs of the December episode; an agreement had certainly been reached by 9 November, when Clemens wrote Webster from Providence, where he was performing on his “Twins of Genius” speaking tour with George Washington Cable: “Gilder of the Century said to me, ‘We are not only indebted to you for a good chapter for our next number, but are profoundly indebted to you for unearthing a gem of an artist for us.’ ” But the selection of material probably did not occur until later in the month, when Gilder came to one of Clemens’s New York readings at Chickering Hall and talked with him afterwards.264 Clemens read “King Sollermun,” from chapter 14 of Huckleberry Finn, at the evening performance on the eighteenth, and at the matinee on the nineteenth, noting on his own program that he added “de Bank” from chapter 8 as an encore both times.265 These two dialogues between Huck and Jim make up the second (January) episode in the Century, and Gilder’s hearing them read aloud may well have prompted their selection. In any case, the decision about content must have occurred well before the end of November in order for the episode to be included in the January issue. Clemens and Gilder evidently agreed on a third extract at the same time, for the February episode was announced in the January Century.266
[begin page 753]
Clemens did not furnish a prefatory note for the January episode,267 but unlike the December one, it shows clear evidence of authorial revision. Jim’s summing-up remark at 57.14–15 (“I wisht I had de money, I wouldn’ want no mo’ ” in the first American edition) is replaced by “But live stock’s
[begin page 754]
The February episode, entitled “Royalty on the Mississippi: As Chronicled by Huckleberry Finn,” was by far the longest of the three extracts and contained the most substantive change. Comprising the greater part of chapters 19–28, with an additional bit from chapter 29, it began with an editorial note to place the characters: “See The Century for December and January. The negro Jim is escaping on a raft from slavery in Missouri, and Huck Finn is running away from a drunken and cruel father.—Ed.”270 In all, there were 107 substantive changes (and accidental changes affecting dialect), more than half of them simple omissions from the text. Analysis of their content—especially that of the omissions—suggests strongly that they originated with Gilder or the Century editors. In his letter of 10 October, Gilder had promised not to “mutilate” Mark Twain’s book, but proposed three categories of change: (1) alteration of material “not adapted to our audience”; (2) omissions on account of space; and (3) omissions determined by both space and suitability. Alterations in the February episode for the most part fit these categories. Those specifically aimed at the Century audience include, as DeVoto, Arthur L. Scott, and Herbert F. Smith noted, not only corrections of Huck’s grammar and softening of “coarse” expressions, but deletion of descriptive passages or incidents that might offend refined taste: Huck’s statement that he and Jim were “always naked, day and night, whenever the mosquitoes would let us” (157.37–38); the preacher’s wild address and the king kissing the girls at the camp meeting (172.5–16, 173.13–17); the “signs of a dead cat” (198.7) and other references to smells; and the matter-of-fact references to Peter
[begin page 755]
Gilder’s concern about extracting the feud episode—“it may be somewhat awkward to select as the story runs in and out”—must have also applied to the episodic nature of the ten-chapter selection about the king and the duke. Omissions for space were of particular necessity here. Thus he dropped passages that do not advance the plot: the death of Boggs; Huck’s visit to the circus (chapters 21, 22); Jim’s story about his daughter ’Lizabeth (chapters 23); Huck and Joanna’s discussion of life in England (chapter 26); and the description of the undertaker (chapter 27). “Suitability” must also have played a part in the selection of some of these passages. Of course there were other reasons to cut, among them relevance—a passage might lose its meaning when extracted from the context of the book: thus the omission of the snakeskin reference in the December extract, and of the reference to Pap (at 165.15–17) in the February extract.272
Gilder’s responsibility for these changes is confirmed by his 1886 reply to a letter from a Century reader, a “superintendent of public schools in a distant part of the West,” who criticized the magazine for publishing its selections from Huckleberry Finn:
We understand the points at which you object in Mark Twain’s writings, but we cannot agree with you that they are “destitute of a single redeeming quality.” We think that the literary judgment of this country and of England will not sustain you in such an opinion. I ask you in all fairness to read Mr. Howells’ essay on Mark Twain in the September number of the Century for 1882. To say that the writings of Mark Twain “are hardly worthy a place in the columns of the average county newspaper
[begin page 756]
Mark Twain is not a giber at religion or morality. He is a good citizen, and believes in the best things. Nevertheless there is much of his writing that we would not print for a miscellaneous audience. If you should ever carefully compare the chapters of “Huckleberry Finn,” as we printed them, with the same as they appear in his book you will see the most decided difference. These extracts were carefully edited for a magazine audience with his full consent.273
Clemens apparently did give his “full consent” to the editing of Huckleberry Finn for a magazine audience. Although no letter about Huckleberry Finn survives, the author’s letters to the Century editors about other works he published there show that he expected such editing for magazine publication as a matter of course, at times even asked for and welcomed it. In August 1885 he wrote one of the editors before submission of his next contribution, “The Private History of a Campaign That Failed,” commissioned by the Century:
Mrs. Clemens will edit it to-night; I will re-edit it to-morrow, & then send it. I have made so many little alterations that I must ask you or Mr. Buell to read the whole of
[begin page 757]
The editing of the Century episodes of Huckleberry Finn in almost every instance originated with the editors and was a requirement of the magazine’s format and its implicit contract with its audience.
Although the raft episode as published in Life on the Mississippi in 1883 drew some scattered comment by reviewers, the extracts from Huckleberry Finn published in the Century were the first to reach a general audience and to elicit published (and unpublished) comment on the book. Clemens was on his speaking tour with George Washington Cable, reading selections from his book, when the first Century extracts appeared. Although most of the newspaper notices of the Century were bland or perfunctory, Clemens may have been slightly alarmed at the tone of others, especially since these came on top of the bad publicity he was getting for suing a Boston bookseller who had offered Huckleberry Finn for sale before the Webster company had even completed its canvass.275 On 1 February 1885 the Boston Herald, in reviewing the February Century (with the episode about the king and the duke, “Royalty on the Mississippi”), wrote that it “has a trifle of ‘too muchness of that sort of thing,’ which is the prevailing
[begin page 758]
After publication of The Gilded Age in 1873, Clemens had become convinced by the persistence of an unfair accusation printed in an early unfavorable review that “the latest review of a book was pretty sure to be just a reflection of the earliest review of it. That whatever the first reviewer found to praise or censure in the book would be repeated in the latest reviewer’s report, with nothing fresh added.”277 He therefore tried to stage-manage the reviews of Huckleberry Finn by making sure that the first were favorable and published in influential journals. On 23 January, more than a month after the first English edition of Huckleberry Finn was published and three weeks before the American publication, he began to issue instructions to Webster about review copies: “A day or two after the book issues, you want to send a cloth copy to the prominent journals & magazines of the country.—but none to the N.Y. Perhaps you better send to the prominent magazinesnow (with unbound copies to make extracts from.)”278 Three days later he repeated the gist of this instruction, but expressed the hope that Gilder could “review it in next Century.”279 The next day, 27 January, he refined this strategy: “The following is a positive order: Send no copy of the book to any newspaper until after the ser Century or the Atlantic shall have reviewed it. I make an exception in New York.” He added: “What we want is a favorable review, by an authority—then immediately distribute the book among the press.”280 When Webster replied that Gilder could not get a review into the March issue of the Century or even guarantee one for April, Clemens began weighing still another plan, “sending out 300 press copies early—say Feb. 23d—without waiting for the magazines—Heavens & earth! the book ought to have been reviewed in the March Century & Atlantic!—how have we been dull enough to go & overlook that? It is an irreparable blunder.”281 On 10 February, just eight days before the official publication of the first American edition, Clemens settled on what proved to be the final plan, which Webster followed. It began by singling out three powerful New York dailies and one venerable weekly magazine:
As to notices, I suggest this plan: Send immediately, copies (bound & unbound) to the Evening Post, Sun, World, & the Nation; the Hartford Courant, Post
[begin page 759]
Keep a sharp lookout, & if the general tone of the resulting notices is favorable, then send out your 300 press copies over the land. . . . No use to wait for the magazines—how in hell we overlooked that unspeakably important detail, utterly beats my time. We have not even arranged to get English notices from Chatto & shove them into the papers ahead of our publication.282
Webster responded on 14 February, reminding Clemens that “you told me in the start that press notices hurt the last book before it was out & that this year we would send none until the book was out.” He assured Clemens that he had sent off “copies (bound & unbound)” to the newspapers and journals listed in Clemens’s letter. Although it seems unlikely that Webster followed them with the “300 press copies,” most of the named publications did review the book, as did numerous others, which probably received their review copies from local agents.283 Clemens’s English publisher, Chatto and Windus, also apparently sent out review copies.284 In addition to the formal reviews in English and American journals, Clemens received a virtual flood of mail from family and friends—including many fellow writers—to whom he had sent complimentary copies of the book.
The English reviews were for the most part favorable. An unsigned review in the Athenaeum, probably by William Ernest Henley, found the book to be “Mark Twain at his best”: “For some time past Mr. Clemens has been carried away by the ambition of seriousness and fine writing. In ‘Huckleberry Finn’ he returns to his right mind, and is again the Mark Twain of old time. . . . Jim and Huckleberry are real creations.”285 The American critic Brander Matthews, writing in the London Saturday Review, noted the technical achievement of the book: “The skill with which the character of Huck Finn is maintained is marvellous. We see everything through his eyes—and they are his eyes and not a pair of Mark Twain’s spectacles. . . . one of the most artistic things in Huckleberry Finn is the sober self-restraint with which Mr. Clemens lets Huck Finn set down, without any comment at all, scenes which would have afforded the ordinary writer matter for endless moral and political and sociological
[begin page 760]
Friends and family and many early reviewers easily recognized and praised the “real” and “documentary” character of the book—that is, the real people behind the fictional characters, the real speech and manner and popular culture of Hannibal and of the Mississippi Valley generally—and they remarked on the moral of its plot, doubtless provoked by the disclaimer in Mark Twain’s “Notice.” On 17 January 1885 Clemens’s sister-in-law wrote from Keokuk, Iowa: “Sam I have just finished Huck Finn. It simply amazes me to see how you kept up the dialects and the underlying moral lesson without a particle of apparent effort. It is real, to me.”287 John Milton Hay, Lincoln’s former private secretary and a long-time friend and admirer of Clemens’s, wrote to him after publication:
It is a strange life you have described, one which I imagine must be already pretty nearly obsolete in most respects. I, who grew up in the midst of it, have almost forgotten it, except when I read of it in your writings—the only place, I think, where a faithful record of it survives. To me the great interest of this, and your other like books, independent of their wit and humor and pathos, which everybody can see, is “documentary.” Without them I should not know today, the speech and the way of living, with which I was familiar as a child. Huck Finns and Tom Sawyers were my admired and trusted friends—though I had to cultivate them as the early Christians did their religion—in out of the way places. I am glad to meet them again in your luminous pages.288
Some of the earliest reviews took the same tone. The Hartford Times praised the novel for “the fidelity with which it paints the characters and the scenes” it depicts and said that it “is a good book, and it does teach a certain moral, notwithstanding the author’s disclaimer; it teaches, without seeming to do it, the virtue of honest simplicity, directness, truth.”289 The Hartford Courant review (probably written by Charles Dudley Warner, or possibly by Charles Hopkins Clark) said:
Mr. Clemens has made a very distinct literary advance over Tom Sawyer, as an interpreter of human nature and a contributor to our stock of original pictures of American life. Still adhering to his plan of narrating the adventures of boys, with a primeval and Robin Hood freshness, he has broadened his canvas and given us a picture
[begin page 761]
The Courant’s review was one of several to praise the psychological insight in the portrayal of Huck’s struggles with his conscience:
What, for instance, in the case of Huck, the son of the town drunkard, perverted from the time of his birth, is conscience, and how does it work? Most amusing is the struggle Huck has with his conscience in regard to slavery. . . . The whole study of Huck’s moral nature is as serious as it is amusing, his confusion of wrong as right and his abnormal mendacity, traceable to his training from infancy, is a singular contribution to the investigation of human nature.
The New York Sun reviewer agreed. In describing the incident in chapter 16 where Huck nearly turns Jim in, he noted that “Huck’s moral nature began to experience a singular reawakening. A conscience that was sufficiently elastic on the subject of mendacity, and that never kicked when Huck stole chickens or watermelons, . . . was strongly agitated by the thought that here he was helping a slave to escape to freedom.” After quoting the episode from chapter 31, where Huck determines to turn Jim in and then finds he cannot pray because “You can’t pray a lie,” the reviewer wrote: “Although this seems like an audacious burlesque of religious sentiment, reaching quite to the limits of the permissible, the reflections attributed to Huckleberry on the enormity of his transgression are probably as true as anything else in the book to the Missouri creed of forty years ago.”291
But other critics reacted to the book with hostility and contempt. Where the positive reviews had seen “realism,” they saw “coarseness,” “bad taste,” and “grotesqueness.” Where the positive reviews had seen the conflict between conscience and training as a serious and sophisticated “study of human nature,” they saw “irreverence” and immorality, and questioned the appropriateness of the book for young readers. The New York World subtitled its review, “ ‘Humor’ of a Very Low Order—Wit and
[begin page 762]
The humor of the work, if it can be called such, depends almost wholly on the scrapes into which the quartet are led by the rascality of the impostors, “Huck’s” lying, the negro’s superstition and fear and on the irreverence which makes parents, guardians and people who are at all good and proper ridiculous. That such stuff should be considered humor is more than a pity. Even the author objects to it being considered literature. But what can be said of a man of Mr. Clemens’s wit, ability and position deliberately imposing upon an unoffending public a piece of careless hack-work in which a few good things are dropped amid a mass of rubbish. . . . There is an abundance of moving accidents by fire and flood, a number of situations more or less unpleasant in which he involves his dramatis personae and then leaves them to lie themselves out of it, a series of episodes and digressions apparently introduced to give Mr. Twain’s peculiar sense of humor a breathing spell, and finally two or three unusually atrocious murders in cold blood, thrown in by way of incidental diversion.292
The Boston Advertiser similarly charged the book with vulgarity and irreverence: “Here and there are snatches of Mark Twain’s best work, which could be read over and over again, and yet bring each time an outburst of laughter; but one cannot have the book long in his hands without being tempted to regret that the author should so often have laid himself open to the charge of coarseness and bad taste.”293
Reviews from the newspapers in San Francisco tended to echo these same concerns. The Examiner wrote:
It is apparently, as the art critics say, a pot-boiler in its baldest form. As a picture of life in the Southwest, however, there is little to be said in the book’s favor, though there are several passages which are drawn with much ability, with occasionally a touch of a sort of grotesque pathos which greatly interests the reader. As to the rest, it is very much of the same character as many of the author’s Pacific Coast sketches, in the utter absence of truth and being unlike anything that ever existed in the earth, above the earth, or in the waters under the earth.294
The San Francisco Bulletin raised the question of whether the book was appropriate for children: “The author starts out by telling his juvenile readers that there are some lies in his book—that most people lie, and that it is not very bad after all. Of course the warning is timely that persons attempting to seek a moral in the story should be banished.” Although the reviewer recognized Mark Twain’s “genuine” vein of wit, he concluded that “there is very little of literary art in the story.”295 The San Francisco Chronicle objected to these criticisms:
[begin page 763]
Clemens continued to get personal letters praising his book. William Livingston Alden, a columnist and editorial writer on the New York Times, who had written on 28 February to say that he had enjoyed the Century episodes “more than I ever enjoyed any magazine articles anywhere,” wrote him again on 15 March: “I have just read Huck through in course. It is the best book ever written.”297
In the middle of March 1885, the Concord, Massachusetts, Library Committee decided not to circulate a copy of Huckleberry Finn that had been ordered for the collection, and the story of this rejection, widely published in the newspapers, set off a debate about the book, with reactions appearing in hundreds of newspapers all across the country. One of the most complete stories, quoting members of the committee, was published in the St. Louis Globe-Democrat of 17 March:
Said one member of the committee: “While I do not wish to state it as my opinion that the book is absolutely immoral in its tone, still it seems to me that it contains but very little humor, and that little is of a very coarse type. If it were not for the author’s reputation the book would undoubtedly meet with severe criticism. I regard it as the veriest trash.” Another member says: “I have examined the book and my objections to it are these: It deals with a series of adventures of a very low grade of morality; it is couched in the language of a rough, ignorant dialect, and all through its pages there is a systematic use of bad grammar and an employment of rough, coarse, inelegant expressions. It is also very irreverent. To sum up, the book is flippant and irreverent in its style. It deals with a series of experiences that are certainly not elevating. The whole book is of a class that is more profitable for the slums than it is for respectable people, and it is trash of the veriest sort.”298
Clemens was at first unruffled by the controversy. He wrote to Webster on 18 March: “The Committee . . . have given us a rattling tip-top puff which will go into every paper in the country. They have expelled Huck
[begin page 764]
Although some critics found the objections of the committee easy to mock, others did not. For them, the question then became whether the book was truly “very coarse,” of a “low grade of morality,” and “trash of the veriest sort.” The Boston papers agreed almost entirely with the committee, and the Springfield (Mass.) Republican wrote:
Mr Clemens is a genuine and powerful humorist, with a bitter vein of satire on the weaknesses of humanity which is sometimes wholesome, sometimes only grotesque, but in certain of his works degenerates into a gross trifling with every fine feeling. The trouble with Mr Clemens is that he has no reliable sense of propriety. . . . The advertising samples of this book, which have disfigured the Century magazine, are enough to tell any reader how offensive the whole thing must be. They are no better in tone than the dime novels which flood the blood-and-thunder reading population; Mr Clemens has made them smarter, for he has an inexhaustible fund of “quips and cranks and wanton wiles,” and his literary skill is of course superior, but their moral level is low, and their perusal cannot be anything less than harmful.300
As Clemens followed the controversy in the newspapers over the following weeks, he lost his equanimity. He became so furious at the Springfield Republican and Boston Advertiser for what he saw as a personal attack on him as well as his book that he wrote a “Prefatory Remark” for future editions of Huckleberry Finn, and wanted to send copies of the altered book to “all the New York & Boston papers, & to a scattering few western ones.”301 It stated:
Prefatory Remark.
Huckleberry Finn is not an imaginary person. He still lives; or rather, they still live; for Huckleberry Finn is two persons in one—namely, the author’s two uncles, the present editors of the Boston Advertiser & the Springfield Republican. In character, language, clothing, education, instinct, & origin, he is the painstakingly & truthfully drawn photograph & counterpart of these two gentlemen as they were in the time of their boyhood, forty years ago. The work has been most carefully & conscientiously done, & is exactly true to the originals, in even the minutest particulars, with but one exception, & that a trifling one: this boy’s language has been toned down & softened, here & there, in deference to the taste of a more modern & fastidious day.302
He had dropped the idea by the next day, when he wrote Webster: “Livy forbids the ‘Prefatory Remark’—therefore, put it in the fire.”303
Across the country, many defenses of the book were published. One of
[begin page 765]
The action of the Concord Public Library in excluding Mark Twain’s new book, “Huckleberry Finn,” on the ground that it is flippant and irreverent, is absurd. The managers of this library evidently look on this book as written for boys, whereas we venture to say that upon nine boys out of ten much of the humor, as well as the pathos, would be lost. The more general knowledge one has the better he is fitted to appreciate this book, which is a remarkably careful sketch of life along the Mississippi river forty years ago. If one has lived in the South he can appreciate the art with which the dialect is managed, exactly as he can in Joel Chandler Harris’ “Uncle Remus,” or in Craddock’s Tennessee mountain tales. If he has not he will be forced to take it on trust. So with the characters. They are peculiarly Southern, but only those who have lived south of Mason and Dixon’s line can thoroughly appreciate the fidelity to nature with which they have been drawn. When the boy under 16 reads a book he wants adventure and plenty of it. He doesn’t want any moral thrown in or even implied; the elaborate jokes worked out with so much art, which are Mark Twain’s specialty, are wasted upon him. All the character sketches go for nothing with this eager reader, who demands a story. To be sure, here is a story in the astonishing series of adventures of “Huck” Finn and the runaway negro, but it is so overlaid with this embroidery of jokes, sketches and sarcasm, that the story really forms the least part of it. Take the whole latter part of the book, which is given up to the ludicrous attempt to free the negro, Jim, from his imprisonment on the Arkansas plantation. This is a well sustained travesty of the escapes of great criminals, and can only be fully appreciated by one who has read what it ridicules. Running all through the book is the sharpest satire on the ante-bellum estimate of the slave. Huckleberry Finn, the son of a worthless, drunken, poor white, is troubled with many qualms of conscience because of the part he is taking in helping the negro to gain his freedom. This has been called exaggerated by some critics, but there is nothing truer in the book. The same may be said of the ghastly feud between the Shepperdsons and the Grangerfords, which is described with so much dramatic force. The latter depicts a phase of Southern life which the advance in civilization has had no power to alter. The telegraphic reports of periodical affrays in the South and Southwest show that the medieval blood-feud is still in force there and receives the countenance of the best society.
These are only a few instances which go to show that this is not a boy’s book and does not fall under the head of flippant and worthless literature. Of its humor nothing need be said. There is a large class of people who are impervious to a joke, even when told by as consummate a master of the art of narration as Mark Twain. For all these the book will be dreary, flat, stale and unprofitable. But for the great body of readers it will furnish much hearty, wholesome laughter. In regard to the charge of grossness, there is not a line in it which cannot be read by a pure-minded woman. There are too few books of genuine humor produced nowadays to have one of them stigmatized as unfit for general reading, and it is on this ground only that the absurd attack of these New England library authorities is worth notice.304
Clemens’s sister, Pamela, then living in California, probably sent him the San Francisco Chronicle editorial and asked him about it. On 15 April he responded, again dismissing the library controversy: “The Chronicle understands the book—those idiots in Concord are not a court of last
[begin page 766]
Joel Chandler Harris wrote privately to Clemens that Huckleberry Finn’s “value as a picture of life and as a study in philology will yet come to be recognized by those whose recognition is worth anything. It is the most original contribution that has yet been made to American literature.”306 And later Harris wrote for publication that “there is not in our fictive literature a more wholesome book than ‘Huckleberry Finn.’ It is history, it is romance, it is life. Here . . . we see people growing and living; we laugh at their humor, share their griefs; and . . . we are taught the lesson of honesty, justice and mercy.”307 Clemens thanked him “for the good word about Huck, that abused child of mine who has had so much unfair mud flung at him. Somehow I can’t help believing in him, & it’s a great refreshment to my faith to have a man back me up who has been where such boys live, & knows what he is talking about.”308 Franklin Benjamin Sanborn, one of the founders of the Concord School of Philosophy and an advocate of social reform who helped to organize the National Prison Association, published one of the most eloquent defenses of the book in the Springfield Republican:
I cannot subscribe to the extreme censure passed upon this volume, which is no coarser than Mark Twain’s books usually are, while it has a vein of deep morality beneath its exterior of falsehood and vice, that will redeem it in the eyes of mature persons. It is not adapted to Sunday-school libraries, and should perhaps be left unread by growing boys; but the mature in mind may read it, without distinction of age or sex, and without material harm. It is in effect an argument against negro-slavery, lynching, whisky-drinking, family feuds, promiscuous shooting, and nearly all the vices of Missouri in the olden time, when Benton represented that state in the Senate; and before the people of western Missouri undertook to colonize Kansas in the interest of slavery, and then to force that institution upon the freemen who went there from the North. As a picture of Missouri life and manners it is simply invaluable, and goes farther to explain the political history of the United States from 1854 to 1860 than any other work I have seen. . . . Huck Finn’s father is the drunken poor white of Missouri, upon whom Atchison and his betters relied to fight slavery into Kansas; and the Grangerfords, Shepherdsons and Col Sherburn are the gentlemen of courage and wealth who sometimes led on and sometimes thwarted the diabolism of the poor whites. . . .
This is a curious reproduction of the manners that prevailed in the time of Benton and Clay, and farther back, in the days of Andrew Jackson, who used to drink his morning draught as described, and then hand the tumbler to one of his suite, who would pour in water and drink the heel-tap, as Huck Finn and Buck Grangerford do in this sketch. . . . There is hardly anything so true to human nature in the whole
[begin page 767]
Good people must make no mistake about the teachings of this book: for although the author declares that “persons attempting to find a moral in it will be banished,” and though the Concord library committee have banished the book itself as immoral, I can see nothing worse in it than in the story of Samson, which contains a great deal of deliberate lying, or the story of Noah, which has a good deal about drinking, rafting and high water.309
Although Clemens did not respond publicly to the criticism of his book at the time, he was clearly disturbed by the charges of immorality that had been leveled against it. On his 1895–96 lecture tour, he did provide an indirect public response in the introduction to one of his reading selections from Huckleberry Finn, “Small-pox & a lie save Jim” (Huck’s struggle with his conscience in chapter 16). In his draft of the passage he laid out his own interpretation of the central conflict in his book, saying that “in a crucial moral emergency a sound heart is a safer guide than an ill-trained conscience”:
I sh’d support this doctrine with a chapter from a book of mine where a sound heart & a deformed conscience come into collision & conscience suffers defeat. Two persons figure in this chapter: Jim, a middle-aged slave, & Huck Finn, a boy of 14, son of the town drunkard. . . .
In those old slave-holding days the whole community was agreed as to one thing—the awful sacredness of slave property. To help steal a horse or a cow was a low crime, but to help a hunted slave, or feed him or shelter him, or hide him, or comfort him, in his troubles, his terrors, his despair, or hesitate to promptly betray him to the slave-catcher when opportunity offered was a much baser crime, & carried with it a stain, a moral smirch which nothing could wipe away. That this sentiment should exist among slave-owners is comprehensible—there were good commercial reasons for it—but that it should exist & did exist among the paupers, the loafers the tag-rag & bobtail of the community, & in a passionate & uncompromising form, is not in our remote day realizable. It seemed natural enough to me then; natural enough that Huck & his father the worthless loafer should feel it & approve it, though it seems now absurd. It shows that that strange thing, the conscience—that unerring monitor—can be trained to approve any wild thing you want it to approve if you begin its education early & stick to it.310
By 1896, when the third American edition was published, most critical opposition to the book had apparently evaporated. Critics began comparing Mark Twain to the “classic” authors, and they regularly used superlatives in descriptions of the book. Punch called it “a bit of the most genuine and incisive humour ever printed,” a “great book,” and a “Homeric book—for Homeric it is in the true sense, as no other English book is, that I know of.”311 The Critic called it a “masterpiece” which the editors (Jeannette
[begin page 768]
It is perhaps rather with the picaroon romances of Spain that “Huckleberry Finn” is to be compared than with the masterpiece of Cervantes; but I do not think it will be a century or take three generations before we Americans generally discover how great a book “Huckleberry Finn” really is, how keen its vision of character, how close its observation of life, how sound its philosophy, and how it records for us once and for all certain phases of Southwestern society which it is very important for us to perceive and to understand. The influence of slavery, the prevalence of feuds, the conditions and the circumstances that make lynching possible—all these things are set before us clearly and without comment. It is for us to draw our own moral, each for himself, as we do when we see Shakespeare acted.313
In the twentieth century, the book’s reputation continued to grow among writers and critics. In 1900 William Archer wrote in the London Morning Leader, in an essay on the subject of moral parables in contemporary literature, about the passage in chapter 31 where Huck struggles with his conscience:
Perhaps you wonder to find Mark Twain among the moralists at all? If so, you have read his previous books to little purpose. They are full of ethical suggestion. . . . Let me merely remind you of that exquisite page—one of how many!—in Huckleberry Finn, where Huck goes through his final wrestle with his conscience as to the crime of helping to steal Jim out of slavery. . . . “I felt good and all washed clean of sin. . . . It was awful thoughts, and awful words, but they was said. And I let them stay said.”314
This is much more and much better than an apologue; it is one of the master-passages in a masterpiece of fiction. Yet if the reader should ever find it crop up as a finger-post at one of the cross-roads of life, I think he may safely follow its guidance.315
Clemens called Archer’s article “compact & virile,” and commented:
A compliment from him is gold, 98 fine.
And compensation is mine at last! The paragraph which he quotes, with approval, from Huck Finn, caused that book to be banished with holy indignation from the public library of Mr Emerson’s town (Concord, Mass.) fifteen years ago.316
In 1902 the book was adapted into a play by Lee Arthur, who was commissioned by the producer Charles B. Dillingham. In early August, Clemens read the script (based on both Tom Sawyer and Huckleberry Finn, but true to neither), which prompted him to suggest to Dillingham switching the names of the boys to show something of their relationship in Tom
[begin page 769]
I believe it will improve the performance for Huck to study his character from my book. He will see that it is sharply differentiated from Tom’s, & gains a good deal, with its unconscious depth & long-headedness & sobriety, as contrasted with Tom’s rattle-brained vivacities. However, it may be that he can’t see the deeps & the dignity of Huck’s character; in which case it will perhaps be better to let him play it his own way. We greatly liked Jim, & wished there was more of him. I hope you will have every success in Hartford.319
The play sentimentalized Huck and gave him a girlfriend, Amy Lawrence. According to one of the actors, Walter C. Kelly, it also included “a chorus of forty white-satined pierrots assisting Huck Finn to sing a march song entitled ‘I want to be a drummer in the band.’ ”320 It had its premier performance on 11 November 1902 in Hartford, where it ran for five days. Although the Hartford and New York newspapers were for the most part complimentary, the New York Dramatic-Mirror called it a “dreadful fiasco.”321 According to Kelly, on opening night, “Slowly the proof of this assault on this classic dawned upon the audience and the final curtain fell to complete silence, and a polite but angry audience made their way into the night.”322 After twenty-five performances in Philadelphia, where it was badly reviewed, it closed in Baltimore.323
The play’s failure had no apparent effect on the book’s reputation. In a 1907 letter to Clemens, George Bernard Shaw recounted a visit to William Morris:
Once, when I was in Morris’s house, a superior anti-Dickens sort of man (sort of man that thinks Dickens no gentleman) was annoyed by Morris disparaging Thackeray.
[begin page 770]
But questions continued to be raised locally about the novel: its irreverence, its appropriateness for children, and its morality, as it came under scrutiny by library boards and religious organizations. In August 1902 it was “excluded” from the “list of books for boys”325 by the Denver Public Library, the first such banning since 1885, according to Clemens. In a letter to the Denver Post he ascribed the banning in part to local supporters of General Frederick Funston, a “hero” of the Spanish American War about whom he had recently written a highly uncomplimentary article.326 After explaining that his wife was seriously ill, Clemens wrote:
I am aware that I am not privileged to speak freely in this matter, funny as the occasion is and dearly as I should like to laugh at it; and when I can’t speak freely I don’t speak at all.
You see, there are two or three pointers:
First—Huck Finn was turned out of a New England library 17 years ago—ostensibly on account of its morals; really to curry favor with a parsonage. There has been no other instance until now.
Second—A few months ago I published an article which threw mud at that pinchbeck hero, Funston, and his extraordinary morals.
Third—Huck’s morals have stood the strain in Denver and in every English, German and French speaking community in the world—save one—for seventeen years until now. . . .
There’s nobody for me to attack in this matter even with soft and gentle ridicule—and I shouldn’t ever think of using a grown-up weapon in this kind of a nursery. Above all, I couldn’t venture to attack the clergymen whom you mention for I have their habits and live in the same glass house which they are occupying. I am always reading immoral books on the sly and then selfishly to prevent other people from having the same wicked good time.
No, if Satan’s morals and Funston’s are preferable to Huck’s, let Huck’s take a back seat; they can stand any ordinary competition, but not a combination like that. And I’m going to defend them anyway.327
[begin page 771]
In 1906 news of yet another “banning” circulated in the press. Although Huckleberry Finn had long been on the shelves of the adult fiction section of the Brooklyn Public Library, in November 1905 the superintendent of the Children’s Department, “a conscientious and enthusiastic young woman,” ordered it removed from the children’s shelves. A Brooklyn branch librarian, Asa Don Dickinson, “begged” his colleagues to reinstate it, but the children’s librarians refused, responding “in effect that Huck was a deceitful boy; that he not only itched but scratched; and that he said sweat when he should have said perspiration.”331 Dickinson wrote Clemens of the deliberations and asked for his help. Clemens responded privately:
Nov. 21/05
Dear Sir
I am greatly troubled by what you say. I wrote Tom Sawyer & Huck Finn for adults exclusively, & it always distresses me when I find that boys & girls have been allowed access to them. The mind that becomes soiled in youth can never again be washed clean; I know this by my own experience, & to this day I cherish an unappeasable bitterness against the unfaithful guardians of my young life, who not only permitted but compelled me to read an unexpurgated Bible through before I was 15 years old. None can do that & ever draw a clean sweet breath again this side of the grave. Ask that young lady—she will tell you so.
Most honestly do I wish I could say a softening word or two in defence of
[begin page 772]
If there is an Unexpurgated in the Children’s Department, won’t you please help that young woman remove Huck & Tom from that questionable companionship?
Sincerely yours
S L. Clemens
I shall not show your letter to any one—it is safe with me.332
Dickinson showed Clemens’s letter to the children’s librarians, but it did not convince them to change their minds—instead they decided to suppress the letter and to exclude The Adventures of Tom Sawyer as well. In March 1906 the Brooklyn Public Library issued “an order withholding Mark Twain’s ‘Huckleberry Finn’ and ‘Tom Sawyer’ from children considered by the library authorities to be under the age of discretion.”333
In the decades after Clemens’s death in 1910, critics began to argue successfully for Huckleberry Finn’s status as literature worthy of being taught and studied in the academy. The book became what Clemens would never have predicted for it—assigned reading in colleges and in secondary schools. Perhaps in part because of this new association of the book with secondary education (which was concurrent with efforts which began in the 1950s to integrate the schools nationwide), the challenges to it increased in the 1950s. In addition to the objections mounted by religious fundamentalists, who disliked the book’s evident skepticism towards religious doctrine (among other things), there were challenges on racial grounds. These were mainly based on objections to the book’s language—in particular, the pervasive use of the word “nigger”—but also on discomfort and impatience with the book’s ironic condemnation of racism, and fear that the portrayal of the racial politics of the pre-Civil War South would affect the present-day treatment of African-American children.334 These challenges continue today: Huckleberry Finn was fifth on the list of most challenged or banned American books in the 1990s.335 In defense of the book, writers and educators have pointed out that instead of encouraging
[begin page 773]
In the last half-century, scores of critical books and articles devoted to Huckleberry Finn have been produced. In the academy, the book has been variously interpreted, argued over, and analyzed. Its place in the “literary canon” has come to seem so unshakeable that one critic, Jonathan Arac, has argued that the book has been “hypercanonized,” preventing accurate assessment and interpretation of it.338
Many American writers have weighed in with an opinion about Huckleberry Finn, most of them acknowledging a debt to Mark Twain, perhaps most famously Ernest Hemingway, who wrote in Green Hills of Africa, “All modern American literature comes from one book by Mark Twain called Huckleberry Finn.”339 The way Huck tells his story—in language that resembles actual speech, without any direct comment from the author, and that incorporates both black and white vernacular idioms—
[begin page 774]
Its flexibility, its musicality, its rhythms, freewheeling diction and metaphors, as projected in Negro American folklore, were absorbed by the creators of our great 19th century literature even when the majority of blacks were still enslaved. Mark Twain celebrated it in the prose of Huckleberry Finn; without the presence of blacks, the book could not have been written. No Huck and Jim, no American novel as we know it.340
In 1996 Toni Morrison wrote:
Although its language—sardonic, photographic, persuasively aural—and the structural use of the river as control and chaos seem to me quite the major feats of Huckleberry Finn, much of the novel’s genius lies in its quiescence, the silences that pervade it and give it a porous quality that is by turns brooding and soothing. It lies in the approaches to and exits from action; the byways and inlets seen out of the corner of the eye; the subdued images in which the repetition of a simple word, such as “lonesome,” tolls like an evening bell; the moments when nothing is said, when scenes and incidents swell the heart unbearably precisely because unarticulated, and force an act of imagination almost against the will. . . . It is classic literature.341
Writers all over the world have also acknowledged a debt. One Russian writer and critic, Dmitry Urnov, still a boy during World War II, recalled in 1986: “When the enemy was advancing on Moscow, my mother and I were evacuated from the city to a safe area in the Ural Mountains. We could take only a few necessities. Among these necessities was a copy of ‘Huckleberry Finn,’ with the original Kemble illustrations. I learned it by heart.”342 Japanese author Kenzaburo Oe said he found his greatest inspiration in Huckleberry Finn and that it was the book that convinced him to become a writer.343
Sales figures for Adventures of Huckleberry Finn are difficult to pin down, but it is safe to put the total in the millions.344 Well over a hundred editions of the book are currently in print in the United States alone. It endures on compact disk, in e-book format, in more than a score of audio tapes, and in nearly a dozen adaptations for film and video.345 In the 1980s
[begin page 775]
When Clemens submitted his text of Adventures of Huckleberry Finn to Charles L. Webster for typesetting and publication he had, during the previous fifteen years, published several books, mainly through two publishers: among them were The Innocents Abroad; Roughing It; The Gilded Age; Sketches, New & Old; The Adventures of Tom Sawyer; and A Tramp Abroad with the American Publishing Company; The Prince and the Pauper and Life on the Mississippi with James R. Osgood and Company. The publication history of these books shows that Mark Twain understood the collaborative nature of the production process and depended upon and welcomed the contributions of his illustrators and publishers. For the most part, he allowed the artists to choose what to illustrate; he allowed them and his publishers to write captions for the illustrations and supply descriptions of the contents of the book for page headings and tables of contents; and he allowed his publishers to choose the paper, typeface, format of the pages, and bindings for his books. But in all cases, in particular those involving illustrations and text, he reserved the right to approve or modify the result. He sought outside readers, especially William Dean Howells, to suggest improvements or corrections to his text, and he expected printer’s proofreaders or publisher’s readers to discover errors and suggest corrections. Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, the first volume published by the new Webster company, followed the same pattern. But Clemens had regularly been frustrated and angry with the difficulty of maintaining control of those aspects of his text which mattered greatly to him, a problem which recurred with every book and every publisher, even his own company. As the text was copied and recopied by typists and typesetters and passed through the hands of the printer’s proofreaders and others, errors were introduced, styling was imposed, and slowly but inexorably the text began to diverge from the author’s copy.
This newly edited text is an unmodernized critical edition designed to recover, as much as possible, Mark Twain’s specific intentions for the text at the time he submitted the printer’s copy to his publisher in 1884. A critical text, according to modern practice, must place before the reader not only the text itself but the evidence and reasoning used by the editor to establish
[begin page 776]
Clemens’s complete holograph manuscript for Adventures of Huckleberry Finn survives and serves as copy-text for this edition. The first portion of the manuscript, MS1, comprises nearly half (49 percent) of the text.
[begin page 777]
Of the major documents or portions of documents now known to have comprised the original transmission from manuscript into print, only the MS (MS1a, MS1b, and MS2) and A survive. Barring only the raft episode from MS1a, which was omitted from A but published in Life on the Mississippi (LoM), there were two major lines of descent—one from MS1 (MS1a and MS1b) and one from MS2—for discrete parts of the text. With the raft episode reinstated, as it is in this edition, there are three lines of descent, thus:
1. MS1a and MS1b (copy-text) → TS1 → TS3 → A
Clemens wrote MS1a during the summer of 1876; he wrote MS1b almost four years later during the spring of 1880. He then put aside the combined MS1a and MS1b for almost three years, returning to it only
[begin page 778]
2. MS1a raft episode (copy-text) → LoM TS → LoM
For essentially practical and commercial reasons, Clemens allowed his publisher to omit the raft episode from A, but because those reasons no longer obtain, and because no other authorial reason for omitting it has so far been documented, it is restored here. Around September 1882, before TS1 was created, Clemens had the raft episode separately typed so that he might include it in chapter 3 of Life on the Mississippi (LoM). The episode, along with the typescript that had been made from the holograph manuscript for LoM, was corrected and revised to some extent by Clemens (LoM TS), and that revised typescript served as printer’s copy for LoM, published in May 1883. When Clemens had Huckleberry Finn typed (TS1), sometime between October 1882 and early May 1883, he probably just inserted printed tear sheets of the raft episode from LoM into the typescript, numbering them as an interpolation and making any new revisions directly onto them. The episode was probably not retyped when TS3 was made. Because the printer’s copy for Huckleberry Finn is lost, the revisions Clemens may have made for it are likewise lost. None of these documents survives except MS1a and LoM; MS1a is copy-text from 107.1 through 123.20. For this section of the book, the primary source of emendation is LoM.
3. MS2 (copy-text) → TS2 → A
Clemens wrote MS2 and had it typed during the summer of 1883. Unlike TS1, this new typescript (TS2) almost certainly comprised both ribbon and carbon copies. It was typed by Harry Clarke, who also typed “1,002. An Oriental Tale,” on a typewriter with capital and lowercase letters. Although MS2 included a long interpolation about the Walter
[begin page 779]
Collation of the MS (MS1a, MS1b, and MS2) with A reveals that Clemens must have revised and corrected his text in great detail on the intervening TS1 or TS2 and (to a lesser extent) on the proofs of A. Therefore all variant readings in A which can be confidently attributed to his revision or correction, rather than to unauthorized departure by typist or typesetter, have been adopted as emendations of the MS: more than 3,600 variants, both in substantives (words and word order) and in accidentals (spelling, punctuation, emphasis, and capitalization), out of about 5,800 variants in all. It is also obvious that because of its transcription history, the book suffered a good deal of unauthorized departure and error—the first part, which was retyped twice, somewhat more than the second. The nature of these unauthorized changes can be inferred in part from analysis of the normal pattern of Clemens’s manuscript revisions. Each half of the holograph manuscript has more than 1,700 authorial revisions, including rewritten and inserted passages: 88 percent of these changes are to substantives, or to some combination of substantives and accidentals; only 12 percent are changes to accidentals alone. In contrast, of the 5,800 variants between the revised manuscript text and the first edition, only about 50 percent (50 percent in the first half, 52 percent in the second) are changes to substantives (or a combination of substantives and accidentals); the other 50 percent or so are changes to accidentals only. This unusually high percentage of accidental variants was more likely the result, not of the author’s hand, but of errors and “corrections” volunteered or imposed by the typist and the typesetter.
The principal difficulty in applying this emendation policy is how to discriminate authorized from unauthorized variation between the MS and A, since the intervening documents—the typescripts on which Clemens made his revisions—are lost. Although this discrimination can sometimes be problematic for variants of a sentence or more, the problem is more troublesome with spelling variants of a single word and with short words supplied or omitted in A—differences so slight that it is sometimes
[begin page 780]
Several kinds of evidence have been called upon to assess the authority of variants in A. Clemens’s revisions and corrections of MS1a, MS1b, and MS2 (fully recorded in Alterations in the Manuscript) provide indispensable evidence for this purpose. By counting and categorizing the changes demonstrably made by the author in his MS, we can identify as authorial many individual variants and classes of variants between the MS and A simply because they repeat or extend a pattern for the same word or kind of word. Likewise, the history of all the documents through which the text evolved (whether or not they still exist) is essential to judge who had the opportunity to create variants in A. So, for example, some variants that might otherwise be classified as authorial (although somewhat puzzling) deletions can instead be confidently assigned to the typist because their nature and timing are more satisfactorily explained by typing error than by authorial revision. The typist’s role in producing variants in A has been strongly illuminated by collating two of Clemens’s contemporary manuscripts against the surviving typescripts made for them. The first is a rejected chapter of the Life on the Mississippi manuscript transcribed in 1882 by Harry Clarke or Jakob Coykendall (who probably also typed the raft episode), on an all-capitals typewriter with the capacity for underlining. This machine was quite similar to the typewriter used between October 1882 and May 1883 to transcribe MS1. The second is Clemens’s manuscript of “1,002. An Oriental Tale,” transcribed in 1883 by Clarke on a capitals-lowercase typewriter, almost certainly the same typewriter used for MS2 of Huckleberry Finn.350 Analysis of both typescripts has helped to establish the kind and relative frequency of errors which the typist is likely to have made in transcribing MS1 and MS2, as well as the extent to which such errors were corrected by the typist or author.
Finally, a working hypothesis about Clemens’s purpose and methods in representing and revising dialect has proved indispensable to the task of distinguishing authorized from unauthorized variants. Although any hypothesis of this kind is necessarily conjectural and tentative, without such a theory the choice between variant accidentals would almost always be resolved by adhering to the copy-text, thereby rejecting the result of the author’s painstaking efforts to fine-tune his dialect.
[begin page 781]
It was, in fact, principally Clemens’s painstaking attention to such “shadings” which produced the very large number of variant accidentals between the MS and A. The grounds for this hypothesis were established in 1979, when David Carkeet—using MS2, the only part of the manuscript then known to exist—first construed the author’s “Explanatory” literally, and proceeded to demonstrate that these seven dialects could be reliably identified and distinguished by objective criteria. Each dialect, he discovered, was consistently used by specific characters and constituted a significant part of Clemens’s characterization of them.351 Carkeet identified the dialects and speakers as follows:
(1) Missouri Negro: Jim and four other black characters (Jack, Lize, Nat, young “wench” at Phelps farm);
(2) Southwestern: Arkansas gossips (Sister Hotchkiss and others);
(3) Ordinary Pike County: Huck, Tom, Aunt Polly, Ben Rogers, the Wilks daughters, Pap, Judith Loftus;
(4) Modified Pike County #1: thieves on the Walter Scott;
[begin page 782]
(6) Modified Pike County #3: Bricksville loafers;
(7) Modified Pike County #4: Aunt Sally and Uncle Silas Phelps.
Carkeet showed that Clemens had in fact distinguished by “shadings” (but had later forgotten about) more than the seven dialects he finally claimed.352
An analysis for this edition of the variant dialectal forms in MS1 and MS2, by speaker and context, amply confirms Carkeet’s conjecture and shows in addition that most of the revision within the MS was aimed at making the speech of each speaker more consistent with the “rules” of his or her dialect, rules which Clemens knew intuitively from having heard real speakers: “the trustworthy guidance and support of personal familiarity with these several forms of speech.” Although Clemens only occasionally specified these rules, as in “Let Jim say putty for ‘pretty’ & nuvver for ‘never,’ ” or “Huck says Nuther,” or his equivalents for Jim’s “and” and “of” (“& en of er of o’ ”),353 analysis of the variant dialectal forms shows that he distinguished among speakers in the following four ways:
Word choice or idiom: for the word “steal” Huck says “smouch”; the king says “hook.”
Word form (often affecting tense or agreement): Huck says “I know”; Jim says “I knows.”
Pronunciation: Huck says “been”; Jim says “ben.”
Eye dialect (nonstandard spelling for standard pronunciation): Huck says “was”; Jim says “wuz.”
[begin page 783]
Because Clemens for the most part supervised both the typing and the typesetting of his text, it is usually the case that changes in wording between the MS and A originated with his revisions on TS1, TS2, or on the proofs of A. Generally speaking, the larger and more substantial the change, the less likely it is that anyone but the author would have the nerve—not to mention the imaginative power—to create it. For instance, the addition of the following thirty-five words in A (chapter 23) is assigned to the author’s revision on TS2 because of length and literary quality:
What was the use to tell Jim these warn’t real kings and dukes? It wouldn’t a done no good; and besides, it was just as I said; you couldn’t tell them from the real kind. (201.4–6)
Omissions of comparable size can likewise be identified as the author’s work. For instance, when A omits MS1a’s “ghost” story (see Three Passages from the Manuscript) it seems evident that nobody but Clemens would have the temerity to delete it, and when A omits MS2’s comparison of publishers with kings (“Of course most any publisher would do that, but you wouldn’t think a king would. If you didn’t know kings”), it seems obvious that Clemens recognized the implausibility of Huck’s saying such a thing and so removed it. Even simple substitutions can often be recognized as authorial, although their purpose may be more difficult to characterize: “Stuff” for “Bosh”; “town” for “village”; “nation” for “mischief”; “lick” for “big-bug” for “swell”; “wallowed” for “rolled”; “bothered” for “flusticated”; “unfavorable to” for “dead agin”; “be in a bad fix” for “lose his life”; “laughed their bones loose” for “laughed themselves hoarse.” No one but the author is likely to have made such verbal changes, many of them directed at the most appropriate word choice or idiom for the speaker, and they are accordingly adopted from A as emendations of the MS.
On the other hand, when variant substantives between the MS and A create problematic readings in A, and when there is more reason than usual to suspect transcription error by the typist or the typesetter, the A reading may be rejected in favor of the MS. Among the errors here attributed
[begin page 784]
That law trial was a slow business; appeared like they warn’t ever going to get started on it; so every now and then I’d borrow two or three dollars off of the judge for him, to keep from getting a cowhiding.
But collation shows that MS1a, the manuscript for this passage, reads:
That law trial was a slow business; appeared as if they warn’t ever going to get started on it; so every now and then, all winter, the old man would lay for me and catch me, and then I’d borrow two or three dollars off of the judge for him, to keep from getting a raw-hiding.
No one but Clemens is likely to have changed “raw-hiding” to “cowhiding,” or to have altered Huck’s original but too literate “as if” to “like,” but the largest change here does not appear to be authorial. It was evidently made by the typist, or possibly the typesetter, who inadvertently dropped the clause that explained the occasion for Huck’s borrowing money from Judge Thatcher (“all winter, the old man would lay for me and catch me, and then”), probably because he skipped from the first “and then” to the second. The necessary phrase is restored in the present edition. Similarly, in chapter 13, where Huck rows a skiff toward shore in a desperate attempt to find help for the thieves he and Jim have just abandoned on the Walter Scott, A reads as follows:
I closed in above the shore-light, and laid on my oars and floated. As I went by, I see it was a lantern hanging on the jackstaff of a double-hull ferry-boat. I skimmed around for the watchman, a-wondering whereabouts he slept; and by-and-by I found him roosting on the bitts, forward, with his head down between his knees. I give his shoulder two or three little shoves, and begun to cry.
Collation shows that between the second and third sentences of this passage, MS2 had the following:
Everything was dead still, nobody stirring. I floated in under the stern, made fast, and clumb aboard.
Since the likelihood is strong that the typist inadvertently omitted one or both of these sentences (the danger of an eye skip from the “I” of “I floated” to the “I” of “I skimmed” was increased by their positions at the end and beginning of lines in the manuscript), the omission from MS2 is judged an error, not a deliberate revision, and the A reading rejected. This decision resolves the minor puzzle that had been created by the change in A. It is now clear exactly where Huck was when he “skimmed around” in search of the watchman: he was on the deck of the ferryboat, not in his skiff, as A seemed momentarily to imply.
It is useful to distinguish, in addition, two groups of variant substantives (Similar substitutes and Small words, below) which are more difficult than usual to assign confidently to the author or to his typists and typesetters.
[begin page 785]
To add to the complication, the collation of manuscript and typescript for LoM and for “1,002. An Arabian Tale” shows that Clemens was most apt to overlook unauthorized variation of this kind when the new reading approximated the original, or was at least plausible. In one unpublished chapter of LoM, the typist mistranscribed “human spirit” for the manuscript’s “humane spirit”; “tables” for “table”; “whiskey” for “whisky”; “fell” for “feel”; “favorable” for “favourable”; “unpracticed” for “unpractised”; and “customs” for “custom”; none corrected by the typist (or by Clemens, although unlike the “1,002” typescript the LoM TS has no authorial marks). In the “1,002” typescript, he failed to restore his manuscript reading when the typist substituted “proposed” for “purposed” (twice); “not” for “naught”; “continued” for “continuing”; and “mine” for “my.” And even when he did correct such errors on the typescript, he corrected for sense without consulting the original manuscript: thus, when the typist replaced “exuded” with “extended,” Clemens changed the typescript to “discharged.” Such variants between the MS and A must, therefore, be assessed individually on the particular merits of the evidence, but they are naturally more suspect than substitutions like A’s “howl” for the MS’s “yelp.”
Small words. These are variants in A which add or omit small words
[begin page 786]
Nevertheless, similar variants between the MS and A are not necessarily authorial. Clemens’s typists were prone to omitting or changing such words, as the collations of the typescripts for LoM and for “1,002” show. In the small selection of surviving LoM TS pages (which show no authorial corrections), the typist omitted “and,” “the,” “her,” and “is” (and also substituted “the” for “a,” “this” for “the”). In the “1,002” typescript, which shows both unauthorized additions and deletions by the typist, either the typist or the author corrected three-fourths of these errors, but both typist and author overlooked omitted “again,” “be,” “first,” “that,” and “the,” as well as adding “the” in “the Tabernacles” and “to” in “vouchsafed to.” Some of these typing errors probably led to authorial corrections which did not, however, restore the original reading. When Clarke omitted “his,” Clemens supplied “the”; when Clarke typed “a blaze of” for manuscript “ablaze with,” and “a sound of” for “the sound of,” Clemens corrected to “aflame with” and “a sound as of,” respectively. Without access to the Huckleberry Finn typescripts, of course, revisions prompted by typing errors cannot be readily identified, but such variants in A have been assigned to the author when one or more of the following holds true:
(1) The A variant is identical with or very like demonstrable revisions in the MS. When A adds “of” to “outside of the house” or “to” to “helped a nigger to get his freedom,” the A variants have been judged authorial because each is similar to revisions in the MS, such as the “of” added to “come off of the steamboat.”
(2) The A variant is repeated, either in the same sentence or in the text as a whole. When A twice omits “of” from the MS “banging of tin pans and blowing of horns,” the change seems more likely to be deliberate authorial revision than a double oversight by the typist, who might be expected to drop one but not two such words in an eight-word phrase. Similarly, variants in A which either add or delete “that” occur so frequently throughout the text that they are treated as a class of authorial revision and all adopted.
[begin page 787]
(3) The A variant is not only repeated, but belongs to an unmistakable pattern of purposeful change within the speech of one or more characters. The direction of this change may even be diametrically opposed to the direction of change evident in the MS. For instance, in the MS Clemens often revised away from conventional usage by adding the article “a”: the first “a” in Huck’s “a half a mile wide” and “a” in Huck’s “kind of a harrow,” Tom’s “what kind of a show,” and Aunt Sally’s “not a one of us.” Variants in the portion of A based on MS1a continue this trend, although the portion based on MS1b has an equal number of variants tending toward the conventional as toward the unconventional. The latter part of A, based on MS2, more often shows the reverse trend, dropping the MS “a” from “half a second,” “kind of a cold,” and “a half an hour,” or dropping it while also adding a new element: MS2 “puzzled kind of a way” becomes “puzzled-up kind of way” in A; MS2 “kind of a general” becomes “kind of generl” in A. These last two phrases contain manifestly authorial fine-tuning in the variant “puzzled-up” for “puzzled” and the nonstandard pronunciation “generl” for “general,” and together they suggest that the coincident omission of the indefinite article is part of that revision. In spite of the great susceptibility of “a” to inadvertent omission by typist and typesetter, this pattern suggests authorial omission of “a” in all cases where the MS differs from A.
The authority of variant accidentals is discussed in the following sections: Dialect spelling, Emphasis variants, Punctuation and other accidentals, and End-line dashes. Identification of authorial corrections and revisions in spelling, emphasis, and punctuation is dependent on the recognition of purposeful change.
Dialect spelling. The dialect of each character has a number of distinctive features that are meant to be recognizably consistent, or nearly so. Change between the MS and A toward greater consistency of dialect is therefore one of the grounds for emendation, on the assumption that achieving consistency was the author’s purpose. Such change has often the effect of making the pronunciation or the eye dialect (spelling not affecting pronunciation) for any character or characters more consistent
[begin page 788]
We assume, along with Carkeet, the character-specific nature of the dialects, even though some dialects are spoken by two or more characters. We also assume that any “rule” must have the purpose of making the final representation in A as consistent as possible with respect to some recognizable aspect of pronunciation or spelling, even if in applying that rule the author has not perfectly achieved the intended result. This requirement does not preclude the possibility that rules may specify different pronunciations in different circumstances, or even that a character may use several different forms of a word interchangeably, apparently regardless of circumstances. Implicit rules may be quite simply deduced and successfully demonstrated, as in “the king says ‘jest’ for ‘just,’ ” but they may also be rather complicated and harder to apply consistently, as in “Jim tends to drop the final t of a contraction when the next word begins with a consonant (as in ‘ain’ dat’ or ‘ain’ no’), but to retain the t when the next word begins with a vowel or is emphatic (as in ‘ain’t any’ or ‘ain’t dat’).”355
The supposition that Clemens revised his dialect for greater consistency with respect to such rules is grounded in the changes he introduced within the MS itself. For example, the king does say “jest” for “just” in thirteen out of the fourteen times he uses the word in the MS. In ten of these cases Clemens wrote “jest”; in one he wrote “ju,” immediately correcting it to “jest”; in two he wrote “just” but later altered the manuscript to “jest.” When, therefore, the king’s unique MS form, “just,” appears in A as “jest,” it is reasonable to suppose that the author corrected the errant form on his typescript or proofs of A. It is extremely unlikely that the form was changed by the typist or typesetter to achieve uniformity in spelling, even though uniformity was usually part of the typesetter’s responsibilities.356 In these cases no ordinary rule of uniformity could possibly have been applied by the typesetter, since, for example, Aunt Sally—in contrast with the king—says “jest” in six out of eleven instances in the MS, but uniformly says “just” in A. Only the author would undertake to make different characters use alternative forms of the same word, each more consistently
[begin page 789]
For the king’s speech, in fact, most variant forms in A continue a trend toward what may be described as “more nonstandard forms used more consistently,” which begins within the MS itself. A has “agin” for MS “again”; “kin” or “k’n” for “can”; “yit” for “yet.” So when the king says “git” for “get” six times in the MS (including two times corrected from “get”), but A renders five of these as “git” and one as “get,” it is more reasonable to suspect a typist’s or compositor’s error or sophistication than the author’s deliberate retreat from consistency already achieved, and the MS reading is therefore retained.
On the other hand, A variants leading to greater consistency of a standard form in the king’s speech are also adopted as emendations. The king says “if” fifteen times and “ef” four times out of the nineteen times he uses the word in the MS. In A, however, each of the four instances of “ef” is changed to “if.” These four variants in A are attributed to the author because they generate greater consistency in the king’s use of a word that has a nonstandard spelling or pronunciation in dialects of other characters. Again there is virtually no likelihood that this greater consistency was imposed by anyone but the author, especially because no one else would undertake to make the king say “if” more consistently, while, for example, simultaneously making Jim say “ef” (or “ ’f”) more consistently. The movement toward greater consistency even of a standard usage in the dialect of a given character is a reliable sign of authorial revision, despite a more sweeping general trend toward nonstandard usage.
Clemens’s revision of the accidentals can sometimes be detected even when it does not aim at making a character use the same form of a word in every instance.357 The rule governing Jim’s retention of terminal t in contractions has already been mentioned. In the MS Jim also uses three past-tense forms of the verb “to be”: ““ ’uz,” “wuz,” and “was” (and its contracted form, “ ’s”). In MS1 Jim says only “was” (ninety-nine times), but in MS2, where Clemens introduced the other two dialect forms, he carefully distinguished between eye-dialect “wuz” and the less emphatic but differently pronounced “ ’uz”; and he tended to revise so that Jim says either “ ’uz” (five times) or “wuz” (seven times) nearly as often as he says “was” (fourteen times). In MS2 he changed four instances of “was” to “wuz,” two instances of “was” to “ ’uz,” and one instance of “wuz” to “ ’uz.” When
[begin page 790]
One rather weak but useful generalization that emerges from this and several similar cases is that when variants in A move toward nonstandard forms, they are less likely to have been caused by the typist or compositor than if they moved toward standard forms. But even where the rules, so far as we understand them, do not seem to specify which of several forms is preferred in a given situation, authority can be recognized. When he was about halfway through composition, Clemens wrote a note to himself about two dialect equivalents for “of” in Jim’s speech—“er” and “o’ ”—either as a direction to make revisions in MS1 or as a reminder of the revisions he had recently made: twenty-six changes to “er” and five to “o’,” leaving twenty “of” and seven “ ’n” (as in “out’n”).359 In MS2, in addition to “o’,” “of,” “er,” and “ ’n,” Clemens introduced another form: Jim also says “un.” Although these five different forms are sometimes associated with specific contexts, to all appearances they are used interchangeably. Jim says “outer me” and “out’n de rain”; “sight o’ trouble,” “pack er k’yards,” and “coat o’ arms”; “all of a sudden” and “half un it”; “kiner smilin’ ” and “kine er time.” The MS contains some revision of these various usages (“coat o’ arms” was originally “coat er arms”), but no conclusive pattern. Nevertheless, when Jim says “of” in the MS but “uv” in A seven times, the change to eye dialect is recognizably authorial even though this form never occurs in Jim’s speech in the MS. The A variant “uv” is recognizably authorial because (a) it moves toward nonstandard usage; (b) it is consistent with Jim’s undifferentiated use of five or six distinct forms for the same word; and (c) it is consistent with demonstrable revisions in other words of Jim’s speech toward eye dialect.
Emphasis variants. Clemens carefully marked his MS for emphasis, using single underlines for italics, double underlines for small capitals (or capitals and small capitals), and triple underlines or block capitals for full capitals: “And they call that govment!”; “You talk like an Englishman—don’t you? It’s the worst imitation I ever heard. You Peter Wilks’s brother”; “h-wack!”; “The Balcony Scene”; “you mustn’t bellow out ROMEO! that way.” Of such emphasis markings, italics were the most consistently transmitted to A.
The overall reliability of transmission of italics makes clear that (a) for the most part the typescripts must have transmitted underlines, and (b)
[begin page 791]
One exception to this rule governs contractions, where Clemens most often emphasized only the first part, as in: “that’ll,” “I’m,” and “they’d.” Although one such form from MS1a and four from MS2 appear in A unaltered, for the most part such contractions appeared in A styled to full italics: “that’ll,” “I’m,” and “they’d.” Because Clemens may have intended some dialectal effect, however subtle, and because such forms are so easily mistranscribed by the typist and typesetter or styled by the printer’s proofreader, the MS is presumed to be a better guide to his preference than A. The copy-text form has therefore been respected wherever such variants appear.
No small capitals or full capitals survived in the portion of the text transmitted from MS1 through TS1 and TS3. A combination of circumstances probably accounted for it. In all likelihood, the TS1 typist was thwarted by the limitations of the all-capitals typewriter. He or she may have adopted a system of marking similar to the very imperfect one used by the LoM typist, who marked italic words and single capital letters with an underline but had no mechanical way to show small capitals or full capitals
[begin page 792]
Punctuation and other accidentals. The punctuation of the copy-text has in general been retained, except where variants in A or LoM are manifestly or probably authorial. Several categories of variants of punctuation and other accidentals in A have been identified and adopted on the assumption that they result from Clemens’s revisions on his typescript. They include variants associated with substantive reworking of sentences, a small number of variants linked to or dependent upon emphasis revisions, and changes from two sentences to one and vice versa, all analogous to demonstrably authorial revision in the manuscript. For instance, in chapter 1, where Huck is describing the difference between the Widow Douglas’s and Pap’s cooking methods, the MS reads “In a barrel of odds and ends it is different. Things get mixed up, and the juice kind of swaps around and the things go better.” In A, these two sentences are made one by the substitution of a semicolon after “different,” and lowercase “things” for “Things.” This change is typical of a class of about forty variants between the MS and A. Often such variants are linked to other, clearly authorial, substantive revision. But even simple variants such as this one are analogous to alterations Clemens made in his MS (see, for instance, the alteration at 354.4). Similarly adopted from A are the addition or deletion of line spaces (often linked to changes in chapter division) and new paragraphing. Except where a probable misreading of the manuscript or inadvertent
[begin page 793]
End-line dashes. Clemens’s manuscript contains numerous instances of short dashes following periods at the ends of lines. These dashes are a holdover from his days setting type in columns for newspapers, where a convention existed of filling a short line with a dash to avoid confusing the end of a line with the end of a paragraph. When such dashes in his manuscripts were transcribed, they appeared in the middles of lines, punctuating his text in a way he did not intend. Some survived the process of transcription, editing, and typesetting in The Innocents Abroad (1869), Roughing It (1872), The Adventures of Tom Sawyer (1876), The Prince and the Pauper (1881), and Life on the Mississippi (1883).361 In Huckleberry Finn, out of eighty-three uncanceled end-line dashes inscribed in the 1876 and 1880 manuscripts, MS1a and MS1b, two survive in A and three in LoM, but most were deleted before publication, quite possibly by Clemens on the typescript. In fact, it may have been his experience with TS1 that led him to carefully search for and cancel all ten of his end-line dashes in his 1883 manuscript, MS2, before it in turn was transcribed.362 All instances are routinely emended out in this edition.
A is the sole authority for substantives as well as accidentals in the matter added during production—the table of contents, list of illustrations, and captions, which are emended to agree with the text when quotation marks indicate an intention to quote. For the portions of text excerpted in the Century Magazine, which were set from proofs of A and specially revised by the author, the Century has collateral authority.363 While most variant substantives in the Century were imposed either by the magazine’s editors or the author specifically for the purpose of publishing extracts, a few revisions are adopted as corrections, or on the grounds that they were made by
[begin page 794]
A full description of the relevant texts, a discussion of problematic readings in the copy-text and in the edited text, a list of every departure from the copy-text in this edition and of variants in the authorized editions, a comprehensive record of the author’s manuscript revisions, and a guide to compound words hyphenated at the ends of lines in this edition can be found in the following sections of the Textual Apparatus—Description of Texts, Textual Notes, Emendations and Historical Collation, and Alterations in the Manuscript—each of which is described in brief on the page immediately following this introduction and more fully in the headnote to each section.
December 2002 V.F. and L.S.
[begin page 795]
The Textual Apparatus consists of the following sections:
Description of Texts describes Mark Twain’s manuscript and identifies which lifetime editions bear his authority, specifying the copies collated or examined.
Textual Notes discuss problematic readings in the edited text and describe authorial revision not fully explained in Alterations in the Manuscript.
Emendations and Historical Collation records every departure from the copy-text, giving the source of the adopted reading. Because the manuscript is copy-text, the record of emendations is principally of Mark Twain’s revisions on now-missing typescripts or proofs. Emendations entries are signaled by a square bullet in the left margin. The list likewise records in sequence variant substantive and accidental readings among the authorized texts used as copy-text or as sources of emendation. The spelling of any compound word hyphenated ambiguously at the end of a line in the copy-text is reported here.
Alterations in the Manuscript records every authorial revision made on the manuscript.
[begin page 796]
[begin page 797]
Each of the documents described below contains an authoritative form of the text of Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. Derivative printings of the complete text and of extracts are separately listed following these descriptions. Collations performed and the specific copies used are given last.
Mark Twain used three distinctively colored inks in his MS—black in MS1a, purple in MS1b, and blue in MS2—in addition to pencil, which he used for revision only. The papers and inks are listed in the table below and described in detail following the table. (The word cues given in the table are from the edited text and may not agree with the manuscript readings; see Emendations and Historical Collation.)
| Paper | Ink | ||
| xxix.1–8 (MS2: title page) | ADVENTURES . . . TWAIN | OBM1 | blue |
|
|
|||
| xxxi title–5 (MS1b: notice page) | NOTICE . . . Ordnance. | WW | blue |
| 1.1–80.29 (MS1a: 1–280) | You . . . come. | CLM | black |
| 80.30–81.32 (MS2: 81-A-1-81-5) | Well . . . just | OBM1 | blue |
| 81.32–82.9 (MS2: 81-6-81-7) | then . . . kept | OBM2 | blue |
| 82.9–98.7 (MS2: 81-8-81-60) | pointing . . . quit. | OBM1 | blue |
| 99.1-146.11 (MS1a: 280-446) | We . . . it.” | CLM | black |
| 146.12–188.16 (MS1b: 447–663). | “Well . . . with. | WW | purple |
| 189.1–362.11 (MS2: 160–787) | They . . . Finn. | OBM1 | blue |
papers and inks in the manuscript
CLM Crystal-Lake Mills is white, unwatermarked, wove stationery, ruled horizontally in blue and torn into half-sheets measuring 20.3 by 12.5 centimeters, or 8 by 4 15/16 inches. It is embossed in the upper left corner with a picture of a building and the words “Crystal-Lake Mills.” Mark Twain used the same kind of paper for the Prince and the Pauper manuscript and for page 1-2 of the Huckleberry Finn working notes.WW White wove is white, unwatermarked, wove stationery torn into half-sheets measuring 17.8 by 11.5 centimeters, or 7 by 4½ inches. Mark Twain used the same kind of paper for the Prince and the Pauper manuscript and for pages 2-2 through 2-10 of the Huckleberry Finn working notes.
OBM1 The first variety of Old Berkshire Mills is white, unlined, wove notepaper watermarked “Old Berkshire Mills” and torn into half-sheets. The collector James F. Gluck (sometimes Glück), had about two-thirds of the leaves bound into two volumes for display at the Buffalo Library, which required trimming the leaves. The trimmed leaves, all of which have since been disbound, measure 20.9 by 13.4 centimeters, or 87/32 by 5¼ inches (MS2, title page, 81-A-1 through 81-5, 81-8 through 81-60, and 160-263) and 21 by 13.5 centimeters or 8¼ by 5 5/16 inches (MS2, 264–423 and 635–787). The untrimmed leaves, which were never bound, measure 21.3 by 13.6 centimeters, or 8⅜ by 5 11/32 inches (MS2, 424–634). Mark Twain used the same kind of paper for all of Group 3 of the Huckleberry Finn working notes.
OBM2 The second variety of Old Berkshire Mills is white, unlined, laid notepaper watermarked “Old Berkshire Mills,” and
[begin page 799]
black ink • Mark Twain used black ink for MS1a, the portion of MS1 on CLM stationery, which he wrote and first revised in 1876.
purple ink • Mark Twain used purple ink for MS1b, the portion of MS1 on WW stationery, which he wrote and first revised in 1880. He also revisited the black-ink portion of the manuscript, making changes on MS1a page 443 in purple ink.
blue ink • Mark Twain used blue ink for MS2, which he wrote and first revised in 1883, on OBM1 and OBM2 stationery. He also used blue ink to write the “Notice” page, in June 1880 or after, and, in a very few cases, to mark or annotate MS1a and MS1b, written in black and purple inks.
pencil • Mark Twain used pencil intermittently for revision throughout MS1 and MS2. Revisions in pencil are identified by their medium in Alterations in the Manuscript and in Marginal Working Notes.
| LoM pages | ||
| 109.7–111.16 | copper . . . ye!” | 45–47 |
| 116.7–119.2 | anything . . . that.” | 54–56 |
| 122.4–123.20 | told . . . again. | 60.1–61.15 |
[begin page 800]
The pages of Pfs1 correspond to the following passages in this edition and in A.
| A pages | ||
| 127.25–158.29 | got . . . These | 128–59 |
| 158.29–159.13 | sparks . . . they | 160 |
| 160.34–161.28 | “Old . . . brought | 162 |
| 162.12–163.27 | acknowledge . . . Antonette.” | 164 |
| 164.11–165.17 | the palace . . . way. | 166 |
| 166.27–167.31 | no . . . lantern; and | 168 |
| 168.31–169.22 | them . . . Juliet. | 170 |
| 170.32–172.1 | hot . . . Then the | 172 |
| 172.37–174.8 | in . . . fetched | 174 |
| 174.31–176.14 | Then . . . it. | 176 |
| 180.4–40 | The . . . Appointments! | 180 |
| 181.39–183.2 | and Hank . . . nigger-head.” | 182 |
| 183.39–184.33 | The . . . yells— | 184 |
| 185.16–186.28 | throwed . . . off. | 186 |
| 187.13–188.16 | crowd . . . with. | 188 |
| 189.28–190.34 | double-barrel . . . Harkness Pfs1 page ends with “Hark-” |
190 |
| 191.17–192.33 | how . . . anybody | 192 |
| 193.15–194.29 | pretty . . . said: | 194 |
| 196 title–27 | Chapter . . . him | 196 |
[begin page 801]
| A pages | ||
| 16.26–33.5 | waltz . . . sort | 33–48 |
| 33.5–34.36 | of . . . maybe. | 49–50 |
| 48.22–54.29 | green . . . lighting. | 65–70 |
| 58.29–65.5 | So . . . snakes | 75–80 |
| 321.27–323.29 | “I . . . mighty | 325–26 |
| 325.23–332.39 | “Why . . . anyway.” | 329–36 |
| 335 title–340.31 | Chapter . . . sweeps!” | 339–44 |
| A pages | ||
| 1 title–4.11 | The Adventures . . . think | 17–19 |
| 7.33–8.35 | and after . . . ashore. | 24 |
| 14.35–16.26 | and pow-wow . . . got to | 31–32 |
| 18 title–27 | Chapter . . . me. | 34 |
| 19.34–21.3 | He . . . him I | 36 |
| 25.20–27.18 | He . . . sun-up. | 42–43 |
| 51.1–19 | He . . . killed.” | 67 |
| 55.24–56.7 | But . . . dat | 72 |
| 60.33–61.12 | here . . . gashly.” | 77 |
| 63 title–28 | Chapter . . . Jim.” | 79 |
| 65.5–30 | clear . . . fool. | 81 |
| 70.31–71.16 | little . . . Mary.” | 87 |
| 82.1–85.4 | By . . . fix. | 98–100 |
| 86 title–29 | Chapter . . . set | 102 |
| 93.28–94.17 | your majesty . . . the | 110 |
|
|
||
| 126.11–127.25 | “I will, sir . . . ain’t | 126–27 |
| 137.32–139.36 | right . . . great. | 138–40 |
| 143.30–144.13 | had . . . woods!” | 145 |
| 148.2–149.9 | stretched . . . in | 149 |
| 152.4–153.3 | front . . . front | 153 |
| 160.34–164.11 | “Old . . . come to | 162–65 |
| 170.32–174.30 | hot . . . it. | 172–75 |
| 186.29–187.13 | They . . . big | 187 |
| 190.34–191.17 | Harkness . . . telling Pr page begins with “ness” |
191 |
| 211 title–213.2 | Chapter . . . its | 211–12 |
| 232.2–233.20 | and . . . I’ve | 232–33 |
| 236.37–237.17 | “Is . . . would | 237 |
| 239.32–240.33 | uncles at . . . answer | 241 |
| 244.31–246.5 | “Sakes . . . dark? | 246 |
| 256.2–257.11 | Well . . . stunned, | 257 |
| 261 title–26 | Chapter . . . now, and | 261 |
| 262.32–263.11 | “Shucks . . . now | 263 |
| 272.30–273.14 | for . . . nigger.” | 274 |
| 282.16–29 | what . . . me. | 283 |
| 285.31–287.3 | “No . . . says: | 287 |
| 289.1–290.18 | nothing . . . before, | 290–91 |
| 291 title–25 | Chapter . . . up | 293 |
| 299.30–300.13 | I . . . ladder.” | 302 |
| 301.31–303.30 | “Prisoners . . . settled | 304–5 |
| 310.34–312.4 | him, and . . . something Pr page ends with “some-” |
314 |
| 314.30–315.28 | “Ther’s . . . a-raging | 318 |
| 318.34–319.35 | washpans . . . on Pr page begins with “pans” |
322 |
| 321 title–26 | Chapter . . . hain’t.” | 324 |
| 327.15–328.16 | “Well . . . most | 331 |
| 329 title–28 | Chapter . . . they’d | 333 |
| 330.32–332.5 | them . . . it | 335 |
| 336.31–337.13 | was always . . . pretty | 341 |
| 338.25–341.16 | So . . . islands, | 343–45 |
| 343 title–26 | Chapter . . . three?” | 347 |
| 345.36–347.5 | cretur . . . s’e; think | 350 |
| 351 title–25 | Chapter . . . says: | 355 |
| 352.33–354.2 | help . . . before he | 357 |
| 357.2–358.39 | “I mean . . . here.” | 361–62 |
| 360 title–362.10 | Chapter . . . before. | 364–66 |
[begin page 803]
[begin page 804]
“An Adventure of Huckleberry Finn: With an Account of the Famous Grangerford-Shepherdson Feud,” Century 29 (December 1884): 268–78.
| 156.5–157.31 | Here . . . air. |
| 130.3–155.5 | we . . . raft. “We . . . raft.” in Cent |
“Jim’s Investments, and King Sollermun,” Century 29 (January 1885): 456–58.
| 55.6–57.15 | Jim . . . no mo’.” “Jim . . . nigger.’” in Cent |
| 93.26–96.9 | I . . . him!” |
“Royalty on the Mississippi: As Chronicled by Huckleberry Finn,” Century 29 (February 1885): 544–67.
| 157.34–184.4 | Soon . . . fights. |
| 194.20–249.6 | Well . . . up. “Well . . . up!” in Cent |
The following complete editions were found to derive from A without authority.
E First issue of the first English edition. The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. London: Chatto and Windus, 1884 (BAL 3414). Second impression, 1885; third and later impressions, 1897–1910. This illustrated edition was typeset from a set of proof sheets of A.
Eb Second issue of the first English edition. The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. London: Chatto and Windus, 1884 and later. This inexpensive volume was printed from plates made by overrunning the type originally set for E on a shorter measure, after the removal of the illustrations and extra leading between lines. Apparently the first two impressions,
[begin page 805]
Tau Continental edition. The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. Leipzig: Bernhard Tauchnitz, 1885. Collection of British and American Authors, volumes 2307 and 2308. This unillustrated edition was set from E. See Mark Twain’s Revisions for Public Reading, 1895–1896 for facsimiles of pages from Tau marked by Clemens for his 1895–96 reading tour.
A2 Second American edition. Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. New York: Charles L. Webster and Company, 1891–94. This edition was set from A.
A3 Third American edition. The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. New York: Harper and Brothers, 1896 and later. This edition was set from A2.
A4 Fourth American edition. The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. Hartford: American Publishing Company, 1899, 1901, 1903; New York: Harper and Brothers, 1903 and later; New York: P. F. Collier and Son, 1921 and later; Gabriel Wells, 1922 and later. This edition was set from A3.3
[begin page 806]
E2 Second English edition. The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, London: Chatto and Windus, 1909. This edition was set from E.
The following excerpts were found to derive without authority from A and Cent.
The first part of the January 1885 Century Magazine installment (55.6–57.15), evidently syndicated by the Century, was reprinted in at least four newspapers:
“Jim’s Investment: A Colored Citizen Demonstrates Why Signs of Good Luck Are Useless,” Louisville (Ky.) Courier-Journal, 4 January 1885, 4.
“Jim’s Investments,” Boston Budget 12 (4 January 1885): 6.
“Jim’s Investment,” Cleveland Leader, 11 January 1885, 11.
“Jim’s Investments,” New Orleans Picayune, 11 January 1885, 15.
The “Notice” (p. xxxi) and chapter 21 (177.1–188.16), syndicated by Allen Thorndike Rice, were reprinted in at least three newspapers:
[begin page 807]
“Two Tramps: The King and the Duke Afloat and Ashore,” Boston Herald, 11 January 1885, 13.
“Shakespeare and Murder in Mississippi: A Sketch from Twain’s Unpublished Book, ‘Adventures of Huckleberry Finn’—A Wandering Show—A Tragedy of the Street,” New York Tribune, 11 January 1885, 9.
The episode about Jim and his deaf daughter (201.21–202.10, “What . . . so!”) was reprinted in at least two newspapers:
“Didn’t Shut the Door: Nigger Jim’s Story to Huck Finn; the Kid Didn’t Obey the Parental Command Because She Was Deaf and Dumb,” Chicago Herald, 20 February 1885, 3.
“Nigger Jim and His Kid,” Cleveland Herald, 22 February 1885, 12.
The feud episode (142.1–154.33, “Col. Grangerford . . . Mississippi”) was reprinted, with Clemens’s permission, in an anthology:
“The Feud,” in Edmund Clarence Stedman and Ellen Mackay Hutchinson, eds., A Library of American Literature, 11 vols. (New York: Charles L. Webster and Company, 1891), 9:299–307.
Four types of collation were employed in the preparation of this edition. Sight collation was used to compare two or more texts either not in type or printed from different typesettings. Machine collation with the Hinman collator was used to compare two copies printed from the same typesetting or from plates cast from the same typesetting. Light-box collation was used to compare the same sorts of copies by superimposing high-quality photocopies of the original texts. Electronic collation was used to compare electronic transcriptions of different authorized texts.
This revised edition is based on the complete manuscript (MS1 and MS2), the first half of which was unknown to exist during preparation of the 1985 and 1988 editions. In order to make use of electronic collating and editing tools, new electronic transcriptions of both the manuscript and the text as published in the first American editions of Adventures of Huckleberry Finn and Life on the Mississippi were prepared for this edition. These transcriptions were sight collated in both single-person readings and two-person readings against the original documents. The corrected transcriptions, in WordPerfect 8, were then electronically compared (using DocuComp software, version 1.2) to supply a full record of variants. During the editing process, these variants were checked against the documents several times. In addition, in order to provide a complete and accurate record of the author’s usage and revision, the perfected electronic texts of the manuscript and the first American edition
[begin page 808]
Printer’s copy for this edition was a marked photocopy of the 1988 edition. The printer’s copy was exhaustively checked against the complete manuscript: the original MS1 and MS2 at the Buffalo and Erie County Public Library; the photocopy of MS1 prepared at Buffalo; and the published facsimile of MS2 [SLC 1983]). ]). During production the manuscript (photocopy and facsimile) was once again sight collated against the proofs for this edition.
All new collations were checked against records of collations performed at the Iowa Textual Center and against records of the collations undertaken at the Mark Twain Project for the 1985 and 1988 editions of Adventures of Huckleberry Finn.
sight collations
MS1 (NBuBE, PH) vs. MS1 transcription, three collations
MS2 (NBuBE, PH) vs. MS2 transcription, three collations
MS2 (NBuBE, PH) vs. A (Hill [facsimile edition, SLC 1962]), four collations
Cent (CU-MARK copy 1) vs. A (Hill)
Cent (CU) vs. A (Hill)
A (CU-MARK Nowell) vs. A2 (Koundakjian “O. A. Webster”)
A (CU-MARK Nowell) vs. A3 (Koundakjian “Gabriel”)
A (CU-MARK Nowell) vs. A4a (CtY-BR “Royal Edition,” PH)
A (CU-MARK Nowell) vs. A4b (CU-MARK “Edition De Luxe”)
A (CU-MARK Nowell) vs. E (CU-MARK Barrett)
A (CU-MARK Blake) vs. E (CU-MARK Appert) [partial collation, chapters 1–8]
A (NBuBE) vs. Can (NBuBE) [spot collation]
E (CU-MARK Barrett) vs. E (TxU AC-L/W357/C591a) [partial collation, chapters 1, 8, 22]
E (CU-MARK Barrett) vs. Eb (CU-MARK) [partial collation, chapters 1, 8, 22, 23, 32, 43]
E (CU-MARK Barrett) vs. E2 (Koundakjian) [partial collation, chapters 1, 8, 22, 23, 32, 43]
E (CU-MARK Barrett) vs. Tau (NN, PH) [partial collation, chapters 1, 8, 22, 23, 32, 43]
Cent (CU) vs. Louisville Courier-Journal (MoU, PH)
Cent (CU) vs. Boston Budget (ICRL, PH)
Cent (CU) vs. Cleveland Leader (OHi, PH)
Cent (CU) vs. New Orleans Picayune (CU-MARK, PH)
[begin page 809]
A (CU-MARK Nowell) vs. New York Tribune (CU, PH)
A (CU-MARK Nowell) vs. Chicago Times (CtY-BR, PH)
A (CU-MARK Blake) vs. Chicago Herald (IU, PH)
A (CU-MARK Blake) vs. Cleveland Herald (OHi, PH)
A (CU-MARK Blake) vs. A Library of American Literature (CU-MARK)
machine collations
Pfs (CU-MARK) vs. A (CU-MARK Blake)
Pr (CU-MARK Appert F38) vs. Pr (CU-MARK Occidental)
Pr (CU-MARK Appert F38) vs. A (CU-MARK Blake)
A (CU-MARK Nowell) vs. A (CU-MARK Blake)
A (CU-MARK Nowell) vs. A (CU-MARK Appert F34)
A (CU-MARK Nowell) vs. A (NcD 1891 impression [817.44/C625AF])
A (CU-MARK Blake) vs. A (Hill)
A (CU-MARK Blake) vs. Can (WU, Brownell)
light-box collations
LoM (CU-MARK Caldwell) vs. LoM (CU-MARK McCrea)
LoM Pr (CU-MARK) vs. LoM Pr (CU-MARK Appert F28)
LoM Pr (CU-MARK “ERRQ”) vs. LoM Pr (CU-BANC)
LoM Pr (CU-MARK “ERRQ”) vs. LoM (CU-MARK McCrea)
LoM Pr (CU-MARK Appert F28) vs. LoM (CU-MARK Caldwell)
LoM Pr (CU-MARK Appert F28) vs. LoM (CU-MARK Schaertzer)
electronic collations
MS transcript vs. transcript from A (CU-MARK Nowell) and LoM (CU-MARK Caldwell)
[begin page 810]
These notes explain, for specific variants and classes of variants, how the documentary evidence has been analyzed to identify active authorial intention or revision, or (conversely) to detect errors, inadvertent changes, and changes by typists, compositors, and proofreaders who intended to “improve” the text. The notes also report or describe authorial revision not fully accounted for in Alterations in the Manuscript. When the first American edition (hereafter “first edition”) of Adventures of Huckleberry Finn is cited as the source of an emendation, all extant forms of that typesetting agree (that is, the proofs, the salesmen’s prospectus, books issued under the Webster company imprint, and books issued in Canada from duplicate plates under the Dawson company imprint). Similarly, when the first American edition (hereafter “first edition”) of Life on the Mississippi is cited, all extant forms of that typesetting agree. For the convenience of the reader who wishes to consult the manuscript, where the manuscript is extant it is cited parenthetically following the page and line cue to the text of this edition, thus: “13.34 (MS1a, 43.9–11).” All of the manuscript facsimiles reproduced in the notes are by courtesy of the Buffalo and Erie County Public Library (NBuBE), which houses the original manuscript in the Mark Twain Room. A photofacsimile of MS2 is available in two-volume book form (SLC 1983), and a photofacsimile of the complete manuscript (MS1 and MS2) is available in “Adventures of Huckleberry Finn”: The Buffalo & Erie County Public Library CD-ROM Edition (Doyno 2003).
[begin page 811]
[begin page 812]
[begin page 813]
old] Huck’s invariant “old” appears 212 times in the manuscript. In this place only, it appears as “ole” in the first edition, but is otherwise invariant “old” there as well. The first edition reading is therefore unlikely to be an authorial change, and more likely to be a
[begin page 815]
and then, all winter, the old man would lay for me and catch me, and then I’d borrow] As in the manuscript. The first edition reads simply “and then I’d borrow”. While it is possible that Mark Twain deleted “all winter, the old man would lay for me and catch me,” on the typescript, the change seems unlikely to be his since the missing words made it clear why Huck borrowed money from Judge Thatcher. It is more likely that the typist skipped from the first “and then” to the second, inadvertently deleting the intervening words, and that Mark Twain did not notice the omission. The eyeskip could have occurred between MS1 and TS1, or between TS1 and TS3, or even between TS3 and the first edition. The original reading of the manuscript is therefore retained.
fishing lines] The manuscript originally read “fishing lines”. Mark Twain canceled and then restored “fishing” in the manuscript—probably when he realized a reader might misconstrue Huck’s reference at 32.10 to “tow” (short for “tow-linen”) as a reference to tow-lines. While it is possible that Mark Twain changed his mind again on the typescript, it is much more likely that the typist overlooked the author’s restoration marks and neglected to type “fishing”. The manuscript reading is therefore retained.
[begin page 817]
[begin page 818]
[begin page 819]
[begin page 820]
[begin page 821]
[begin page 822]
[begin page 823]
[begin page 824]
[begin page 825]
[begin page 826]
[begin page 827]
[begin page 828]
[begin page 829]
[begin page 831]
[begin page 832]
[begin page 833]
This list records every reading that has been adopted from a source other than the copy-text (emendation). It also records every rejected variant found in authoritative sources other than the copy-text (historical collation). The following readings are exceptions: (1) page numbers in the table of contents and the list of illustrations are silently changed to refer to the present edition; (2) picture captions are drawn from the first American edition and, for thirteen illustrations on pages 107–23, from the first American edition of Life on the Mississippi, but only departures from these two sources are noted as emendations; (3) superscript letters are silently lowered to the line; and (4) the style of the opening words of chapters, which appear in the present edition in small capitals and with no paragraph indention as an editorial convention, is not recorded as variant from the copy-text. All manuscript ampersands are transcribed in entries as “and.” Mark Twain’s periods after chapter headings are styled as bullets in Kemble’s illustrations; such bullets are always reported as periods in this list. Mechanical errors in inscription resulting from incomplete revision in the manuscript are noted only in Alterations in the Manuscript. In each emendations entry—marked by a square bullet to the left of the page and line cue—the reading of this edition is given first, with its source identified by a symbol in parentheses (or symbols, if multiple authoritative texts agree); this adopted reading is separated by a dot from the rejected copy-text reading on the right, thus: “bobbing (A, Cent) • nodding (MS2)”. Although the combined MS is copy-text throughout, its subsections are here identified, and each change from one to the other is noted on the list, signaled by a row of asterisks. The following symbols identify the divisions of the copy-text and all other authoritative texts included in this list, each of which (except for C) is more fully defined in the Description of Texts:
[begin page 834]
The editorially determined spelling of any compound word hyphenated
ambiguously at the end of a line in the copy-text is recorded here, not in a separate
list. The symbol for the
present edition (C) follows any emendation whose source is not an authoritative text.
A caret (⁁) indicates the absence of a punctuation mark. Thus the entry “places,
(MS1a) ⁁ (A)” reports that a comma follows “places” in the
copy-text but not in the first American edition, and that the editors have not adopted
the reading of A as an
authorial revision or correction. A vertical rule (“ferry-|boat”) indicates the end
of a line; a
double vertical rule (“black-
berries”) indicates the end of a page; a
slash mark (“suppose/spose”) separates alternate readings left uncanceled in the
manuscript. Editorial comment is always italicized and enclosed in square brackets,
thus: “not in.” Entries marked with a heavy asterisk
(✱) are discussed in the Textual Notes. Citations are by
page and line or, when necessary, by page, column, and line: xxxix(1).1.
Within this section:
Page xxix | Page xxxi
Page xxxiii through page 80, print line 29
Page 80, print line 30, through page 98 | Page 99 through page 146, print line 11
Page 146, print line 12, through page 188 | Page 189 through page 362
MS2 title page (1883) is copy-text for xxix.1 (‘ADVENTURES’) through xxix.8 (‘TWAIN’)
MS1b notice page (1880) is copy-text for xxxi title (‘NOTICE’) through xxxi.5 (‘Ordnance.’)
MS1a 1 through 280.5 (1876) is copy-text for xxxiii title (‘EXPLANATORY’) through 80.29 (‘come.’; emended)
MS2 81-A-1 through 81-60 (1883) is copy-text for 80.30 (‘Well’) through 98.7 (‘quit’)
MS1a 280.6 through 446 (1876) is copy-text for 99.1 (‘We’) through 146.11 (‘it.” ’)
MS1b 447 through 663 (1880) is copy-text for 146.12 (‘ “Well’) through 188.16 (‘with.’; emended)
MS2 160 through 787 (1883) is copy-text for 189.1 (‘They’) through 362.11 (‘Finn.’)
[begin page 994]
This list records the changes Mark Twain made on his manuscript of Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, both in the approximately 49 percent of the story he wrote in 1876 and 1880 (MS1a and MS1b), and in the approximately 51 percent he wrote in 1883 (MS2). The entire manuscript is in the Mark Twain Room of the Buffalo and Erie County Public Library (NBuBE). The list can be used most effectively in conjunction with the manuscript itself, the latter portion of which has been available since 1983 in an excellent facsimile published by the Gale Research Company, “Adventures of Huckleberry Finn (Tom Sawyer’s Comrade)”: A Facsimile of the Manuscript (SLC 1983). A compact disk edition of the full manuscript, “Adventures of Huckleberry Finn”: The Buffalo and Erie County Public Library CD-ROM Edition, edited by Victor A. Doyno, is currently in production (Doyno 2003). Each entry therefore includes the manuscript page and line number in parentheses, following the page and line cue of the present edition. Although Mark Twain deleted Jim’s “ghost” story before publication (MS1a, 198.16–214.4) and it is consequently not part of this text, alterations are reported in the sequence in which they occur in the manuscript. They are cued to Three Passages from the Manuscript, where the passage is printed in full.
Certain categories of revision have been excluded from the list: (1) malformed letters or words that were subsequently mended, traced over, or canceled and then rewritten for clarity; (2) slips of the pen, which do not form identifiable characters; (3) words or phrases repeated inadvertently, then corrected by deletion. The cue words always accord with the edited text; whenever the edited text does not match the manuscript reading, the manuscript reading is given in the entry, followed by “(emended).” (All references to emendations are to the entries marked with a square bullet in Emendations and Historical Collation.) The first words of chapters appear in this list as Mark Twain wrote them, even if they have been styled in the present edition in capital and small capital letters. All ampersands in the manuscript are reported here as “and.”
The word “interlined” means that new material was written above the original line with a caret indicating its intended placement; in some cases new material was “interlined without a caret.” “Squeezed in” or “added” material was inserted without a caret within an existing line; in some few
[begin page 995]
head”). Each change in paper and ink is signaled in the list with a centered heading. Revision in another medium is specified where it occurs. For a full description of the paper and ink used in the manuscript, see the Description of Texts.
Within this section:
Page xxix | Page xxxi | Page 1 through page 80, print line 29
Page 80, print line 30, through page 81, print line 32
Page 81, print line 32, through page 82, print line 9
Page 82, print line 9, through page 98 | Page 99 through page 146, print line 11
Page 146, print line 12, through page 188 | Page 189 through page 362
Written in blue ink on OBM1 paper from xxix.1 (‘ADVENTURES’) through xxix.8 (‘TWAIN’) [MS2 title page]
Written in blue ink on WW paper from xxxi title (‘NOTICE’) through xxxi.5 (‘Ordnance.’) [MS1b notice page]
Written in black ink on CLM paper from 1.1 (‘You’) through 80.29 (‘come.’; emended) [MS1a 1 through 280.5]
[begin page 996]
[begin page 998]
[begin page 999]
[begin page 1000]
[begin page 1001]
[begin page 1002]
[begin page 1003]
[begin page 1004]
[begin page 1005]
[begin page 1007]
[begin page 1009]
[begin page 1010]
[begin page 1011]
[begin page 1012]
[begin page 1013]
[begin page 1014]
[begin page 1015]
[begin page 1016]
[begin page 1017]
[begin page 1018]
[begin page 1019]
[begin page 1020]
[begin page 1021]
[begin page 1022]
[begin page 1023]
[begin page 1024]
[begin page 1025]
[begin page 1026]
[begin page 1027]
[begin page 1028]
[begin page 1029]
[begin page 1030]
Written in blue ink on OBM1 paper from 80.30 (‘Well’) through 81.32 (‘just’) [MS2 81-A-1 through 81-5]
[begin page 1031]
Written in blue ink on OBM2 paper from 81.32 (‘then’) through 82.9 (‘kept’) [MS2 81-6 through 81-7]
Written in blue ink on OBM1 paper from 82.9 (‘pointing’) through 98.7 (‘quit.’) [MS2 81-8 through 81-60]
[begin page 1033]
[begin page 1034]
[begin page 1035]
Written in black ink on CLM paper from 99.1 (‘We’) through 146.11 (‘it.” ’) [MS1a 280.5 through 446]
[begin page 1036]
[begin page 1037]
[begin page 1038]
[begin page 1040]
[begin page 1041]
[begin page 1042]
[begin page 1043]
[begin page 1044]
[begin page 1045]
[begin page 1046]
Written in purple ink on WW paper from 146.12 (‘ “Well’; emended) through 188.16 (‘with.’; emended) [MS1b 447 through 663]
[begin page 1047]
[begin page 1048]
[begin page 1049]
[begin page 1050]
[begin page 1051]
[begin page 1052]
[begin page 1053]
[begin page 1054]
[begin page 1055]
[begin page 1057]
[begin page 1059]
[begin page 1060]
Written in blue ink on OBM1 paper from 189.1 (‘They’) through 362.11 (‘Finn.’) [MS2 160 through 786]
[begin page 1061]
[begin page 1062]
[begin page 1063]
[begin page 1065]
about six words trimmed
Mark Twain cut manuscript pages originally numbered 211½ and 212 into two and three pieces, respectively; after trimming away and discarding two segments, he reassembled the remaining fragments in a different order. He numbered one of the fragments 212½ and probably numbered another 212[¼]. In its reassembled form, the passage beginning with 212[¼] is comprised of four fragments, which we have labeled A, B, C, and D. The photographs on this page and the facing page show the cut fragments arranged in their original order. On the following pages, the fragments are shown in the order of Mark Twain’s final revision of manuscript pages 211½ and 212.
[begin page 1066]
word trimmed
[begin page 1067]
[begin page 1068]
[begin page 1063 continued]
[begin page 1069]
[begin page 1070]
[begin page 1071]
[begin page 1072]
[begin page 1073]
[begin page 1074]
[begin page 1079]
[begin page 1080]
[begin page 1083]
[begin page 1084]
[begin page 1085]
[begin page 1087]
[begin page 1089]
[begin page 1090]
[begin page 1092]
[begin page 1093]
[begin page 1094]
[begin page 1095]
[begin page 1096]
[begin page 1097]
[begin page 1098]
[begin page 1099]
[begin page 1100]
[begin page 1102]
[begin page 1103]
[begin page 1104]
[begin page 1105]
[begin page 1106]
[begin page 1107]
[begin page 1108]
[begin page 1110]
[begin page 1111]
[begin page 1112]
[begin page 1113]
[begin page 1114]
[begin page 1116]
[begin page 1117]
[begin page 1118]
[begin page 1119]
[begin page 1120]
[begin page 1121]
This list defines the abbreviations used in this book and provides full bibliographic information for works cited by the author’s name, or by name and publication date. Any edition listed here known to be the one that Clemens owned is identified by a heavy asterisk (✱). [The 2009 web edition did not include a list of references; it has been restored as of 2016, together with relevant references introduced in HF 2010.]
Abbott, Keene. 1913. “Tom Sawyer’s Town.” Harper’s Weekly 57 (9 August): 16–17.
AD. Autobiographical Dictation. [Clemens’s dictations have been published 2010–2015 in print and on MTPO.]
Aiken, Albert W. 1880. Richard Talbot of Cinnabar: or, The Brothers of the Red Hand. Citations are to the reprint edition in The Dime Library 82 (August 1901), New York: M. J. Ivers and Co.
Ainsworth, William Harrison. 1840. The Tower of London: A Historical Romance. London: R. Bentley.
Aldrich, Thomas Bailey. 1869. The Story of a Bad Boy. Boston: Fields, Osgood and Co.
AMT. 1959. The Autobiography of Mark Twain. Edited by Charles Neider. New York: Harper and Brothers.
Anderson, Frederick, and Hamlin Hill. 1972. “How Samuel Clemens Became Mark Twain’s Publisher.” Proof 2: 117–43.
Anderson, Frederick, and Kenneth M. Sanderson, eds. 1971. Mark Twain: The Critical Heritage. New York: Barnes and Noble.
Andrews, William L. 1981. “Mark Twain and James W. C. Pennington: Huckleberry Finn’s Smallpox Lie.” Studies in American Fiction 9 (Spring): 103–12.
Angell, Roger. 1995. “In ‘Huck, Continued.’ ” New Yorker 71 (26 June and 3 July): 130–32.
✱ Arabian Nights. 1839–41. The Thousand and One Nights, Commonly Called, in England, the Arabian Nights’ Entertainments. Translated by Edward William Lane. 3 vols. London: Charles Knight and Co.
Arac, Jonathan. 1997. “Huckleberry Finn” As Idol and Target: The Functions of Criticism in Our Time. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.
[begin page 1122]
Archer, William. 1900. “Study and Stage, A New Parable.” London Morning Leader, 22 September, 4.
Arner, Robert D. 1972. “Acts Seventeen and Huckleberry Finn: A Note on Silas Phelps’ Sermon.” Mark Twain Journal 16 (Summer): 12.
Ashmead, John. 1962. “A Possible Hannibal Source for Mark Twain’s Dauphin.” American Literature 34 (March): 105–7.
ATS. 1982. The Adventures of Tom Sawyer. Foreword and notes by John C. Gerber; text established by Paul Baender. The Mark Twain Library. Berkeley, Los Angeles, London: University of California Press.
AutoMT1. 2010. Autobiography of Mark Twain, Volume 1. Edited by Harriet Elinor Smith, Benjamin Griffin, Victor Fischer, Michael B. Frank, Sharon K. Goetz, and Leslie Diane Myrick. The Mark Twain Papers. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press. Also online at MTPO.
Ayres, John W. 1917. “Recollections of Hannibal.” Letter dated 22 August. Undated clipping from the Palmyra (Mo.) Spectator, Morris Anderson scrapbook, MoHM. Reprinted in part by Wecter 1952, 149.
[Bacon, Thomas]. 1990. A Mirror of Hannibal. Edited by J. Hurley Hagood and Roberta Hagood. Rev. ed. Hannibal: Hannibal Free Public Library. First published in 1905 by C. P. Greene.
Baetzhold, Howard G.
1961. “The Course of Composition of A Connecticut Yankee.” American Literature 33 (May): 195–214.
1970. Mark Twain and John Bull: The British Connection. Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
Baker, William. 1985. “Mark Twain and the Shrewd Ohio Audiences.” American Literary Realism 18 (Spring and Autumn): 14–30.
BAL. 1955–91. Bibliography of American Literature. Compiled by Jacob Blanck. 9 vols. New Haven: Yale University Press.
Baldanza, Frank. 1955. “The Structure of Huckleberry Finn.” American Literature 27 (November): 347–55.
Bales, E. G. 1939. “Folklore from West Norfolk.” Folk-Lore 50: 66–75. Citations are to the 1969 reprint edition, Nendeln: Kraus Reprint.
✱ Ball, Charles. 1837. Slavery in the United States: A Narrative of the Life and Adventures of Charles Ball, a Black Man, Who Lived Forty Years in Maryland, South Carolina and Georgia, as a Slave. New York: J. S. Taylor.
Barber, Paul. 1988. Vampires, Burial, and Death: Folklore and Reality. New Haven: Yale University Press.
Barker, E. H. 1852. Literary Anecdotes and Contemporary Reminiscences, of Professor Porson and Others. 2 vols. London: J. R. Smith.
Bartlett, John Russell. 1896. Dictionary of Americanisms. A Glossary of Words and Phrases Usually Regarded as Peculiar to the United States. 4th ed. Boston: Little, Brown, and Co.
[begin page 1123]
Bates, Alan. 1968. The Western Rivers Steamboat Cyclopoedium; or, American Riverboat Structure & Detail, Salted with Lore, with a Nod to the Modelmaker. Leonia, N.J.: Hustle Press.
Baughman, Ernest W. 1966. Type and Motif Index of the Folktales of England and North America. Indiana University Series, no. 20. The Hague: Mouton and Co.
Beaver, Harold. 1987. Huckleberry Finn. Unwin Critical Library. London: Allen and Unwin.
Beidler, Peter G.
1968. “The Raft Episode in Huckleberry Finn.” Modern Fiction Studies 14 (Spring): 11–20.
1990. “Christian Schultz’s Travels: A New Source for Huckleberry Finn?” English Language Notes 28 (December): 51–61.
Belden, H. M., ed. 1940. Ballads and Songs Collected by the Missouri Folk-Lore Society. University of Missouri Studies 15 (1 January).
Bentley. Collection of Mr. and Mrs. Fred D. Bentley, Sr.
Bercovich, Sacvan. 2002. “Deadpan Huck: Or, What’s Funny about Interpretation.” Kenyon Review 24 (Spring–Autumn), 90–134.
Berkove, Lawrence I. 1994. “Mark Twain’s Vision of Truth.” Journal of American Studies 26 (December): 204–22.
Berret, Anthony J.
1985. “The Influence of Hamlet on Huckleberry Finn.” American Literary Realism 18 (Spring and Autumn): 196–207.
1986. “Huckleberry Finn and the Minstrel Show.” American Studies 27 (Fall): 37–49.
Berridge, W S., and W. Percival Westell. 1911. The Book of the Zoo. London: J. M. Dent and Sons.
Bertram, Paul, and Bernice W. Kliman, eds. 1991. The Three-Text Hamlet. New York: AMS Press.
Bickerstaff, Isaac. 1981. The Plays of Isaac Bickerstaff. Edited by Peter A. Tasch. 3 vols. New York: Garland Publishing.
Bikle, Lucy Leffingwell Cable. 1928. George W. Cable: His Life and Letters. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons.
Birchfield, James. 1969. “Jim’s Coat of Arms.” Mark Twain Journal 14 (Summer): 15–16.
✱ [Bird, Robert M.] 1837. Nick of the Woods; or, The Jibbenainosay. 2 vols. Philadelphia: Carey, Lea and Blanchard.
Blair, Walter.
“The Methods of Mark Twain.” Saturday Review of Literature 25 (20 June): 11.
1957. “The French Revolution and Huckleberry Finn.” Modern Philology 55 (August): 21–35.
[begin page 1124]
1958. “When Was Huckleberry Finn Written?” American Literature 30 (March): 1–25.
1960a. Mark Twain & Huck Finn. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
1960b. Native American Humor. San Francisco: Chandler Publishing Company.
1976. “Charles Mathews and His ‘Trip to America.’ ” In Salzman 1976, 2:1–23.
1979. “Was Huckleberry Finn Written?.” Mark Twain Journal 19 (Summer): 1–3.
Blair, Walter, and Hamlin Hill. 1978. America’s Humor: From Poor Richard to Doonesbury. New York: Oxford University Press.
Blair, Walter, and Franklin J. Meine. 1956. Half Horse Half Alligator: The Growth of the Mike Fink Legend. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Blanck, Jacob.
1939. A Supplement to “A Bibliography of Mark Twain.” New York: Privately printed.
1950. “In Re Huckleberry Finn.” New Colophon 3: 153–59.
1960. “ ‘Mark Twain & Huck Finn’ Reviewed.” Antiquarian Bookman 26 (28 November): 1931–35.
Blanton, Wyndham B. 1933. Medicine in Virginia in the Nineteenth Century. Richmond: Garrett and Massie.
Blathwait, Raymond. 1891. “Mark Twain on Humor.” New York World, 31 May, 26.
Bliven, Bruce, Jr. 1954. The Wonderful Writing Machine. New York: Random House.
Boewe, Mary. 1985. “Twain on Lecky: Some Marginalia at Quarry Farm.” Mark Twain Society Bulletin 8 (January): 1–6.
Bontemps, Arna, ed. 1969. Great Slave Narratives. Boston: Beacon Press.
Bowen, Elbert R. [1959]. Theatrical Entertainments in Rural Missouri before the Civil War. University of Missouri Studies, vol. 32. Columbia: University of Missouri Press.
Bradley, David. 1996. “Introduction.” In How to Tell a Story and Other Essays. New York: Oxford University Press.
Bragg, Marion. 1977. Historic Names and Places on the Lower Mississippi River. Vicksburg, Miss.: Mississippi River Commission.
Branch, Edgar Marquess.
1983. “Mark Twain: Newspaper Reading and the Writer’s Creativity.” Nineteenth-Century Fiction 37 (March): 576–603.
[begin page 1125]
1984. “Three New Letters by Samuel Clemens in the Muscatine Journal.” Mark Twain Journal 22 (Spring): 2–7.
Branch, Edgar Marquess, and Robert H. Hirst. 1985. The Grangerford–Shepherdson Feud . . . with an Account of Mark Twain’s Literary Use of the Bloody Encounters at Compromise, Kentucky. Berkeley: The Friends of The Bancroft Library.
Brand, John. 1877. Observations on Popular Antiquities. London: Chatto and Windus.
Bremer, Fredrika. 1853. The Homes of the New World; Impressions of America. Translated by Mary Howitt. 3 vols. London: Arthur Hall, Virtue, and Co.
Brewer, Ebenezer Cobham. 1882. Dictionary of Phrase and Fable. 14th ed., rev. London: Cassell, Petter, Galpin and Co.
[Bridges, Robert.] 1885. “Mark Twain’s Blood-Curdling Humor.” Life 5 (26 February): 119. Reprinted in Da Ponte 1959, 79, and Anderson and Sanderson 1971, 126–27.
Bronson, Bertrand Harris, ed.
1962. The Traditional Tunes of the Child Ballads. 4 vols. Princeton: Princeton University Press.
1976. The Singing Tradition of Child’s Popular Ballads. Princeton: Princeton University Press.
Brooks, Van Wyck.
1920a. The Ordeal of Mark Twain. New York: E. P. Dutton and Co.
1920b. “The Genesis of Huck Finn.” The Freeman 1 (31 March): 59–63.
Brown, Spencer. 1967. “Huckleberry Finn for Our Time.” Michigan Quarterly Review 6 (Winter): 41–46.
Browne, Ray B. 1960. “Shakespeare in American Vaudeville and Negro Minstrelsy.” American Quarterly 12 (Fall): 374–91.
Bruce, Dickson D., Jr. 1974. And They All Sang Hallelujah: Plain-Folk Camp-Meeting Religion, 1800–1845. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press.
Bruchac, Joseph. 1993. The Native American Sweat Lodge: History and Legends. Freedom, Calif.: Crossing Press.
Budd, Louis J.
1959. “The Southward Currents under Huck Finn’s Raft.” Mississippi Valley Historical Review 46 (September): 222–37.
1962. Mark Twain: Social Philosopher. Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
[begin page 1126]
1977. “A Listing of and Selection from Newspaper and Magazine Interviews with Samuel L. Clemens, 1874–1910.” American Literary Realism 10 (Winter): i–100.
1982. “Who Wants to Go to Hell? An Unsigned Sketch by Mark Twain.” Studies in American Humor, n.s., 1 (June): 6–16.
1983. Our Mark Twain: The Making of His Public Personality. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press.
1985. “ ‘A Nobler Roman Aspect’ of Adventures of Huckleberry Finn.” In Sattelmeyer and Crowley, 26–40.
1992a. Mark Twain: Collected Tales, Sketches, Speeches, & Essays, 1852–1890. The Library of America. New York: Literary Classics of the United States.
1992b. Mark Twain: Collected Tales, Sketches, Speeches, & Essays, 1891–1910. The Library of America. New York: Literary Classics of the United States.
1999. Mark Twain: The Contemporary Reviews. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
✱ Bunyan, John. [1678] 1875. The Pilgrim’s Progress as Originally Published by John Bunyan, Being a Facsimile Reproduction of the First Edition. London: Elliot Stock.
Burchfield, R. W., ed. 1972–86. A Supplement to the Oxford English Dictionary. 4 vols. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
Buxbaum, Katherine. 1927. “Mark Twain and American Dialect.” American Speech 2 (February): 233–36.
Byers, John R., Jr.
1971. “Miss Emmeline Grangerford’s Hymn Book.” American Literature 43 (May): 259–63.
1973–74. “Mark Twain’s Miss Mary Jane Wilks: Shamed or Shammed?” Mark Twain Journal 17 (Winter): 13–14.
1977. “The Pokeville Preacher’s Invitation in Huckleberry Finn.” Mark Twain Journal 18 (Summer): 15–16.
Camfield, Gregg. 1992. “ ‘I Wouldn’t Be as Ignorant as You for Wages’: Huck Finn Talks Back to His Conscience.” Studies in American Fiction 20 (Autumn): 169–75.
Cardwell, Guy A. 1953. Twins of Genius. [East Lansing]: Michigan State College Press.
Carkeet, David.
1979. “The Dialects in Huckleberry Finn.” American Literature 51 (November): 315–32.
1981. “The Source for the Arkansas Gossips in Huckleberry Finn.” American Literary Realism 14 (Spring): 90–92.
[begin page 1127]
✱ Carlyle, Thomas. 1856. The French Revolution: A History. 2 vols. New York: Harper and Brothers.
Carlyon, David. 2007. “Twain’s ‘Stretcher’: The Circus Shapes Huckleberry Finn.” South Atlantic Review 72 (Fall): 1–36.
Carrington, George C., Jr. 1976. The Dramatic Unity of “Huckleberry Finn.” Columbus: Ohio State University Press.
✱ Casanova de Seingalt, Giacomo Girolamo. 1833–37. Memoires de Jacques Casanova de Seingalt. 10 vols. Paris: Paulin.
Cassidy, Frederic G., and Joan Houston Hall, eds. 1985–. Dictionary of American Regional English. 6 vols. to date. Cambridge: Belknap Press of Harvard University Press.
Cayton, Frank M., comp. 1879. Landings on the Mississippi River, Showing Locations, etc. St. Louis: Woodward, Tiernan and Hale.
CCamarSJ. St. John’s Seminary, Camarillo, California. Formerly home to the Estelle Doheny collection (now dispersed).
Cellini, Benvenuto. 1851. Memoirs of Benvenuto Cellini, a Florentine Artist. Translated by Thomas Roscoe. New York: George P. Putnam.
Century Dictionary. 1889–91. The Century Dictionary: An Encyclopedic Lexicon of the English Language. Prepared under the superintendence of William Dwight Whitney. 6 vols. New York: Century Company.
Cervantes Saavedra, Miguel de.
1855. The Exemplary Novels of Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra. Translated from the Spanish by Walter K. Kelly. London: Henry G. Bohn.
1992. Don Quixote de la Mancha. Translated by Charles Jarvis, with an introduction by E. C. Riley. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Champion, Laurie, ed. 1991. The Critical Response to Mark Twain’s Huckleberry Finn. New York: Greenwood Press.
Childs, Marquis W. 1982. Mighty Mississippi: Biography of a River. New Haven and New York: Ticknor and Fields.
CL. Los Angeles Public Library, Los Angeles, Calif.
Clapin, Sylva. 1902. A New Dictionary of Americanisms. New York: Louis Weiss and Co.
Clarke, Asia Booth. 1882. The Elder and the Younger Booth. Boston: James R. Osgood and Co.
Clemens, Olivia Susan (Susy). See OSC.
Clifton, William. [1840?]. “The Last Link Is Broken. A duet composed and arranged for the piano forte, by Wm. Clifton.” New York: Firth and Hall. The Lester S. Levy Sheet Music Collection, Johns Hopkins University.
CLjC. The James S. Copley Library, La Jolla, California. The collection of the Copley Library was sold in a series of auctions at Sotheby’s, New York, in 2010 and 2011.
Cohen, William. 1991. At Freedom’s Edge: Black Mobility and the Southern White Quest for Racial Control, 1861–1915. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press.
[begin page 1128]
Colwell, James L. 1971. “Huckleberries and Humans: On the Naming of Huckleberry Finn.” PMLA 86 (January): 70–76.
Conard, Howard L., ed. 1901. Encyclopedia of the History of Missouri. 6 vols. New York: Southern History Company.
Conclin, George, comp. 1848. Conclin’s New River Guide; or, A Gazetteer of All the Towns on the Western Waters. Cincinnati: George Conclin.
Cooper, Helen A. 1982. John Trumbull: The Hand and Spirit of a Painter. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Art Gallery.
Couch, W. T. 1934. Culture in the South. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press. Citations are to the 1970 reprint edition, Westport, Cohn.: Negro Universities Press.
Covici, Pascal, Jr. 1960. “Dear Master Wattie: The Mark Twain–David Watt Bowser Letters.” Southwest Review 45 (Spring): 106–9.
Craigie, William, ed., with James R. Hurlbert. 1936. A Dictionary of American English on Historical Principles. 4 vols. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
✱ Cramer, Zadok. 1817. The Navigator, Containing Directions for Navigating the Monongahela, Allegheny, Ohio and Mississippi Rivers. 9th ed. Pittsburgh: Cramer, Spear and Eichbaum. Cramer’s book was in Clemens’s library (Gribben, 2:914), but it is not known which edition cf the twelve published between 1801 and 1824 he owned.
Crossett, Judith Hale. 1977. “A Critical Edition of Mark Twain’s Life on the Mississippi.” 3 vols. Ph.D. diss., University of Iowa, Iowa City.
CSmH. Henry E. Huntington Library, Art Collections and Botanical Gardens, San Marino, Calif.
CtHMTH. Mark Twain Memorial, Hartford, Conn.
CtY-BR. Yale University, Beinecke Rare Book and Manuscript Library, New Haven, Conn.
CU. University of California, Berkeley, Main Library, Berkeley, Calif.
CU-BANC. University of California, The Bancroft Library, Berkeley.
CU-MAPS. University of California, Berkeley, Maps Collection, Berkeley, Calif.
CU-MARK. University of California, Mark Twain Papers, The Bancroft Library, Berkeley.
Cummings, Samuel. 1854. The Western Pilot; Containing Charts of the Ohio River and of the Mississippi, from the Mouth of the Missouri to the Gulf of Mexico; Accompanied with Directions for Navigating the Same, and a Gazetteer. Corrected by Capts. Charles Ross and John Klinefelte. Cincinnati: J. A. and U. P. James.
[begin page 1129]
Cummings, Sherwood.
1988. Mark Twain and Science: Adventures of a Mind. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press.
1991. “Mark Twain’s Moveable Farm and the Evasion.” American Literature 63 (September): 440–58.
Current, Richard N. 1954. The Typewriter and the Men Who Made It. Urbana: University of Illinois Press.
CY. 1979. A Connecticut Yankee in King Arthur’s Court. Edited by Bernard L. Stein, with an introduction by Henry Nash Smith. The Works of Mark Twain. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
Da Ponte, Durant. 1959. “Life Reviews Huckleberry Finn.” American Literature 31 (March): 78–81.
✱ Darwin, Charles. 1871. The Descent of Man, and Selection in Relation to Sex. Vol. 1 of 2. New York: D. Appleton and Co. Copy owned by Clemens, with marginalia, CU-MARK.
David, Beverly R.
1974. “The Pictorial Huck Finn: Mark Twain and His Illustrator, E. W. Kemble.” American Quarterly 26 (October): 331–51.
1982. “Mark Twain and the Legends for Huckleberry Finn.” American Literary Realism 15 (Autumn): 155–65.
David, Beverly R., and Ray Sapirstein. 1996. “Reading the Illustrations in Huckleberry Finn.” In SLC 1996, editorial back matter, 33–40.
Davidson, Loren K. 1968. “The Darnell-Watson Feud.” Duquesne Review 13 (Fall): 76–95.
Davis, Chester L., Sr. 1955. “Mark Twain’s Personal Marked Copy of History of European Morals by William Edward Hartpole Lecky (Continuation).” Twainian 14 (September-October): 1–4.
✱ Defoe, Daniel. 1747. Life and Strange Surprising Adventures of Robinson Crusoe. London: Printed for T. Woodward.
De Forest, J. W. 1872. “An Independent Ku-Klux.” Galaxy 13 (April): 480–88.
Den Hollander, A. N. J. [1934] 1970. “The Tradition of ‘Poor Whites.’ ” In Couch, 403–31.
De Vere, M. Schele. 1872. Americanisms: The English of the New World. New York: Charles Scribner and Co.
DeVinne, Theodore Low. [1883] 1926. Manual of Printing Office Practice. Reprint, with an introductory note by Douglas C. McMurtrie. New York: Press of Ars Typographica.
[begin page 1130]
DeVoto, Bernard.
1932. Mark Twain’s America. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company.
1942. Mark Twain at Work. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
1946. The Portable Mark Twain. New York: Viking Press. (BAL 3574).
DGU. Georgetown University, Washington, D.C.
Dickens, Charles.
1842. American Notes for General Circulation. New York: Harper and Brothers.
✱ 1866–1870. The Works of Charles Dickens. Household Edition. 55 vols. New York: Hurd and Houghton.
✱ 1882. A Tale of Two Cities. New York: J. W. Lovell Company.
1970. A Tale of Two Cities. Penguin English Library. Harmondsworth, England: Penguin Books.
Dickinson, Asa Don. 1935. “Huckleberry Finn Is Fifty Years Old—Yes; But Is He Respectable?” Wilson Bulletin for Librarians 10 (November): 180–85.
DLC. United States Library of Congress, Washington, D.C.
Dorson, Richard M., ed. 1967. American Negro Folktales. Greenwich, Conn.: Fawcett Publications.
Douglass, Frederick. 1997. Narrative of the Life of Frederick Douglass, an American Slave, Written by Himself. Edited by William L. Andrews and William S. McFeely. A Norton Critical Edition. New York: W. W. Norton and Co.
Doyno, Victor A.
1991. Writing “Huck Finn”: Mark Twain’s Creative Process. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press.
1996a. “Afterword.” In SLC 1996.
1996b. “Textual Addendum.” In SLC 1996.
Doyno, Victor A., ed. 2003. Adventures of Huckleberry Finn: The Buffalo & Erie County Public Library CD-ROM Edition.
Drake, Samuel Adams. 1875. Nooks and Corners of the New England Coast. New York: Harper and Brothers.
Dresser, Amos. 1836. The Narrative of Amos Dresser with Stone’s Letters from Natchez, an Obituary Notice of the Writer, and Two Letters from Tallahassee, Relating to the Treatment of Slaves. New York: American Anti-Slavery Society.
Drew, Benjamin. 1882. Hints and Helps for Those Who Write, Print, or Read. Boston: Lee and Shepard; New York: Charles T. Dillingham.
Dumas, Alexandre.
[187–]a. The Count of Monte-Cristo. London: G. Routledge and Sons.
[187–]b. Novels and Tales. 14 vols. London and New York: George Routledge.
[begin page 1131]
Dundes, Alan. 1990. Mother Wit from the Laughing Barrel. Jackson: University Press of Mississippi.
Eby, Cecil D., Jr. 1960. “Mark Twain’s ‘Plug’ and ‘Chaw’: An Anecdotal Parallel.” Mark Twain Journal 11 (Summer): 11, 25.
Edwards, Cyrus. 1940. Cyrus Edwards’ Stories of Early Days and Others. Edited and compiled by Florence Edwards Gardiner. Louisville, Ky.: The Standard Printing Company.
Edwards, Richard, ed. 1855. Statistical Gazetteer of the State of Virginia. Richmond, Va.: Richard Edwards.
Eggleston, Edward.
1871. The Hoosier School-Master: A Novel. New York: Orange Judd and Co.
1874. The Circuit Rider: A Tale of the Heroic Age. New York: J. B. Ford and Co.
1878. Roxy. New York: C. Scribner’s Sons.
Eliot, T. S.
1950. Introduction to The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, by Samuel L. Clemens (Mark Twain). London: Cresset Press.
1953. American Literature and the American Language. Washington University Studies, Language and Literature, n.s., 23. St. Louis, Mo.: Committee on Publications, Washington University.
Ellis, James. 1991. “The Bawdy Humor of The King’s Camelopard or The Royal Nonesuch.” American Literature 63 (December): 729–35.
Ellison, Ralph. 1970. “What America Would Be Like Without Blacks.” Time 95 (6 April): 54–55.
Engle, Gary D. 1978. This Grotesque Essence: Plays from the American Minstrel Stage. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press.
Ensor, Allison. 1969. “The Location of the Phelps Farm in ‘Huckleberry Finn.’ ” South Atlantic Bulletin 34 (May): 7.
Esling, Catharine H. W., ed. 1842. Friendship’s Offering. Boston: E. Littlefield.
Estes, David C., ed. 1989. A New Collection of Thomas Bangs Thorpe’s “Sketches of the Old Southwest.” Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press.
ET&S1. 1979. Early Tales & Sketches, Volume 1 (1851–1864). Edited by Edgar Marquess Branch and Robert H. Hirst, with the assistance of Harriet Elinor Smith. The Works of Mark Twain. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
ET&S2. 1981. Early Tales & Sketches, Volume 2 (1864–1865). Edited by Edgar Marquess Branch and Robert H. Hirst, with the assistance of Harriet Elinor Smith. The Works of Mark Twain. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
[begin page 1132]
Falk, Bernard. 1942. The Bridgewater Millions: A Candid Family History. London: Hutchinson and Co.
Farmer, John S., comp. and ed. 1889. Americanisms—Old & New. London: Privately printed by Thomas Poulter and Sons.
Farmer, John S., and W. E. Henley. 1905. A Dictionary of Slang and Colloquial English. Abridged from the seven-volume work, entitled Slang and Its Analogues. London: George Routledge and Sons.
Fatout, Paul.
1960. Mark Twain on the Lecture Circuit. Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
1976. Mark Twain Speaking. Iowa City: University of Iowa Press.
Ferguson, DeLancey.
1938. “Huck Finn Aborning.” Colophon, n.s., 3 (Spring): 171–80.
1943. Mark Twain: Man and Legend. Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill Company.
Field, J. M. 1847. The Drama in Pokerville; The Bench and Bar of Jury-town, and Other Stories. Philadelphia: T. B. Peterson and Brothers.
Fischer [Fisher], Henry W. 1922. Abroad with Mark Twain and Eugene Field: Tales They Told to a Fellow Correspondent. New York: Nicholas L. Brown.
Fischer, Victor. 1983. “Huck Finn Reviewed: The Reception of Huckleberry Finn in the United States, 1885–1897.” American Literary Realism 16 (Spring): 1–57.
Fishkin, Shelley Fisher. 1993. Was Huck Black? Mark Twain and African-American Voices. New York: Oxford University Press.
[Fitch, George Hamlin.] 1885. “Literature.” San Francisco Chronicle, 15 March, 6.
Fleming, Walter L. 1906. Documentary History of Reconstruction. 2 vols. Citations are to the 1960 reprint edition, Gloucester, Mass.: Peter Smith.
Flexner, James Thomas. 1937. Doctors on Horseback: Pioneers of American Medicine. New York: Viking Press.
FM. 1972. Mark Twain’s Fables of Man. Edited by John S. Tuckey. Text established by Kenneth M. Sanderson and Bernard L. Stein. The Mark Twain Papers. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
[begin page 1133]
Foner, Philip S. 1958. Mark Twain: Social Critic. New York: International Publishers.
Freedman. Collection of Samuel N. Freedman.
French, Bryant Morey. 1965. Mark Twain and “The Gilded Age”: The Book That Named an Era. Dallas: Southern Methodist University Press.
Fry, Gladys-Marie. 1975. Night Riders in Black Folk History. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press.
✱ Fuller, Horace W. 1882. Noted French Trials: Impostors and Adventurers. Boston: Soule and Bugbee.
Gaffney, W. G. 1966. “Mark Twain’s ‘Duke’ and ‘Dauphin.’ ” ANS Notes 14 (September): 175–78.
Ganzel, Dewey.
1962a. “Samuel Clemens and Captain Marryat.” Anglia: Zeitschrift für Englische Philologie 80: 405–16.
1962b. “Twain, Travel Books, and Life on the Mississippi.” American Literature 34 (March): 40–55.
Gardner, Joseph H. 1968. “Gaffer Hexam and Pap Finn.” Modern Philology 66 (November): 155–56.
Gates, William Bryan. 1939. “Mark Twain to His English Publishers.” American Literature 11 (March): 78–80.
Genovese, Eugene D. 1974. Roll, Jordan, Roll: The World the Slaves Made. New York: Pantheon Books.
Gerber, John C. 1985. “Introduction: The Continuing Adventures of Huckleberry Finn.” In Sattelmeyer and Crowley, 1–12.
GEU. Emory University, Atlanta, Ga.
Gibson, William M. 1976. The Art of Mark Twain. New York: Oxford University Press.
Giddings, Robert, ed. 1985. Mark Twain: A Sumptuous Variety. London and Totowa, N.J.: Vision Press and Barnes and Noble Books.
Gilder, Richard Watson. 1887. “Certain Tendencies in Current Literature.” New Princeton Review, n.s., 4 (July): 1–13.
Gilder, Rosamond, ed. 1916. Letters of Richard Watson Gilder. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company.
Gneiting, Teona Tone. 1977. “Picture and Text: A Theory of Illustrated Fiction in the Nineteenth Century.” Ph.D. diss., University of California, Los Angeles.
[begin page 1134]
✱ Goldsmith, Oliver. 1882. The Vicar of Wakefield, a Tale. New York: John W. Lovell Company.
Goodyear, Russell H. 1971. “Huck Finn’s Anachronistic Double Eagles.” American Notes & Queries 10 (November): 39.
Gordon, Robert Winslow. 1927. “Negro ‘Shouts’ from Georgia.” New York Times Magazine, 24 April. Reprinted in Dundes, 445–51.
Gove, Philip Babcock, and the Merriam-Webster editorial staff. 1961. Webster’s Third New International Dictionary of the English Language, Unabridged. Springfield, Mass.: G. and C. Merriam Company.
Graff, Gerald, and James Phelan, eds. 1995. “Adventures of Huckleberry Finn”: A Case Study in Critical Controversy. Boston and New York: Bedford Books of St. Martin’s Press.
Graves, Wallace. 1968. “Mark Twain’s ‘Burning Shame.’ ” Nineteenth-Century Fiction 23 (June): 93–98.
Gribben, Alan.
1980. Mark Twain’s Library: A Reconstruction. 2 vols. Boston: G. K. Hall and Co.
1985. “ ‘I Did Wish Tom Sawyer Was There’: Boy-Book Elements in Tom Sawyer and Huckleberry Finn.” In Sattelmeyer and Crowley, 149–70.
Griska, Joseph M., Jr. 1977. “Two New Joel Chandler Harris Reviews of Mark Twain.” American Literature 48 (January): 584–89.
✱ Grose, Francis. 1785. A Classical Dictionary of the Vulgar Tongue. London: S. Hooper. PH of Clemens’s own copy, with marginalia, in CU-MARK, courtesy of Justin G. Turner and Howard Baetzhold.
Gunn, John C.
1836. Gunn’s Domestic Medicine, or Poor Man’s Friend, in the Hours of Affliction, Pain and Sickness. 8th ed. Springfield, Ohio: John M. Gallagher.
1867. Gunn’s New Family Physician: or, Home Book of Health. 100th ed. Cincinnati, New York: Moore, Wilstach and Baldwin.
Hale, Sarah J., and Louis A. Godey. 1856. “The Art of Making Wax Fruit and Flowers.” Godey’s Lady’s Book and Magazine 52 (January): 20–22.
Hall, Edward H. 1867. Appletons’ Hand-Book of American Travel. New York: D. Appleton and Co.
Hapgood, Olive C. 1893. School Needlework. Boston: Ginn and Co.
Hardwick, Charles. 1872. Traditions, Superstitions, and Folk-lore. Manchester: A. Ireland and Co.
Harris, Joel Chandler.
1883a. Nights with Uncle Remus. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company.
[begin page 1135]
1883b. “At Teague Poteet’s. A Sketch of the Hog Mountain Range.” Parts 1 and 2. Century Magazine 26 (May and June): 137–50, 185–94.
1885. “To the Editors of the Critic.” Letter dated 21 November. Critic, n.s., 4 (28 November): 253.
Harris, Julia Collier. 1918. The Life and Letters of Joel Chandler Harris. Boston and New York: Houghton Mifflin Company.
Harris, N. Dwight. 1904. The History of Negro Servitude in Illinois and of the Slavery Agitation in That State, 1719–1864. Reprint. New York: Negro Universities Press.
Haupt, Clyde V. 1994. “Huckleberry Finn” on Film: Film and Television Adaptations of Mark Twain’s Novel, 1920–1993. Jefferson, N.C.: McFarland and Co.
Hauptman, William, and Roger Miller. 1986. Big River: The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. A Musical Play. New York: Grove Press.
Hay, John M.
1871. Pike County Ballads and Other Pieces. Boston: James R. Osgood and Co.
1872. “Mark Twain at Steinway Hall.” New York Tribune, 25 January, 5.
Hazlitt, W. Carew.
1890. Studies in Jocular Literature: A Popular Subject More Closely Considered. London: Elliot Stock.
1905. Faiths and Folklore: A Dictionary of National Beliefs, Superstitions and Popular Customs, Past and Current, with Their Classical and Foreign Analogues, Described and Illustrated. 2 vols. London: Reeves and Turner.
Hearn, Michael Patrick.
1981. “Mark Twain, E. W. Kemble, and Huckleberry Finn.” American Book Collector 2 (November–December): 14–19.
2001. The Annotated Huckleberry Finn. New York: W. W. Norton and Co.
Heitman, Francis B. 1903. Historical Register and Dictionary of the United States Army, from Its Organization, September 29, 1789, to March 2, 1903. 2 vols. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office.
Helper, Hinton Rowan. 1857. The Impending Crisis of the South: How to Meet It. New York: Burdick Brothers. Citations are to the 1968 reprint edition, edited by George M. Frederickson, Cambridge: Belknap Press of Harvard University Press.
Hemingway, Ernest. 1935. Green Hills of Africa. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons.
[Henley, William Ernest.] 1884. “Novels of the Week.” Athenaeum 2983 (27 December): 855. Reprinted in Anderson and Sanderson, 120–21.
[begin page 1136]
Herkimer County Historical Society. 1923. The Story of the Typewriter, 1873–1923. Published in Commemoration of the Fiftieth Anniversary of the Invention of the Writing Machine. Herkimer, N.Y.: Herkimer Historical Society.
HF 1985. 1985. Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. Edited by Walter Blair and Victor Fischer. The Mark Twain Library. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
HF 1988. 1988. Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. Edited by Walter Blair and Victor Fischer, with the assistance of Dahlia Armon and Harriet Elinor Smith. The Works of Mark Twain. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
HF 2001. 2001. Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. Edited by Victor Fischer and Lin Salamo, with Harriet Elinor Smith and the late Walter Blair. The Mark Twain Library. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
HF 2003. 2003. Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. Edited by Victor Fischer and Lin Salamo, with the late Walter Blair. The Works of Mark Twain. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press. Also online at MTPO.
HF 2010. 2010. Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. Edited by Victor Fischer and Lin Salamo, with Harriet Elinor Smith and the late Walter Blair. 125th anniversary edition, including “Mark Twain on Tour.” The Mark Twain Library. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
HH&T. 1969. Mark Twain’s Hannibal, Huck & Tom. Edited by Walter Blair. The Mark Twain Papers. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
HHR. 1969. Mark Twain’s Correspondence with Henry Huttleston Rogers, 1893–1909. Edited by Lewis Leary. The Mark Twain Papers. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
Higginson, Thomas Wentworth. 1870. Army Life in a Black Regiment. Citations are to the 1960 reprint edition, Michigan State University Press.
Highfill, Phillip H., Jr. 1961. “Incident in Huckleberry Finn.” Mark Twain Journal 11 (Fall): 6.
Hildreth, Richard. 1856. Archy Moore, The White Slave; or, Memoirs of a Fugitive. New York: Miller, Orton, and Mulligan. Citations are to the 1969 reprint edition, New York: Negro Universities Press.
Hill, Hamlin. 1964. Mark Twain and Elisha Bliss. Columbia: University of Missouri Press.
Hill, Richard. 1991. “Overreaching: Critical Agenda and the Ending of Adventures of Huckleberry Finn.” In Graff and Phelan 1995, 312–34.
Hilton, G. W., R. Plummer, and J. Jobé. 1976. The Illustrated History of Paddle Steamers. Drawings by Carlo Demand. Lausanne: Edita; New York: Two Continents Pub. Group.
Hirsh, James. 1992. “Samuel Clemens and the Ghost of Shakespeare.” Studies in the Novel 24 (Fall): 251–72.
Hirst, Robert H. 2000. “Who Was ‘G. G., Chief of Ordnance’?” Bancroftiana (Fall): 8, 11.
Hoag, Gerald. 1989. “The Delicate Art of Geography: The Whereabouts of the Phelps Plantation in Huckleberry Finn.” English Language Notes 26 (June): 63–66.
[begin page 1137]
Hoffman, Daniel G. 1960. “Jim’s Magic: Black or White.” American Literature 32 (March): 47–54.
✱ Holcombe, Return I. 1884. History of Marion County, Missouri. St. Louis: E. F. Perkins. Citations are to the 1979 reprint edition, Hannibal: Marion County Historical Society.
Hooper, Johnson J.
1845. Some Adventures of Captain Simon Suggs, Late of the Tallapoosa Volunteers; . . . and Other Alabama Sketches. Philadelphia: Carey and Hart.
1851. The Widow Rugby’s Husband. Philadelphia: T. B. Peterson and Brothers.
Howell, Elmo.
1968. “Huckleberry Finn in Mississippi.” Louisiana Studies 7 (Summer): 167–72.
1970. “Mark Twain’s Arkansas.” Arkansas Historical Quarterly 29 (Autumn): 195–208.
Howells, William Dean.
1910. My Mark Twain: Reminiscences and Criticisms. New York: Harper and Brothers.
1960. The Complete Plays of W. D. Howells. Edited by Walter J. Meserve. Under the general editorship of William M. Gibson and George Arms. New York: New York University Press.
Hughes, Langston, and Arna Bontemps, eds. 1958. The Book of Negro Folklore. New York: Dodd, Mead, and Co.
Hughes, Langston, Milton Meltzer, C. Eric Lincoln, and Jon Michael Spencer. 1995. Pictorial History of African Americans. New York: Crown Publishers.
Hundley, Daniel R. 1860. Social Relations in Our Southern States. New York: Henry B. Price. Citations are to the 1979 reprint edition, edited, with an introduction, by William J. Cooper, Jr., Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press.
Hunter, Jim. 1963. “Mark Twain and the Boy-Book in 19th-Century America.” College English 24 (March): 430–38.
Hunter, Louis C., with Beatrice Jones Hunter. 1949. Steamboats on the Western Rivers: An Economic and Technological History. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
Hunting, Robert. 1958. “Mark Twain’s Arkansaw Yahoos.” Modern Language Notes 73 (April): 264–68.
Hurd, John Codman. 1858–62. The Law of Freedom and Bondage in the United States. 2 vols. Boston: Little, Brown and Co.
[begin page 1138]
Hyatt, Harry Middleton. 1965. Folk-lore from Adams County Illinois. Memoirs of the Alma Egan Hyatt Foundation. 2d rev. ed. Hannibal, Mo.: Harry Middleton Hyatt.
ICRL. Center for Research Libraries, Chicago, Ill.
Inds. 1989. Huck Finn and Tom Sawyer among the Indians, and Other Unfinished Stories. Foreword and notes by Dahlia Armon and Walter Blair. The Mark Twain Library. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press. Also online at MTPO.
IU. University of Illinois, Urbana, Ill.
Ives, Sumner. 1950. “A Theory of Literary Dialect.” Tulane Studies in English 2: 137–82.
Jackson, Bruce, ed. 1967. The Negro and His Folklore in Nineteenth Century Periodicals. Austin: University of Texas Press.
Jacobi, Charles Thomas. 1888. The Printers’ Vocabulary: A Collection of Some 2500 Technical Terms, Phrases, Abbreviations and Other Expressions Mostly Relating to Letterpress Printing. London: Chiswick Press.
Jacobs, Donald M., ed. 1993. Courage and Conscience: Black and White Abolitionists in Boston. Bloomington: Indiana University Press.
James, U. P. 1857. River Guide: Containing Descriptions of All the Cities, Towns, and Principal Objects of Interest, on the Navigable Waters of the Mississippi Valley. Cincinnati: U. P. James.
Janows, Jill, and Leslie Lee. 2000. “Born to Trouble: Adventures of Huckleberry Finn.” Part one of the four-part Public Broadcasting System series, Culture Shock. Videocassette, produced by the WGBH Educational Foundation, Boston.
JLC. Jane Lampton Clemens.
Johannsen, Albert. 1950. The House of Beadle and Adams and Its Dime and Nickel Novels. 2 vols. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press.
John, Arthur. 1981. The Best Years of the “Century”: Richard Watson Gilder, “Scribner’s Monthly,” and “Century Magazine,” 1870–1909. Urbana: University of Illinois Press.
Johnson, Charles A. 1955. The Frontier Camp Meeting: Religion’s Harvest Time. Dallas: Southern Methodist University Press.
Johnson, Merle. 1935. A Bibliography of the Works of Mark Twain, Samuel Langhorne Clemens. 2d ed., rev. and enl. New York: Harper and Brothers.
Jones, Joseph. 1946. “The ‘Duke’s’ Tooth-Powder Racket: A Note on Huckleberry Finn.” Modern Language Notes 61 (November): 468–69.
Jussim, Estelle. 1974. Visual Communication and the Graphic Arts: Photographic Technologies in the Nineteenth Century. New York and London: R. R. Bowker Company.
[begin page 1139]
Keeler, Ralph. 1871. “From Vicksburg to Memphis.” Every Saturday 16 (September): 284–86.
Kelly, Walter C. 1953. Of Me I Sing. New York: Dial Press.
Kemble, E. W. 1930. “Illustrating Huckleberry Finn.” Colophon, Part 1 (February): [41–48].
Kerr, Howard. 1972. Mediums, and Spirit-Rappers, and Roaring Radicals: Spiritualism in American Literature, 1850–1900. Urbana: University of Illinois Press.
Keynes, Simon. 1999. “Heptarchy.” In The Blackwell Encyclopedia of Anglo-Saxon England, edited by Michael Lapidge et al. Oxford: Blackwell.
King, Moses. 1893. King’s Handbook of New York City: An Outline History and Description of the American Metropolis. 2d ed. Boston: Moses King.
Kirkham, E. Bruce. 1969. “Huck and Hamlet: An Examination of Twain’s Use of Shakespeare.” Mark Twain Journal 14 (Summer): 17–19.
Kiskis, Michael J., ed. 1990. Mark Twain’s Own Autobiography: The Chapters from the “North American Review.” Wisconsin Studies in American Literature, edited by William L. Andrews. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.
Koundakjian. Collection of Theodore H. Koundakjian.
Kruse, Horst H.
1967. “Annie and Huck: A Note on The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn.” American Literature 39 (May): 207–14.
1981. Mark Twain and “Life on the Mississippi.” Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press.
Kuralt, Charles. 1985. Quoted in Edward Ziegler, “Huck Finn at 100,” Reader’s Digest 126 (February): 101.
L1. 1988. Mark Twain’s Letters, Volume 1: 1853–1866. Edited by Edgar Marquess Branch, Michael B. Frank, and Kenneth M. Sanderson. The Mark Twain Papers. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press. Also online at MTPO.
L2. 1990. Mark Twain’s Letters, Volume 2: 1867–1868. Edited by Harriet Elinor Smith, Richard Bucci, and Lin Salamo. The Mark Twain Papers. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press. Also online at MTPO.
L3. 1992. Mark Twain’s Letters, Volume 3: 1869. Edited by Victor Fischer, Michael B. Frank, and Dahlia Armon. The Mark Twain Papers. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press. Also online at MTPO.
L4. 1995. Mark Twain’s Letters, Volume 4: 1870–1871. Edited by Victor Fischer, Michael B. Frank, and Lin Salamo. The Mark Twain Papers. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press. Also online at MTPO.
L5. 1997. Mark Twain’s Letters, Volume 5: 1872–1873. Edited by Lin Salamo and Harriet Elinor Smith. The Mark Twain Papers. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press. Also online at MTPO.
[begin page 1140]
L6. 2002. Mark Twain’s Letters, Volume 6: 1874–1875. Edited by Michael B. Frank and Harriet Elinor Smith. The Mark Twain Papers. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press. Also online at MTPO.
Letters 1876–1880. 2007. Mark Twain’s Letters, 1876–1880. Edited by Victor Fischer, Michael B. Frank, and Harriet Elinor Smith, with Sharon K. Goetz, Benjamin Griffin, and Leslie Myrick. Mark Twain Project Online. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press. [To locate a letter text from its citation, select the Letters link at http://www.marktwainproject.org, then use the “Date Written” links in the left-hand column.]
Landau, Sidney I. 1984. Dictionaries: The Art and Craft of Lexicography. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons.
Landon, Melville D. [Eli Perkins, pseud.]. 1891. Thirty Years of Wit. New York: Cassell Publishing Company.
[Lathrop, George Parsons.] 1883. “Mark Twain’s Life on the Mississippi.” Atlantic Monthly 52 (September): 406–8.
LE. 1962. Mark Twain: Letters from the Earth. Edited by Bernard DeVoto, with a preface by Henry Nash Smith. New York: Harper and Row.
Leary, Lewis. 1974. “Troubles with Mark Twain: Some Considerations on Consistency.” Studies in American Fiction 2: 89–103.
✱ Lecky, William Edward Hartpole. 1874. History of European Morals from Augustus to Charlemagne. 2 vols. New York: D. Appleton and Co.
Leonard, James S., Thomas A. Tenney, and Thadious M. Davis, eds. 1992. Satire or Evasion? Black Perspectives on “Huckleberry Finn.” Durham: Duke University Press.
Litwack, Leon. 1980. Been in the Storm So Long: The Aftermath of Slavery. New York: Vintage Books.
Litwack, Leon F. 1998. Trouble in Mind: Black Southerners in the Age of Jim Crow. New York: Alfred A. Knopf.
LLMT. 1949. The Love Letters of Mark Twain. Edited by Dixon Wecter. New York: Harper and Brothers.
LNT. Tulane University, New Orleans, La.
Long, Esmond R. 1962. A History of American Pathology. Springfield: Charles C. Thomas.
Lorch, Fred W. 1968. The Trouble Begins at Eight: Mark Twain’s Lecture Tours. Ames: Iowa State University Press.
Lott, Eric. 1995. “Mr. Clemens and Jim Crow: Twain, Race, and Blackface.” In Robinson 1995, 129–52.
Lucas, E. V.
1910. “E. V. Lucas and Twain at a ‘Punch Dinner.’ ” Bookman 38 (June): 116–17.
1929. Notes dated 1 February. RPB-JH.
Lynn, Kenneth S.
1958. “Huck and Jim.” Yale Review 47 (Spring): 421–31. In Lynn 1961, 211–15.
1961. “Huckleberry Finn”: Text, Sources, and Criticism. New York: Harcourt, Brace and World.
[begin page 1141]
Lytle, William M., comp. 1952. Merchant Steam Vessels of the United States, 1807–1868. Edited by Forrest R. Holdcamper. Publication no. 6. Mystic, Conn.: Steamship Historical Society of America.
MacCann, Donnarae, and Gloria Woodard, eds. 1985. The Black American in Books for Children: Readings in Racism. 2d ed. Metuchen, N.J.: Scarecrow Press.
McCullough, Joseph B., and Janice McIntire-Strasburg. 1999. Mark Twain at the Buffalo “Express”: Articles and Sketches by America’s Favorite Humorist, Mark Twain. DeKalb: Northern Illinois University Press.
McCurdy, Frances Lea. 1969. Stump, Bar, and Pulpit: Speechmaking on the Missouri Frontier. Columbia: University of Missouri Press.
McDougall, Marion Gleason. 1891. Fugitive Slaves (1619–1865). Publications of the Society for the Collegiate Instruction of Women, Fay House Monographs no. 3. Boston: Ginn and Co.
McIlwaine, Shields. 1939. The Southern Poor-White from Lubberland to Tobacco Road. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press.
Mackay, Alexander. 1849. The Western World; or, Travels in the United States in 1846–47. Philadelphia: Lea and Blanchard.
MacKellar, Thomas.
1867. The American Printer: A Manual of Typography. 3d ed. Philadelphia: MacKellar, Smiths and Jordan.
1882. The American Printer: A Manual of Typography. 13th ed. Philadelphia: MacKellar, Smiths and Jordan.
1885. The American Printer: A Manual of Typography. 15th ed., rev. and enl. Philadelphia: MacKellar, Smiths and Jordan. Citations are to the 1977 reprint edition, Nevada City, Calif.: Harold A. Berliner.
MacKethan, Lucinda H. 1984. “Huck Finn and the Slave Narratives: Lighting Out as Design.” Southern Review 20 (April): 247–64.
McKinney, John. 1981. “Tom Sawyer’s Island.” Islands 1 (October-November): 60–65.
Mailloux, Steven. 1989. Rhetorical Power. Ithaca: Cornell University Press.
Maitland, James. 1891. The American Slang Dictionary. Chicago: R. J. Kittredge and Co.
Manierre, William R. 1968. “On Keeping the Raftsmen’s Passage in Huckleberry Finn.” English Language Notes 6 (December): 118–22.
✱ Marryat, Frederick. 1839. A Diary in America, with Remarks on Its Institutions. New York: William H. Colyer.
[begin page 1142]
Martin, Francis, Jr. 1976. “Edward Windsor Kemble, a Master of Pen and Ink.” American Art Review 3 (January-February): 54–67.
Marx, Leo.
1957. “The Pilot and the Passenger: Landscape Conventions and the Style of Huckleberry Finn.” American Literature 28 (January): 129–46.
1967. “Introduction and notes.” In SLC 1967.
Masterson, James R. 1946. “Travelers’ Tales of Colonial Natural History (Concluded).” Journal of American Folklore 59 (April–June): 174–88.
Mathews, Anne. 1838. Memoirs of Charles Mathews, Comedian. 4 vols. London: Richard Bentley.
Mathews, Mitford M., ed. 1951. A Dictionary of Americanisms on Historical Principles. 2 vols. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Matthews, Brander.
1885. “Huckleberry Finn.” Saturday Review 59 (31 January): 153–54. Reprinted in Anderson and Sanderson 1971, 121–25.
1922. “Memories of Mark Twain.” In The Tocsin of Revolt and Other Essays, 253–94. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons.
May, Earl Chapin. 1932. The Circus from Rome to Ringling. New York: Duffield and Green.
MBAt. Boston Athenaeum, Boston, Mass.
MCo. Concord Free Public Library, Concord, Mass.
Meine, Franklin J. 1960. “Some Notes on the First Editions of ‘Huck Finn.’ ” American Book Collector 10 (June): 31–34.
Mencken, H. L.
1909. “Novels and Other Books—Mostly Bad.” Smart Set 28 (August): 156–57.
1910. “The Greatest of American Writers.” Smart Set 31 (June): 153–54.
Merrick, George Byron. 1909. Old Times on the Upper Mississippi: The Recollections of a Steamboat Pilot from 1854 to 1863. Cleveland: Arthur H. Clark Company.
MH-H. Harvard University, Houghton Library, Cambridge, Mass.
Michaelson, L. W. 1961. “Four Emmeline Grangerfords.” Mark Twain Journal 11 (Fall): 10–12.
✱ Michelet, Jules. 1848. Historical View of the French Revolution. Translated by Charles Cocks. London: H. G. Bohn.
Mieder, Wolfgang, Stewart A. Kingsbury, and Kelsie B. Harder, eds. 1992. A Dictionary of American Proverbs. New York: Oxford University Press.
[begin page 1143]
Miller, Michael G. 1980. “Geography and Structure in Huckleberry Finn.” Studies in the Novel 12 (Fall): 192–209.
Minor, Mary Willis. 1898. “How to Keep Off Witches (as Related by a Negro),” in “Notes and Queries.” Journal of American Folklore 11 (January–March): 76.
Minstrel Gags. 1875. Minstrel Gags and End Men’s Handbook. New York: Dick and Fitzgerald.
Missouri v. Owsley. 1845. State of Missouri v. William P. Owsley, File 3873. Marion County Circuit Court, Palmyra, Missouri.
Moody, Richard, ed. 1966. Dramas from the American Theatre 1762–1909. Cleveland and New York: World Publishing Company.
Moore, Chauncey O. 1964. Ballads and Folk Songs of the Southwest. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press.
Moore, Julia A. 1928. The Sweet Singer of Michigan. Edited by Walter Blair. Chicago: Pascal Covici.
Moore, Olin Harris. 1922. “Mark Twain and Don Quixote.” PMLA 37 (June): 324–46.
Morris, Courtand P.
1930. “Philadelphia Business Man Original ‘Huck’ Finn of E. W. Kemble’s Drawings for Mark Twain’s Classic; Posed as Other Characters in Parents’ Old Clothes.” Clipping from an unidentified newspaper, conjecturally dated 18 May 1930, PH in CU-MARK; courtesy of Louis J. Budd and the Rare Book Room of the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign.
1938. “The Model for Huck Finn.” Mark Twain Journal 2 (Summer–Fall): 22–23.
✱ Morrison, D. H., ed. 1882. The Treasury of Song for the Home Circle: The Richest, Best-Loved Gems. Philadelphia: Hubbard Brothers.
Morrison, Toni. 1996. “Introduction.” In SLC 1996.
Mott, Frank Luther.
1931. A History of American Magazines, 1741–1850. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
1957. A History of American Magazines, 1865–1885. 2d printing [1st printing, 1938]. Cambridge: Belknap Press of Harvard University Press.
MoU. University of Missouri, Columbia, Mo.
MS. Manuscript.
MS1. 1876–1880. The first half of the Huckleberry Finn manuscript, comprising pages numbered 1–663, written over a four-year period, 1876–1880. Paper and ink differences distinguish two subsections of MS1: MS1a (1–446), all
[begin page 1144]
MS2. 1883. The second half of the Huckleberry Finn manuscript, written in the summer of 1883, comprising pages numbered 160–787 (continuing the pagination of TS1, the typescript made from MS1) and pages numbered 81–A-1 through 81–60. Now at the Buffalo and Erie County Public Library (NBuBE).
MSM. 1969. Mark Twain’s Mysterious Stranger Manuscripts. Edited by William M. Gibson. The Mark Twain Papers. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
MTA. 1924. Mark Twain’s Autobiography. Edited by Albert Bigelow Paine. 2 vols. New York: Harper and Brothers.
MTB. 1912. Mark Twain: A Biography. By Albert Bigelow Paine. 3 vols. New York: Harper and Brothers. Volume numbers in citations are to this edition; page numbers are the same in all editions.
MTBus. 1946. Mark Twain, Business Man. Edited by Samuel Charles Webster. Boston: Little, Brown and Co.
MTE. 1940. Mark Twain in Eruption. Edited by Bernard DeVoto. New York: Harper and Brothers.
MTH. 1947. Mark Twain and Hawaii. By Walter Francis Frear. Chicago: Lakeside Press.
MTHL. 1960. Mark Twain–Howells Letters. Edited by Henry Nash Smith and William M. Gibson, with the assistance of Frederick Anderson. 2 vols. Cambridge: Belknap Press of Harvard University Press.
MTL. 1917. Mark Twain’s Letters. Edited by Albert Bigelow Paine. 2 vols. New York: Harper and Brothers.
MTLBowen. 1941. Mark Twain’s Letters to Will Bowen. Edited by Theodore Hornberger. Austin: University of Texas Press.
MTLP. 1967. Mark Twain’s Letters to His Publishers, 1867–1894. Edited by Hamlin Hill. The Mark Twain Papers. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
MTMF. 1949. Mark Twain to Mrs. Fairbanks. Edited by Dixon Wecter. San Marino, Calif.: Huntington Library.
MTPO. Mark Twain Project Online. Edited by the Mark Twain Project. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press. [Launched 1 November 2007.] http://www.marktwainproject.org.
MTS.
1910. Mark Twain’s Speeches. Edited by Albert Bigelow Paine. New York: Harper and Brothers.
1923. Mark Twain’s Speeches. Edited by Albert Bigelow Paine. New York: Harper and Brothers.
[begin page 1145]
MTTB. 1940. Mark Twain’s Travels with Mr. Brown. Edited by Franklin Walker and G. Ezra Dane. New York: Alfred A. Knopf.
MU. University of Massachusetts, Amherst, Mass.
✱ Murray, Charles Augustus. 1839. Travels in North America during the Years 1834, 1835, & 1836. 2 vols. London: Richard Bentley.
Musick, Ruth Ann. 1948. “The Tune the Old Cow Died On.” Hoosier Folk-lore 7 (December): 105–6.
N&J1. 1975. Mark Twain’s Notebooks & Journals, Volume 1 (1855–1873). Edited by Frederick Anderson, Michael B. Frank, and Kenneth M. Sanderson. The Mark Twain Papers. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
N&J2. 1975. Mark Twain’s Notebooks & Journals, Volume 2 (1877–1883). Edited by Frederick Anderson, Lin Salamo, and Bernard Stein. The Mark Twain Papers. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
N&J3. 1979. Mark Twain’s Notebooks & Journals, Volume 3 (1883–1891). Edited by Robert Pack Browning, Michael B. Frank, and Lin Salamo. The Mark Twain Papers. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
Nathan, Hans. 1962. Dan Emmett and the Rise of Early Negro Minstrelsy. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press.
Naylor, Benjamin. 1851. Naylor’s System of Teaching Geography. Philadelphia: T. Ellwood Chapman.
NBuBE. Buffalo and Erie County Public Library, Buffalo, N.Y.
NBuU. State University of New York at Buffalo, Buffalo, N.Y.
NcD. Duke University, Durham, N.C.
Neider, Charles, ed. 1961. Mark Twain: Life As I Find It. Garden City, N.Y.: Hanover House.
Neilson, William Allen, Thomas A. Knott, and Paul W. Carhart, eds. 1945. Webster’s New International Dictionary of the English Language. 2d ed. unabridged. Springfield, Mass.: G. and C. Merriam Company.
NElmHi. Chemung County Historical Society, Elmira, N.Y.
NjP-SC. Princeton University, Princeton Special Collection, Princeton, N.J.
NN. New York Public Library, New York, N.Y.
NNAL. American Academy of Arts and Letters, New York, N.Y.
NN-BGC. New York Public Library, Albert A. and Henry W. Berg Collection, New York, N.Y.
NNC. Columbia University, New York, N.Y.
NNPM. Pierpont Morgan Library, New York, N.Y.
Northup, Solomon. 1853. Twelve Years a Slave. Auburn, N.Y.: Derby and Miller.
[begin page 1146]
Norwood, William Frederick. 1944. Medical Education in the United States before the Civil War. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press.
NPV. Vassar College, Poughkeepsie, N.Y.
O’Connor, William Van. 1955. “Why Huckleberry Finn Is Not the Great American Novel.” College English 17 (October): 6–10.
Oe, Kenzaburo. 1994. Quoted in Carlin Romano, “Nobel to Japanese writer; Oe’s political themes evoke a deep unease,” Houston Chronicle, 14 October, A20, and in Teresa Watanabe, “Japanese Writer Wins Nobel in Literature,” San Francisco Chronicle, 14 October, A1, A9.
OED.
1933. The Oxford English Dictionary: Being a Corrected Re-issue, with an Introduction, Supplement, and Bibliography, of A New English Dictionary on Historical Principles. Prepared by James A. H. Murray, Henry Bradley, W. A. Craigie, and C. T. Onions. 13 vols. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
1989. The Oxford English Dictionary. 2d ed. Prepared by J. A. Simpson and E. S. C. Weiner. 20 vols. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
Oehlschlaeger, Fritz H. 1981. “Huck Finn and the Meaning of Shame.” Mark Twain Journal 20 (Summer): 13–14.
OHi. Ohio Historical Society, Columbus, Ohio.
OLC. Olivia Langdon Clemens (née Olivia Louise Langdon).
OLL. Olivia Louise Langdon.
Opitz, Glenn B. 1984. Dictionary of American Sculptors: 18th Century to the Present. Poughkeepsie, N.Y.: Apollo.
OSC (Olivia Susan [Susy] Clemens).
1885–86. Untitled biography of her father, MS of 131 pages, annotated by SLC, ViU. Published in OSC 1985, 83–225; in part in MTA, vol. 2, passim; and in Salsbury 1965, passim.
1985. Papa: An Intimate Biography of Mark Twain. Edited by Charles Neider. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday and Co.
Ottley, Roi, and William J. Weatherby, eds. 1969. The Negro in New York: An Informal Social History, 1626–1940. New York: Praeger Publishers.
Paine, Albert Bigelow. 1923. Introduction to What Is Man? And Other Essays, by Samuel Langhorne Clemens. Volume 26 of the Writings of Mark Twain, Definitive Edition. New York: Gabriel Wells.
PAM. Pamela Ann Moffett.
P&P. 1979. The Prince and the Pauper. Edited by Victor Fischer and Lin Salamo, with the assistance of Mary Jane Jones. The Works of Mark Twain. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
[begin page 1147]
Partridge, Eric. 1967. A Dictionary of Slang and Unconventional English. 6th ed. New York: Macmillan Company.
Pasko, Wesley Washington. 1894. American Dictionary of Printing and Bookmaking. New York: Howard Lockwood and Co. Citations are to the 1967 reprint edition, Detroit: Gale Research Company.
Paulding, James Kirke. 1832. Westward Ho! A Tale. New York: J. and J. Harper.
[Pease, Lute]. 1895. “Mark Twain Talks.” Portland Oregonian, 11 August, 10. Reprinted in Budd 1977, 51–53. Pease later admitted that he had supplied some of Mark Twain’s words after the interview was unavoidably cut short, but that Mark Twain had later telegraphed him, “You said it better than I could have said it myself” (Shirley M. Friedman, “Mark Twain’s Favorite Reporter,” Editor & Publisher 82 [19 February 1949]: 10).
Penick, James Lal, Jr. 1981. The New Madrid Earthquakes. Rev. ed. Columbia: University of Missouri Press.
Pennington, J. W. C. 1849. The Fugitive Blacksmith; or, Events in the History of James W. C. Pennington. In Bontemps 1969, 193–267.
Penny, Virginia. 1863. The Employments of Women: A Cyclopedia of Women’s Work. Boston: Walker, Wise, and Co.
Pettit, Arthur G. 1974. Mark Twain and the South. Lexington: University Press of Kentucky.
PH. Photocopy.
Pierson, Hamilton W. 1881. In the Brush; or, Old-Time Social, Political, and Religious Life in the Southwest. New York: D. Appleton and Co.
Pike, Martha V., and Janice Gray Armstrong. 1980. A Time to Mourn: Expressions of Grief in Nineteenth Century America. Stony Brook, N.Y.: The Museums at Stony Brook.
Pitcher, E. W. 1991. “Huck Finn as Sarah Williams: A Precedent for the Discovery Trick.” Notes and Queries, n.s., 38 (September): 324.
Plutzky, Jorge. 1998. Unpublished article and personal communication by Dr. Jorge Plutzky, Boston, Mass. PH in CU-MARK.
Poe, Edgar Allan. 1978. Collected Works of Edgar Allan Poe. Edited by Thomas Ollive Mabbott. 3 vols. Cambridge: Belknap Press of Harvard University Press.
Pond, James B. 1900. Eccentricities of Genius: Memories of Famous Men and Women of the Platform and Stage. New York: G. W. Dillingham Company.
Powers, Lyall. 1985. “Mark Twain and the Future of Picaresque.” In Giddings 1985, 155–75.
[begin page 1148]
Puckett, Newbell Niles. 1926. Folk Beliefs of the Southern Negro. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press. Citations are to the 1968 reprint edition, New York: Negro Universities Press.
Quarles, John A. 1855. Deed of Emancipation. Recorded on 14 November by George Glenn, Clerk, Monroe County Circuit Court, Paris, Missouri. Monroe County Deed Records, Book O, 240.
Quick, Herbert, and Edward Quick. 1926. Mississippi Steamboatin’. New York: Henry Holt and Co.
Radford, E., and M. A. Radford. 1969. Encyclopedia of Superstitions. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood Press.
Railton, Stephen. 1987. “Jim and Mark Twain: What Do They Stan’ For?” Virginia Quarterly Review 63 (Summer): 393–408.
Railton, Stephen, et al. 2002. “Reviews of Huckleberry Finn.” The Electronic Text Center, University of Virginia. http://etext.lib.virginia.edu/railton/huckfinn/hucrevhp.html. Accessed 30 November 2002.
Ramsay, Robert L., and Frances G. Emberson. 1963. A Mark Twain Lexicon. New York: Russell and Russell.
Rasmussen, R. Kent. 1995. Mark Twain A to Z. New York: Oxford University Press.
Reade, Charles. 1861. The Cloister and the Hearth. London: Trübner and Co.
Redpath, James. 1859. The Roving Editor: or, Talks with Slaves in the Southern States. New York: A. B. Burdick. Citations are to the 1968 reprint edition, New York: Negro Universities Press.
Reed, E. J., ed. 1861. Transactions of the Institution of Naval Architects. Vol. 2. London: Institution of Naval Architects.
Reif, Rita. 1991. “The First Half of ‘Huck Finn’ Manuscript Is Discovered.” New York Times, 14 February, A2, B1–B2.
Reilly, Bernard F., Jr. 1993. The Art of the Antislavery Movement. Vol. 2. In Jacobs 1993, 47–74.
Revised Statutes.
1835. Revised Statutes of the State of Missouri, Revised and Digested by the Eighth General Assembly. St. Louis: Printed at the Argus Office.
1845. The Revised Statutes of the State of Missouri, Revised and Digested by the Thirteenth General Assembly. St. Louis: Printed for the State by J. W. Dougherty.
RI 1993. 1993. Roughing It. Edited by Harriet Elinor Smith, Edgar Marquess Branch, Lin Salamo, and Robert Pack Browning. The Works of Mark Twain. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press. This edition supersedes the one published in 1972. Also online at MTPO.
[begin page 1149]
Ringwalt, J. Luther, ed. 1871. American Encyclopaedia of Printing. Philadelphia: Menamin and Ringwalt.
Roberts, John W. 1989. From Trickster to Badman: The Black Folk Hero in Slavery and Freedom. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press.
Robinson, Fayette. 1848. “Supplication.” Graham’s American Monthly Magazine of Literature and Art 33 (November): frontispiece, 267.
Robinson, Forrest G., ed. 1995. The Cambridge Companion to Mark Twain. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Rodney, Robert M., ed. 1982. Mark Twain International: A Bibliography and Interpretation of His Worldwide Popularity. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood Press.
Rolfe, William J., ed. 1898. Shakespeare’s Tragedy of Hamlet, Prince of Denmark. New York: American Book Company.
Ross, Joan M. 1937. Post-Mortem Appearances. 3d ed. London: Oxford University Press.
Roueché, Berton. 1960. “Annals of Medicine: Alcohol, III–The Bird of Warning.” New Yorker 35 (23 January): 78–106.
RPB-JH. Brown University, John Hay Library of Rare Books and Special Collections, Providence, R.I.
Rubin, Louis D., Jr. 1967. The Teller in the Tale. Seattle: University of Washington Press.
Rulon, Curt Morris. 1967. “The Dialects in Huckleberry Finn.” Ph.D. diss., University of Iowa, Iowa City.
Saintine, Joseph Xavier Boniface. 1848. Picciola. The Prisoner of Fenestrella; or, Captivity Captive. Philadelphia: Lea and Blanchard.
Salm. Collection of Peter A. Salm.
Salsbury, Edith Colgate, ed. 1965. Susy and Mark Twain: Family Dialogues. New York: Harper and Row.
Salzman, Jack, ed. 1976. Prospects. New York: Burt Franklin and Co.
Sanborn, Franklin B. 1885. “Mark Twain and Lord Lytton.” Springfield (Mass.) Republican, 27 April, 2–3.
S&B. 1967. Mark Twain’s Satires & Burlesques. Edited by Franklin R. Rogers. The Mark Twain Papers. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
Sattelmeyer, Robert, and J. Donald Crowley, eds. 1985. One Hundred Years of “Huckleberry Finn”: The Boy, His Book, and American Culture. Columbia: University of Missouri Press.
Scharf, J. Thomas. 1883. History of Saint Louis City and County, from the Earliest Periods to the Present Day. 2 vols. Philadelphia: Louis H. Everts and Co.
[begin page 1150]
Schirer, Thomas. 1984. Mark Twain and the Theatre. Nuremburg: Hans Carl.
Schmitz, Neil. 1971. “Twain, Huckleberry Finn, and the Reconstruction.” American Studies 12 (Spring): 59–67.
Schultz, Christian. 1810. Travels on an Inland Voyage through the States of New-York, Pennsylvania, Virginia, Ohio, Kentucky, and Tennessee . . . Performed in the Years 1807 and 1808. 2 vols. New York: Isaac Riley.
Scott, Arthur L. 1955. “The Century Magazine Edits Huckleberry Finn, 1884–1885.” American Literature 27 (November) 356–62.
Scott, Walter.
1822. The Fortunes of Nigel. 3 vols. Edinburgh: Archibald Constable and Co.
1823. Quentin Durward. 3 vols. Edinburgh: Archibald Constable and Co.
✱ 1827. The Poetical Works of Sir Walter Scott. 5 vols. Philadelphia: J. Maxwell.
✱ 1842–47. Quentin Durward. Vol. 8 of The Waverley Novels, Abbotsford Edition. Edinburgh: Archibald Constable and Co.
✱ 1871. The Lady of the Lake. Edinburgh: John Ross and Co.
Seabrook, E. B. 1867. “The Poor Whites of the South.” Galaxy 4 (October): 681–90.
Shapiro, Michael Edward. 1985. Bronze Casting and American Sculpture 1850–1900. Newark, Del.: University of Delaware Press.
Sharp, Cecil J. 1932. English Folk Songs from the Southern Appalachians. London: Oxford University Press.
Shaw, George Bernard. 1972. Bernard Shaw: Collected Letters, 1898–1910. Edited by Dan H. Laurence. London: Max Reinhardt.
Shultz, Suzanne M. 1992. Body Snatching: The Robbing of Graves for the Education of Physicians in Early Nineteenth Century America. Jefferson, N.C.: McFarland and Co.
Siebert, Wilbur H.
1947. “Beginnings of the Underground Railroad in Ohio.” Ohio State Archaeological and Historical Quarterly 56 (January): 70–93.
1967. The Underground Railroad from Slavery to Freedom. Reprint. New York: Russell and Russell.
Simpson, F. A. 1929. The Rise of Louis Napoleon. London: Longmans, Green and Co.
Slater, Joseph. 1949. “Music at Col. Grangerford’s: A Footnote to Huckleberry Finn.” American Literature 21 (March): 108–11.
[begin page 1151]
SLC (Samuel Langhorne Clemens).
1851 [attributed]. “The New Costume.” Hannibal Western Union, 10 July.
1862. “Petrified Man.” Virginia City Territorial Enterprise, 4 October. Reprinted in ET&S1, 159.
1864. “Whereas.” Californian 1 (22 October): 1. Reprinted in ET&S2, 88–93, and in part as “Aurelia’s Unfortunate Young Man” in SLC 1867a, 20–25.
1865. “Jim Smiley and His Jumping Frog.” New York Saturday Press 4 (18 November): 248–49. Reprinted in ET&S2, 262–72, 282–88.
1866a. “San Francisco Letter.” Virginia City Territorial Enterprise, 13–16 January, not extant. Reprinted as “Mark Twain’s Reminiscence” in both the Austin (Nev.) Reese River Reveille, 18 January, 3, and the Shasta (Calif.) Courier 15 (17 February): 1, and as “Captain Montgomery” in the Golden Era 14 (28 January): 6. Modern reprintings may be found in Walker 1938, 104–5; Henry Nash Smith, 8–9; Taper, 197–99.
1866b. “An Open Letter to the American People.” New York Weekly Review 17 (17 February): 1.
1866c. “Scenes in Honolulu—No. 13.” Letter dated 22 June, number 14 in the sequence. Sacramento Union, 16 July, 3. Scrapbook 6:118–19, CU-MARK. Reprinted in MTH, 328–34.
1867. “Letter from ‘Mark Twain.’ [No. 14.]” Letter dated 16 April. San Francisco Alta California, 26 May, 1. Reprinted in MTTB, 141–48.
1868. “Cannibalism in the Cars.” Broadway: A London Magazine, n.s. 1 (November): 189–94.
1868–1907. “Captain Stormfield’s Visit to Heaven.” MSS. Various unfinished manuscripts with various titles, including “The Travels of Capt. Stormfield, Mariner, in Heaven,” “From Captain Stormfield’s Reminiscences,” and “Captain Stormfield Resumes,” NNAL and CU-MARK. Partially published in SLC 1907–8; reprinted in SLC 1909a, SLC 1922, 223–78, and Budd 1992b, 826–63.
1869a. The Innocents Abroad; or, The New Pilgrims’ Progress. Hartford: American Publishing Company.
1869b. “Only a Nigger.” Buffalo Express, 26 August, 2. In McCullough and McIntire-Strasburg, 22–23.
1869c. “The ‘Wild Man.’ ‘Interviewed.’ ” Buffalo Express, 18 September, 1. In McCullough and McIntire-Strasburg, 53–56.
1870a. “The Tennessee Land.” Untitled autobiographical reminiscence. Published, with omissions, as “The Tennessee Land,” in MTA, 1:3–7; untitled, in AMT, 22–24; and in AutoMT1, 61–63.
1870b. “A Big Thing.” Buffalo Express, 12 March, 2. Reprinted in McCullough and McIntire-Strasburg, 161–66.
1870c. “Post-Mortem Poetry.” Galaxy 9 (June): 864–65.
1872. English travel diary. Partial MS of 100 pages, CU-MARK. Published in L5, 583–629; online on MTPO.
[begin page 1152]
1873–74. The Gilded Age: A Tale of To-day. Charles Dudley Warner, coauthor. Hartford: American Publishing Company. Early copies bound with 1873 title page, later ones with 1874 title page: see BAL, 2:3357.
1874. “A True Story, Repeated Word for Word as I Heard It.” Atlantic Monthly 34 (November): 591–94. Reprinted in Budd 1992a, 578–82.
1875. “Old Times on the Mississippi.” Atlantic Monthly 35 (January–June): 69–73, 217–24, 283–89, 446–52, 567–74, 721–30; Atlantic Monthly 36 (August): 190–96.
1876a. The Adventures of Tom Sawyer. Hartford: American Publishing Company.
1876b. “A Literary Nightmare.” Atlantic Monthly 37 (February): 167–69. Reprinted as “Punch, Brothers, Punch!” in SLC 1878a, 5–12. Reprinted in Budd 1992a, 639–43.
1876c. “A Murder, a Mystery, and a Marriage.” MS of eighty-nine leaves, written 21–22 April, TxU-Hu. Published in SLC 2001a and SLC 2001c.
1876d. “The Facts Concerning the Recent Carnival of Crime in Connecticut.” Atlantic Monthly 37 (June): 641–50. Reprinted in Budd 1992a, 644–60.
1876e. “The Canvasser’s Tale.” Atlantic Monthly 38 (December): 673–76. Reprinted in SLC 1878a, 131–40, and Budd 1992a, 667–72.
1876–77. Ah Sin. Bret Harte, coauthor. Play written between October 1876 and February 1877. The only complete text is a prompt copy of 217 pages, in an unknown hand, at ViU. Published in SLC 1961. Twenty-seven MS pages of discarded dialogue, written by both Clemens and Harte, also at ViU.
1876–85. “A Record of the Small Foolishnesses of Susie & ‘Bay’ Clemens (Infants).” MS of 111 pages, “begun in August 1876 at ‘Quarry Farm,’ ” ViU.
1877a. MS of eleven pages, NNAL. Published as “Early Years in Florida, Missouri” in MTA, 1: 7–10, and AutoMT1, 64–65.
1877b. “Autobiography of a Damned Fool.” MS of 115 pages, written March–May, with minor revisions after 1880, CU-MARK. Published in S&B, 134–61.
1877c. “Cap’n Simon Wheeler, The Amateur Detective.” Play written between 27 June and 11 July. MS of 315 pages, including notes; amanuensis copy by Fanny C. Hesse of 162 pages, both CU-MARK. Published in S&B, 216–89.
[begin page 1153]
1877d. “The Undertaker’s Tale.” MS of thirty-six leaves, written ca. September–October, CU-MARK. Published in SLC 2001b, 60–69.
1877–78. “Some Rambling Notes of an Idle Excursion.” Atlantic Monthly 40 (October–December): 443–47, 586–92, 718–24; Atlantic Monthly 41 (January 1878): 12–19.
1878a. Punch, Brothers, Punch! and Other Sketches. New York: Slote, Woodman and Co.
1878b. “The Loves of Alonzo Fitz Clarence and Rosannah Ethelton.” Atlantic Monthly 41 (March): 320–30. Reprinted in SLC 1878a, 102–30.
1878c. “About Magnanimous-Incident Literature.” Atlantic Monthly 41 (May): 615–19. Reprinted in Budd 1992a, 703–9.
1878d. “The Stolen White Elephant.” MS of 117 pages, written ca. November 1878 and originally intended for SLC 1880a, NN-BGC. First published in SLC 1882a, 7–35. Reprinted in Budd 1992a, 804–23.
1878e. “The Great Revolution in Pitcairn.” Two Atlantic Monthly galley proofs, corrected by SLC, CU-MARK. Written ca. December 1878 and originally intended for SLC 1880a. First published in SLC 1879b. Reprinted in Budd 1992a, 710–21.
1879a. “Concerning the American Language.” Written ca. March 1879 and originally intended for SLC 1880a. First published in SLC 1882a, 265–69. Reprinted in Budd 1992a, 830–33.
1879b. “The Great Revolution in Pitcairn.” Atlantic Monthly 43 (March): 295–302.
1880?. “A Few Epitaphs: Mark Twain Unfolds a Few Striking Specimens.” Interview printed in the Hartford Post of unknown date, clipping, marked “80s,” in CU-MARK.
1880a. A Tramp Abroad. Hartford: American Publishing Company.
1880b. [Date, 1601.] Conversation, as It Was by the Social Fireside, in the Time of the Tudors. A small, unauthorized edition privately printed for John Hay by Alexander Gunn of Cleveland, Ohio. Reprinted in SLC 1920 (in facsimile) and in Budd 1992a, 661–66. According to Mark Twain, 1601 was originally written as a letter to Joseph Hopkins Twichell in the summer of 1876 (AD, 31 July 1906).
1880c. “A Cat-Tale.” MS of forty-three pages, illustrated by the author, written for the Clemens children, CU-MARK. First published in SLC 1959. Reprinted in LE, 125–34, and Budd 1992a, 763–72.
1880d. “On the Decay of the Art of Lying.” Paper presented at the Hartford Monday Evening Club on 5 April. Published in SLC 1882a, 217–25. Reprinted in Budd 1992a, 824–29.
[begin page 1154]
1880e. “Unlearnable Things.” Atlantic Monthly 45 (June): 849–52. Reprinted as “Reply to a Boston Girl” in Budd 1992a, 742–46.
1880f. “A Telephonic Conversation.” Atlantic Monthly 45 (June): 841–43. MS of seventeen pages, CtY-BR; one galley proof, corrected by SLC. CU-MARK. Reprinted in Budd 1992a, 738–41.
1880g. “Edward Mills and George Benton: A Tale.” Atlantic Monthly 46 (August): 226–29. Reprinted in Budd 1992a, 747–52.
1880h. “Mrs. McWilliams and the Lightning.” Atlantic Monthly 46 (September): 380–84. Reprinted in Budd 1992a, 753–60.
1880i. “The Shakspeare Mulberry.” MS of twelve pages, written on 23 November, CtHMTH.
1881a. [“Burlesque Etiquette.”] Untitled MS of 102 leaves, CU-MARK; two additional leaves, CL. Published in part in MTB, 2:705–6, and LE, 193–208.
1881b. The Prince and the Pauper: A Tale for Young People of All Ages. Boston: James R. Osgood and Co.
1881c. “The Second Advent.” Unfinished MS of eighty-six leaves, CU-MARK. Published in FM, 50–68.
1881d. “Hamlet.” Unfinished MS of fifty-eight leaves written August–September, including working notes and interpolated pages from an acting copy of Hamlet published by Samuel French, CU-MARK. Published as “Burlesque Hamlet” in S&B, 49–87.
1881e. “A Curious Experience.” MS of 120 pages (missing its final page or two), NjP-SC. Published in Century Magazine 23 (November): 35–46.
[1882?]. “[Advice to Youth].” Untitled speech. MS of sixteen pages, CU-MARK. Published as “Advice to Youth” in MTS 1923, 104–8.
1882a. The Stolen White Elephant, Etc. Boston: James R. Osgood and Co.
1882b. Date 1601. Conversation, as It Was by the Social Fireside, in the Time of the Tudors. [West Point, N.Y.]: Done att Ye Academie Presse. Reprinted in facsimile in SLC 1920.
1882c. Draft of Chapter 51 of Life on the Mississippi. MS of thirty-seven pages, NNPM.
1882d. “The McWilliamses and the Burglar Alarm.” Harper’s Christmas: Pictures & Papers Done by the Tile Club and Its Literary Friends (December): 28–29. Reprinted in SLC 1922a, 315–24, and Budd 1992a, 837–43.
1883a. Life on the Mississippi. Boston: James R. Osgood and Co.
1883b. “1,002. An Oriental Tale.” MS of 179 leaves and PH of an additional five leaves, written between 14 June and 20 July, CU-MARK;
[begin page 1155]
1883c. “Colonel Sellers As a Scientist.” William Dean Howells, coauthor. Play written primarily between October and December 1883. MS of 425 pages, CU-MARK; complete TS, CtY-BR; partial TS, ViU. Published in Howells 1960, 205–41.
1883–84. Unused dedication for Adventures of Huckleberry Finn entitled “To the Once Boys & Girls.” MS of one page, with a note by Charles L. Webster (“Never used.”). Tipped into a copy of SLC 1885, with the following note on the flyleaf: “This copy of ‘Adventures of Huckleberry Finn’ was bound by J. F. Tapley Nov. 26th 1884, and is the first copy ever bound. | Chas. L. Webster | Publisher.” PH in CU-MARK.
1884a. “Hunting for H——.” New York Sun, 24 August, 2. Reprinted in Budd 1982, 11–15.
1884b. “An Adventure of Huckleberry Finn: With an Account of the Famous Grangerford-Shepherdson Feud.” Century Magazine 29 (December): 268–78.
1885a. Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. New York: Charles L. Webster and Co.
1885b. The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. 2 vols. Leipzig: Bernhard Tauchnitz.
1885c. “Jim’s Investments, and King Sollermun.” Century Magazine 29 (January): 456–58.
1885d. “Royalty on the Mississippi: As Chronicled by Huckleberry Finn.” Century Magazine 29 (February): 544–67.
1885e. “Remarks at Actors’ Fund Fair, Academy of Music, Philadelphia, 9 April.” Speech delivered at the Actors Fund Fair at the Academy of Music, Philadelphia, on 9 April 1885. In MTS 1910, 265, as “Obituary Poetry (misdated) and Fatout 1976, 194.
1885f. “The Private History of a Campaign That Failed.” Century Magazine 31 (December): 193–204. Reprinted in Budd 1992a, 863–82.
1886. Speech at the Typothetae Dinner, Delmonico’s, New York, on 18 January, as reported in “The Typothetae.” Hartford Courant, 20 January, 1. Reprinted as “The Compositor” in Fatout 1976, 200–202.
1889. A Connecticut Yankee in King Arthur’s Court. New York: Charles L. Webster and Co.
1893–94. "Tom Sawyer Abroad.” St. Nicholas: An Illustrated Magazine for Young Folks 21 (November 1893–April 1894): 20–29, 116–127, 250–58, 348–56, 392–401, 539–48.
[begin page 1156]
1894. The Tragedy of Pudd’nhead Wilson and the Comedy Those Extraordinary Twins. Hartford: American Publishing Company.
1895a. “Annotation for public reading of Adventures of Huckleberry Finn.” Leipzig: Bernhard Tauchnitz, 1885 (with November 1893 advertisement on back cover). Author’s personal copy in CU-MARK. Volume 2 no longer extant. Pages annotated by Clemens are reproduced in Mark Twain’s Revisions for Public Reading, 1895–1896.
1895b. “Fenimore Cooper’s Literary Offences.” North American Review 161 (July): 1–12.
1896. “Tom Sawyer, Detective.” Harper’s New Monthly Magazine 93 (August–September): 344–61, 519–37.
[1897?]. Autobiographical notes. MS of one page (beginning “Campmeeting. . . . ”), PH in CU-MARK. Formerly acquisition no. A-1392, CCamarSJ. Sold as lot 1198, Estelle Doheny Collection . . . Part IV, 17 and 18 October 1988, Christie, Manson and Woods International; present location unknown.
1897a. “A Little Note to M. Paul Bourget.” In Tom Sawyer, Detective, As Told by Huck Finn, and Other Tales, 225–46. London: Chatto and Windus.
1897b. “Villagers of 1840–3.” MS of forty-three leaves, written in July–August, CU-MARK. Published in Inds, 93–108.
1897–98. “My Autobiography. [Random Extracts from It.]” MS of seventy-five pages, CU-MARK. Published with omissions as “Early Days” in MTA, 1:81–115, and in full in AutoMT1, 203–20.
[1900]. “Scraps from My Autobiography. Playing ‘Bear.’ Herrings. Jim Wolf and the Cats.” MS of forty-two leaves, CU-MARK. Published in MTA, 1:125–43, and AutoMT1, 155–63.
[1902]. Autobiographical notes. MS of one page (numbered “3” and beginning “Seek & get measles . . . ”), CU-MARK.
1902a. “A Defence of General Funston.” North American Review 174 (May): 613–24. Reprinted in Zwick 1992, 119–32.
1902b. Letter to the Denver Post dated 14 August. In “Mark Twain Scores: Some Individuals Who Don’t Like ‘Huckleberry Finn.’ ” New York Tribune, 22 August, 9.
1902c. Letter to the editor of the Omaha World-Herald dated 23 August. In “Mark Twain on ‘Huck Finn.’ New York Times, 6 September, 597.
[begin page 1157]
[1906?]. “Notes on Susy Clemens’s Biography of Mark Twain.” Notes glossing OSC 1885–86. MS of thirty-two pages, ViU. Published in OSC 1985.
1906a. “A Family Sketch.” MS of sixty-one leaves, written and revised from about 1896 to 1906, CU-MARK.
1906b. “The $30,000 Bequest” and Other Stories. New York: Harper and Brothers.
1906c. “William Dean Howells.” Harper’s Monthly Magazine 113 (July): 221–25. Reprinted in Budd 1992b, 722–30.
1907. “Chapters from My Autobiography.—XXIII. By Mark Twain.” North American Review 186 (October): 161–73. Reprinted in Kiskis, 210–20.
1907–8. “Extract from Captain Stormfield’s Visit to Heaven.” Harper’s Monthly Magazine 116 (December 1907): 41–49; (January 1908): 266–76.
1909a. Extract from Captain Stormfield’s Visit to Heaven. New York and London: Harper and Brothers.
1909b. Is Shakespeare Dead? From My Autobiography. New York: Harper and Brothers.
1909c. Autobiographical MS of six pages, dated 25 March, CU-MARK. Published in SLC 1909b, 144–50.
1920. Date 1601. Conversation As It Was by the Social Fireside in the Time of the Tudors. Comprising facsimiles of the original edition and the revised or West Point Edition. Privately printed.
1922. The Mysterious Stranger and Other Stories. New York: Harper and Brothers.
1923. “The United States of Lyncherdom.” New York and London: Harper and Brothers. In Europe and Elsewhere, edited by Albert Bigelow Paine, 239–49.
1942. Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. Edited by Bernard DeVoto. New York: Limited Editions Club.
1944. Life on the Mississippi. Edited by Willis Wager. New York: Limited Editions Club.
1958. Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. Edited, with an introduction and notes, by Henry Nash Smith. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company, Riverside Press.
1959. Concerning Cats: Two Tales by Mark Twain. Introduction by Frederick Anderson. San Francisco: The Book Club of California.
1961. “Ah Sin.” A Dramatic Work by Mark Twain and Bret Harte. Edited by Frederick Anderson. San Francisco: Book Club of California.
[begin page 1158]
1962. Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. A Facsimile of the First Edition. With an introduction by Hamlin Hill. San Francisco: Chandler Publishing Company.
1967. Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. Edited, with an introduction and notes, by Leo Marx. The Library of Literature. Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill Company.
1982. The Adventures of Tom Sawyer . . . A Facsimile of the Author’s Holograph Manuscript. Introduction by Paul Baender. 2 vols. Frederick, Md., and Washington, D.C.: University Publications of America and Georgetown University Library.
1983. Adventures of Huckleberry Finn . . . A Facsimile of the Manuscript. Detroit: Gale Research Company.
1995. “Jim and the Dead Man.” Previously unpublished excerpt from the manuscript of Adventures of Huckleberry Finn, printed as “Jim and the Dead Man.” New Yorker 71 (26 June and 3 July): 128–30.
1996a. Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. Foreword by Shelley Fisher Fishkin. Introduction by Toni Morrison. Afterword by Victor A. Doyno. The Oxford Mark Twain. New York: Oxford University Press.
1996b. Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. Introduction by Justin Kaplan. Foreword and addendum by Victor A. Doyno. New York: Random House.
1996c. The Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. Edited by Michael Hulse. Cologne: Könemann.
2001a. A Murder, a Mystery, and a Marriage. Foreword and afterword by Roy Blount, Jr. New York: W. W. Norton and Co.
2001b. Twenty-Two Easy Pieces by Mark Twain. Unpublished Manuscripts Selected from the Mark Twain Papers. Foreword by Robert H. Hirst. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
2001c. “A Murder, a Mystery, and a Marriage.” Atlantic Monthly 288 (July–August): 54–64.
Sloane, David E. E. 1988. Adventures of Huckleberry Finn: American Comic Vision. Boston: Twayne Publishers.
Smith, Benjamin E., ed. 1902. The Century Atlas of the World. New York: Century Company.
Smith, David L. 1984. “Huck, Jim, and American Racial Discourse.” Mark Twain Journal 22 (Fall): 4–12. In Leonard, Tenney, and Davis 1992, 103–20.
Smith, Henry Nash.
1958a. Introduction to Adventures of Huckleberry Finn. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company, Riverside Press.
[begin page 1159]
1958b. “Mark Twain’s Images of Hannibal: From St. Petersburg to Eseldorf.” Texas Studies in English 37: 3–23.
1962. Mark Twain: The Development of a Writer. Cambridge: Belknap Press of Harvard University Press.
Smith, Herbert F. 1970. Richard Watson Gilder. New York: Twayne Publishers.
Smith, John David. 1996. Black Voices from Reconstruction, 1865–1877. Brookfield, Conn.: Millbrook Press.
Smith, Solomon F. 1868. Theatrical Management in the West and South for Thirty Years. New York: Harper and Brothers. Citations are to the 1968 reprint edition, edited by Arthur Thomas Tees, New York: Benjamin Blom.
Smyth, W. H. 1867. The Sailor’s Word-Book: An Alphabetical Digest of Nautical Terms. London: Blackie and Son.
Spaulding, Henry G. 1863. Excerpt from Under the Palmetto. In Jackson, 64–73.
Sprague, William B. 1858. Annals of the American Pulpit: Presbyterian. New York: Robert Carter and Brothers.
Stevens, Walter B. 1911. St. Louis: The Fourth City, 1764–1911. 2 vols. St. Louis: S. J. Clarke Publishing Company.
Stevenson, Burton, ed. 1934. The Home Book of Quotations, Classical and Modern. New York: Dodd, Mead and Co.
Stewart, A. A., comp. 1912. The Printer’s Dictionary of Technical Terms. Boston: School of Printing, North End Union.
Still, William.
1872. The Underground Rail Road. Philadelphia: Porter and Coates.
✱ 1883. The Underground Rail Road. Rev. ed. Philadelphia: William Still.
Stowe, Harriet Beecher.
1853. A Key to “Uncle Tom’s Cabin”; Presenting the Original Facts and Documents upon Which the Story Is Founded. Boston: John P. Jewett and Co.
1856. Dred; A Tale of the Great Dismal Swamp. 2 vols. Boston: Phillips, Sampson and Co.
Stower, Caleb. 1808. The Printer’s Grammar; or, Introduction to the Art of Printing. London: C. Stower.
Strickland, Carol Colclough. 1976. “Emmeline Grangerford, Mark Twain’s Folk Artist.” Bulletin of the New York Public Library 79 (Winter): 225–33.
[begin page 1160]
Summers, Montague. 1946. Witchcraft and Black Magic. London: Rider and Co.
Sweets, Henry H., III. 1984. The Hannibal, Missouri, Presbyterian Church: A Sesquicentennial History. Hannibal, Mo.: Presbyterian Church of Hannibal.
Tadman, Michael. 1989. Speculators and Slaves. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.
Tanselle, G. Thomas.
1972. “Some Principles for Editorial Apparatus.” Studies in Bibliography 25: 41–88.
1975. “Problems and Accomplishments in the Editing of the Novel.” Studies in the Novel 7 (Fall): 323–60.
1976. “The Editorial Problem of Final Authorial Intention.” Studies in Bibliography 29: 167–211.
1981. “Literary Editing.” In Vogt and Jones, 35–56.
1986. “Historicism and Critical Editing.” Studies in Bibliography 39: 1–46.
1990. “Textual Criticism and Deconstruction.” Studies in Bibliography 43: 1–33.
1994. “Editing Without a Copy-Text.” Studies in Bibliography 47: 1–22.
Taper, Bernard, ed. 1963. Mark Twain’s San Francisco. New York: McGraw-Hill Book Company.
Taylor, Arnold H. 1976. Travail and Triumph: Black Life and Culture in the South Since the Civil War. Contributions in Afro-American Studies, Number 26. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood Press.
Thayer, Stuart. 1974. “A Short History of Three Equestrian Acts.” Bandwagon 18 (March–April): 8–10.
Thomas, Daniel Lindsey, and Lucy Blayney Thomas. 1920. Kentucky Superstitions. Princeton: Princeton University Press.
[Thompson, William T.] 1845. The Chronicles of Pineville. Philadelphia: Carey and Hart.
Thornton, Richard H. 1912. An American Glossary. 3 vols. Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott Company.
Thorpe, Thomas Bangs.
1842. “The Disgraced Scalp Lock, or Incidents on the Western Waters.” Spirit of the Times 16 (July): 229–30. In Estes 1989, 170–80.
1855. “Remembrances of the Mississippi.” Harper’s New Monthly Magazine 12 (December): 25–41.
Ticknor, Caroline.
1914. “ ‘Mark Twain’s’ Missing Chapter.” Bookman 39 (May): 298–309.
1922. Glimpses of Authors. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company.
[begin page 1161]
Tidwell, James Nathan. 1942. “Mark Twain’s Representation of Negro Speech.” American Speech 17 (October): 174–76.
Timbs, John. 1876. Doctors and Patients; or, Anecdotes of the Medical World and Curiosities of Medicine. London: Richard Bentley and Son.
Tooker, L. Frank. 1924. The Joys and Tribulations of an Editor. New York: The Century Company.
Trelease, Allen W. 1971. White Terror: The Ku Klux Klan Conspiracy and Southern Reconstruction. New York: Harper and Row.
Trenck, Friedrich. 1853. The Life of Baron Frederick Trenck. Albany, N.Y.: J. Munsell.
Trexler, Harrison Anthony. 1914. Slavery in Missouri, 1804–1865. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Press.
Trollope, Frances. 1832. Domestic Manners of the Americans. 2 vols. London: Whittaker, Treacher, and Co. Clemens owned an 1832 edition, complete in one volume (London: Whittaker, Treacher, and Co.; New York: Reprinted for the booksellers).
Trowbridge, J. T. 1864. Cudjo’s Cave. Boston: J. E. Tilton and Co.
TS. Typescript.
TS1. Typescript, no longer extant, of the first half of the Huckleberry Finn manuscript (MS1), probably made in late 1882 or early 1883 and apparently numbered 1–159.
TS2. Typescript, no longer extant, of the second half of the Huckleberry Finn manuscript (MS2), made in the late summer of 1883. TS2 became printer’s copy for the second half of the book.
TS3. Typescript, no longer extant, of the first half of Huckleberry Finn, made in 1884 from TS1. TS3 incorporated Mark Twain’s revisions on TS1 and William Dean Howells’s corrections, and it became printer’s copy for the first half.
TS. 1980. The Adventures of Tom Sawyer; Tom Sawyer Abroad; and Tom Sawyer, Detective. Edited by John C. Gerber, Paul Baender, and Terry Firkins. The Works of Mark Twain. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
TSA. 1982. Tom Sawyer Abroad; Tom Sawyer, Detective. Foreword and notes by John C. Gerber, text established by Terry Firkins. The Mark Twain Library. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
Turner, Arlin. 1960. Mark Twain and George W. Cable: The Record of a Literary Friendship. [East Lansing]: Michigan State University Press.
[begin page 1162]
Turner, Timothy G. 1867. Gazetteer of the St. Joseph Valley, Michigan and Indiana, with a View of Its Hydraulic and Business Capacities. Chicago: Hazlitt and Reed.
TxU. University of Texas, Austin.
TxU-Hu. Harry Ransom Humanities Research Center, University of Texas, Austin.
Uk. British Library, London, England.
UkReU. University of Reading Library, Whiteknights, Reading, Berkshire, England.
Urnov, Dimitri. 1986. Quoted in Diana Ketcham, “Soviet Study at UC Focuses on Twain,” Oakland Tribune, 28 July, C-1, C-3.
ViU. University of Virginia, Charlottesville.
Vogelback, Arthur Lawrence. 1939. “The Publication and Reception of Huckleberry Finn in America.” American Literature 11 (November): 260–72.
Vogt, George L., and John Bush Jones, eds. 1981. Literary and Historical Editing. Lawrence: University of Kansas Libraries.
✱ Walpole, Horace. 1861–66. The Letters of Horace Walpole, Earl of Oxford. Edited by Peter Cunningham. 9 vols. London: Henry G. Bohn.
Waterman, Catharine H., ed. 1841. Friendship’s Offering. Philadelphia: Marshall, Williams, and Butler.
Watts, Peter. 1977. A Dictionary of the Old West, 1850–1900. New York: Alfred A. Knopf.
Way, Frederick, Jr.
1943. Pilotin’ Comes Natural. New York and Toronto: Farrar and Rinehart.
1972. “Diagrams.” S&D Reflector 9 (June): 24.
WEU. University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire, Wis.
Webster, Noah.
[1870]. A Dictionary of the English Language. Rev. and enl. by Chauncey A. Goodrich and Thomas Heber Orr. 2 vols. Glasgow: William Mackenzie.
1884. An American Dictionary of the English Language. Rev. and enl. by Chauncey A. Goodrich. Springfield, Mass.: G. and C. Merriam and Co.
1889. An American Dictionary of the English Language. Rev. and enl. by Chauncey A. Goodrich and Noah Porter. Springfield, Mass.: G. and C. Merriam and Co.
1894. An American Dictionary of the English Language. Rev. and enl. by Chauncey A. Goodrich. Chicago: Webster’s Dictionary Pub. Company.
[begin page 1163]
Wecter, Dixon. 1952. Sam Clemens of Hannibal. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company, Riverside Press.
Wells, Amos S. 1945. A Treasure of Hymns: Brief Biographies of One Hundred and Twenty Leading Hymn-Writers with Their Best Hymns. Boston: W. A. Wilde Company.
Wells, David M. 1973. “More on the Geography of ‘Huckleberry Finn.’ ” South Atlantic Bulletin 38 (November): 82–86.
Wells, Evelyn Kendrick. 1950. The Ballad Tree. New York: Ronald Press Company.
Welsh, Donald H. 1962. “Sam Clemens’ Hannibal, 1836–1838.” Midcontinent American Studies Journal 3 (Spring): 28–43. The article actually covers the years 1846–48.
Wentworth, Harold. 1944. American Dialect Dictionary. New York: Thomas Y. Crowell Company.
Westerhoff, John H., III. 1978. McGuffey and His Readers. Nashville: Abingdon.
✱ White, Gilbert. 1875. The Natural History of Selborne. London: Bickers and Son.
Whiting, B. J. 1944. “Guyuscutus, Royal Nonesuch and Other Hoaxes.” Southern Folklore Quarterly 8 (December): 251–75.
Wild, J. C., and Lewis F. Thomas, eds. 1841. The Valley of the Mississippi, Illustrated . . . Drawn and Lithographed by J. C. Wild. No. 3, September. St. Louis: J. C. Wild.
Wilkinson, Tracy. 1991. “Missing Twain Manuscript Is Believed Found.” Los Angeles Times, 13 February, A1, A3.
Wilson, F. P., ed. 1970. The Oxford Dictionary of English Proverbs. 3d ed. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
WIM. 1973. What Is Man? and Other Philosophical Writings. Edited by Paul Baender. The Works of Mark Twain. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
Windell, Marie George. 1943. “The Camp Meeting in Missouri.” Missouri Historical Review 37 (April): 253–70.
Wolford, Leah Jackson. 1916. The Play-Party in Indiana. Indianapolis: Indiana Historical Commission.
Woodard, Fredrick, and Donnarae MacCann.
1984. “ ‘Huckleberry Finn’ and the Traditions of Blackface Minstrelsy.” Interracial Books for Children Bulletin 15: 4–13. Also in MacCann and Woodard 1985, 75–103.
1992. “Minstrel Shackles and Nineteenth-Century ‘Liberality’ in Huckleberry Finn.” In Leonard, Tenney, and Davis 1992, 141–53.
[begin page 1164]
Worcester, Joseph E. 1863. A Dictionary of the English Language. Boston: Brewer and Tileston.
Workwoman’s Guide. 1838. The Workwoman’s Guide . . . By a Lady. London: Simpkin, Marshall, and Co.
✱ Wright, William [Dan De Quille, pseud.]. 1877. History of the Big Bonanza. Hartford: American Publishing Company.
WU. University of Wisconsin, Madison, Wis.
WWD. 1967. Mark Twain’s Which Was the Dream? and Other Symbolic Writings of the Later Years. Edited by John S. Tuckey. The Mark Twain Papers. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press.
Wyeth, John Allan. 1914. With Sabre and Scalpel. New York: Harper and Brothers.
Yellin, Jean Fagan. 1972. The Intricate Knot: Black Figures in American Literature, 1776–1863. New York: New York University Press.
YSMT. Yale Scrapbook, Willard S. Morse Collection, CtY-BR. Clemens used this scrapbook to collect clippings of his articles dating from December 1863 to October 1866, many of which he revised in the margins.
Zellers, John A. 1948. The Typewriter: A Short History, on its 75th Anniversary, 1873–1948. New York: Newcomen Society of England, American Branch.
Zwick, Jim. 1992. Mark Twain’s Weapons of Satire: Anti-Imperialist Writings on the Philippine-American War. Syracuse: Syracuse University Press.
The “shout,” which developed in the religious practice of slaves in the antebellum South, was “a peculiar combination of singing combined with a rhythmic shuffling dance, a ‘holy dance’ as it is sometimes called” (Gordon, 446). Clearly rooted in African tradition, the “shout” was the slaves’ concession to the Methodist interdiction of dancing, and was an intense experience, “half pow-wow, half prayer-meeting” (Higginson, 13–14; Genovese, 233). It would often follow the more formal religious service:
Three or four, standing still, clapping their hands and beating time with their feet, commence singing in unison one of the peculiar shout melodies, while the others walk round in a ring, in single file, joining also in the song. Soon those in the ring leave off their singing, the others keeping it up the while with increased vigor, and strike into the shout step, observing most accurate time with the music. This step is something halfway between a shuffle and a dance. . . . At the end of each stanza of the song the dancers stop short with a slight stamp on the last note, and then, putting the other foot forward, proceed through the next verse. They will often dance to the same song for twenty or thirty minutes. (Spaulding, in Jackson, 67–68)
[begin page 481]
[begin page 482]
[begin page 483]
[begin page 484]
[begin page 485]
[begin page 486]
[begin page 487]
The wild storm on Jackson’s Island is described in chapter 16 of Tom Sawyer.
Below the words ‘He was naked’, in the margin of his manuscript page (MS1a, 205), Mark Twain scrawled what appears to be the word ‘leave’ followed by a wavering line or flourish that could be a note in shorthand. A few pages later, he inscribed another wavering line in the margin above the words ‘all naked’ (536.3 in this text). His marks may have been related to his decision to modify the cadaver’s nakedness with a reference to his “shroud” (see the next note).
Mark Twain interlined these words (’iust . . . night’) in pencil, without a caret, and in an erratic, crabbed hand, below ‘a layin’ on round sticks’ and above’—rollers. I rolled him’ (MS1a, 206). The initial word, perhaps an attempt at a dialect rendering of ‘just’, is doubtful. He may have intended the words as an addition or as an alternative to his text; in either case their placement is ambiguous.
Mark Twain wrote the single character ’f’ above ‘head’, apparently because he was considering writing ‘face’ as an alternative to ‘head’. He then interlined an alternative phrase (‘over his face’) above his original inscription (’roun’ his head’), leaving the ’f’ in place but effectively canceled.
Mark Twain here substitutes the first for the second verse of “Am I a Soldier of the Cross?” written by Isaac Watts in 1709 (Amos R. Wells, 82–84). He had already used the second verse in chapter 5 of Tom Sawyer, where it is read “with relish” by the St. Petersburg minister. Watts’s hymns were a staple of the camp-meeting repertoire, and “Am I a Soldier of the Cross?” in particular, was well known as the “recruiting song of Methodism” (Eggleston 1874, 226; Charles A. Johnson, 57, 123, 192, 194). After the manuscript was typed, Mark Twain deleted the Watts hymn entirely (see the facing page), perhaps because the words were too familiar to be “lined”: “The practice of ‘lining the hymn’ . . . was especially helpful to the many in the audience who were illiterate. In this procedure the preacher read two lines and then everyone sang them; he continued in this way until all the verses had been sung. If the selection was as popular as Isaac Watts’s ‘Am I a Soldier of the Cross?’ prompting was not necessary” (Charles A. Johnson, 195–96).
The Reverend Hamilton Pierson, in his memoir of 1850s ministerial life in the “wilds” of Tennessee and Kentucky, described in detail a similar “sing-songing” style of delivery:
Scarcely a sentence in the sermon was uttered in the usual method of speech. It was drawled out in a sing-song tone from the beginning to the end. The preacher ran his voice up, and sustained it at so high a pitch that he could make but little variation of voice upward. The air in his lungs would become exhausted, and at the conclusion of every sentence he would “catch” his breath with an “ah.” As he proceeded with his sermon, and his vocal organs became wearied with this most unnatural exertion, the “ah” was repeated more and more frequently, until, with the most painful contortions of face and form, he would with difficulty articulate, in his sing-song tone:
“Oh, my beloved brethren—ah, and sisters—ah, you have all got to die—ah, and be buried—ah, and go to the judgment—ah, and stand before the great white throne—ah, and receive your rewards—ah, for the deeds—ah, done in the body—ah.”
From the beginning to the end of his sermon, which occupied just an hour and ten minutes by my watch, I could not see the slightest evidence that he had any idea what he was going to say from one sentence to another. While “catching his breath,” and saying “ah,” he seemed to determine what he would say next.
There was no more train of thought or connection of ideas than in the harangue of a maniac. And yet many hundreds of such sermons are preached in the Brush, and I am sorry to add that thousands of the people had rather hear these sermons than any others. This “holy tone” has charms for them not possessed by any possible eloquence. As the preacher “warms up” and becomes more animated in the progress of his discourse, the more impressible sisters begin to move their heads and bodies, and soon all the devout brethren and sisters sway their bodies back and forth in perfect unison, keeping time, in some mysterious manner, to his sing-song tone. (Pierson, 3, 73–74, 313–14, 320)
In his 1871 novel The Hoosier School-Master, Edward Eggleston also included such a sermon, characterized by “the see-sawing gestures, the nasal resonance, the sniffle, the melancholy minor key” and the repeated “ah” of the “holy tone” described by Pierson (Eggleston 1871, 104–7). In his final revision of this scene, Mark Twain shortened the sermon and deleted all the “ahs” found in the manuscript version.
For full accounts of the tour, see Cardwell; Fatout 1960, 204–31; Lorch, 161–82; and Turner, 43–114.
SLC to Webster, 20 Sept 84, NPV, in MTBus , 277.
In the first of two notebook lists made at this time, Clemens included the following selections from Huckleberry Finn: “1 & 2dchapters,” “waking Jim,” “Raftsmen fight,” “Troubled conscience & small pox,” “Art & Bible,” “King Solomon; Henry VIII,” “Jim’s little girl—dumb,” “Hamlet’s Soliloquy,” “Ch. 33—‘All right, I’ll go to hell,’ ” and “Meeting of H & Aunt Sally.” His second list was nearly identical, but included “Decorative Art—Spider-armed woman” and omitted “Jim’s little girl” (N&J3, 60–61, 69–73). Several of the selections were followed by page references to the typescript that had served as the illustrator’s copy of Huckleberry Finn; Clemens had not yet received an unbound copy of the book from Webster, and had only the typescript at hand, which, unlike the published book, included the “Raftsmen fight.”
Cable to SLC, 13 Oct 84, CU-MARK, in Cardwell, 104.
SLC to James B. Pond, “Sunday” [26 Oct 84], and “Tuesday” [28 Oct 84], NN-B; the second letter is published in Cardwell, 49–50.
SLC to James B. Pond, 22 Oct 84, NN-B. The second title was suggested by Cable, who objected to Mark Twain’s original title—“Can’t learn a nigger to argue” (see the explanatory note to 4.15).
Printed program for 6 November 1884 in Orange, New Jersey (CU-MARK); SLC to James B. Pond, after 27 Oct 84, NN-B, in Cardwell, 48.
N&J3, 83; see, for example, N&J3, 113, for Clemens’s notes for his first night in Boston (November 13) and his holograph comments on the printed programs for 18 and 19 November in New York City (CU-MARK).
N&J3, 60, 70. Although he didn’t include the “Raftsmen fight” in his lecture readings, Clemens took such delight in the passage that in early January 1885 he dramatized it for his private enjoyment. On 8 January he wrote Livy that he had just spent an hour cutting up the raftsmen’s dialogue “into single-sentence speeches . . . to be spoken alternately (a lively running-fire of brag & boast) by Cable & me, for Pond’s amusement, nights, in our room” (CU-MARK).
SLC to OLC, 15 Dec 84, CU-MARK. By 22 December Clemens was even more determined to make program changes—now in Cable’s portion of the show as well as his own, because of growing irritation with his partner’s habit of lengthening his readings with every performance (SLC to Pond, 22 Dec 84, NN-B).
N&J3 , 84.
Printed program for 6 November 1884 in Orange, New Jersey (CU-MARK).
SLC to OLC, 29 Dec 84, CU-MARK, in LLMT, 223; “Twain and Cable,” Pittsburgh Gazette, 30 Dec 84.
SLC to OLC, 17 and 18 Jan 85, CU-MARK, in LLMT, 230–31. The many discrepancies between the announced programs and the selections actually read make it difficult to determine the contents of performances with certainty. All indications are, however, that Clemens read “King Sollermun” less and less often after the Christmas break; see, for example, N&J3, 87–88, 91–92.
N&J3, 82.
MTE, 216; SLC to OLC, 3 Feb 85, CU-MARK.
Mark Twain’s first published sketch in the Atlantic was “A True Story,” his touching first-person account of an incident in the life of former slave Mary Ann Cord, which appeared in the November 1874 issue. According to the author, two previous contributions to the prestigious literary monthly had been rejected (L6, 219–20 nn. 2,4). Between 1874 and 1880, often at Howells’s solicitation, he contributed more than a dozen other pieces to the Atlantic.
All abbreviations and all works cited by author’s name are fully defined in References. Quotations are made to correspond exactly with the original printing or document, except for insignificant cancellations in letters and notebooks, which are usually omitted. Letters not yet published in Mark Twain’s Letters (University of California Press, 1988–2002) are cited by repository or owner, with the standard Library of Congress abbreviation or the last name of the owner, both defined in References. If the quoted words have not been published in Mark Twain’s Letters but have been published elsewhere, accurately or otherwise, that publication is also cited following the repository.
Clemens wrote to his friends Joseph and Harmony Twichell in June 1874:
Susie Crane has built the loveliest study for me, you ever saw. It is octagonal, with a peaked roof, each octagon filled with a spacious window, & it sits perched in complete isolation on top of an elevation that commands leagues of valley & city & retreating ranges of distant blue hills. It is a cosy nest, with just room in it for a sofa & a table & three or four chairs—& when the storms sweep down the remote valley & the lightning flashes above the hills beyond, & the rain beats upon the roof over my head, imagine the luxury of it! It stands 500 feet above the valley & 2½ miles from it. (11 June 74, L6, 158)
The Clemenses usually visited briefly at the Elmira home of Livy’s mother, Olivia Langdon, before heading up to Quarry Farm just outside the city limits. Between 1874 and 1889, the only years when they did not spend part of the summer at the farm were 1875, when they vacationed in Newport, Rhode Island, and 1878, when they left in April for an extended stay in Europe, having visited Elmira in late March and early April.
SLC to unidentified correspondent (probably British), February 1891 or later, draft in CU-MARK. Partly published by Paine in MTL, 2:541–43, and by DeVoto 1946 773–75, but both Paine and DeVoto omitted the full text of the concluding paragraph:
Now then: as the onlymost valuable capital, or culture, or education usable in the building of novels is personal experience, I ought to be well equipped for that trade. I surely have the equipment, a wide culture; & all of it real, none of it artificial, for I don’t know anything about books. And yet I can’t go away from the boyhood period & write novels, because capital is not sufficient by itself & I lack the other essential: interest in handling the men & experiences of later times. Yes, & there was another consideration: the boyhood field isn’t much or effectively occupied, there’s plenty of room; but the other field is crowded, & most competently, too.
When William Dean Howells read Tom Sawyer in manuscript (a secretarial copy) in November 1875, he wrote Clemens: “I don’t seem to think I like the last chapter. I believe I would cut that” (21 Nov 75, L6, 595 n. 1). Clemens responded:
As to that last chapter, I think of just leaving it off & adding nothing in its place. Something told me that the book was done when I got to that point—& so the strong temptation to put Huck’s life at the widow’s into detail instead of generalizing it in a paragraph, was resisted. (SLC to William Dean Howells, 23 Nov 75, L6, 595)
It has been unclear whether the first chapter of Huckleberry Finn merely reviewed the ending of Tom Sawyer, or was a redraft of a chapter originally written for that book but omitted. The editors of L6 argue convincingly that Clemens did omit a last chapter but that Tom Sawyer’s “Conclusion,” which replaced it, gives “a better hint of what the omitted chapter contained”: “When one writes a novel about grown people, he knows exactly where to stop—that is, with a marriage; but when he writes of juveniles, he must stop where he best can” (L6, 596–97 n. 4; ATS, 260).
Henry Nash Smith suggested a reason that Clemens did not develop this scheme:
Jim’s notion that he would be free as soon as he entered the mouth of the Ohio was oversimplified, but that river was certainly his pathway to freedom. It made no sense for Huck and Jim to move a single mile farther past the mouth of the Ohio than they were forced to. If Mark Twain took Jim down the Mississippi he committed himself to a narrative plan that was very unlikely to lead Jim to freedom. . . .
Why then did Mark Twain not cause Huck and Jim to make their way up the Ohio? To ask this question is to answer it: he did not know the Ohio. But he had known the lower Mississippi intimately for four years as cub and pilot. As Huck and Jim float past Cairo, Mark Twain’s desire to write a story drawing upon his memories of the lower Mississippi comes into conflict with the idea of telling the story of Jim’s escape from slavery. (Henry Nash Smith 1958a, viii)
Clemens gave a scrambled account of his typewriter experiences in his autobiographical dictation of 27 February 1907, claiming that he was the first to “apply the type-machine to literature”:
Now I come to an important matter—as I regard it. In the year ’74’73 the young woman copied a considerable part of a book of mine on the machine. In a previous chapter of this Autobiography I have claimed that I was the first person in the world that ever had a telephone in his house for practical purposes; I will now claim—until dispossessed—that I was the first person in the world to apply the type-machine to literature. That book must have been The Adventures of Tom Sawyer. I wrote the first half of it in ’72, the rest of it in ’73.or 74. My machinist type-copied a book for me in ’74,’73, so I concluded it was that one. (AD, 27 Feb 1907, which incorporates and revises AD, Jan 1904, CU-MARK, partly published in SLC 1906b, 167–70)
The typing could not have been as early as 1873 or 1874, and the book could not have been Tom Sawyer, which was copied by amanuensis. His next two books, A Tramp Abroad and The Prince and the Pauper, were also copied by amanuensis. The first book had to have been Life on the Mississippi, which his 24 April 1883 letter of recommendation for Harry M. Clarke (quoted below) confirms. See L6, 309–10.
Publisher,” and added at the bottom of the dedication page, “(Never used. Chas L. Webster)” (PH in CU-MARK). That Webster had the dedication suggests that it was superseded during production.
Clemens seems to have formed his plan to change publishers earlier in the summer. A page of notes to Webster, evidently written about 26 July, concerning Frank Bliss, president of the American Publishing Company, includes this instruction: “See Frank & tell him my intention, but I withdraw if we trace any more underground work to his house” (NPV). A 13 September memorandum by Webster reads:
1000 words10 to 12% old bks.
20 on H.F. Bk if 20 represents ¾ profits
full statement 3 yrs 5 yrs
then copy rights to all books were to belong to S. L. C.
Not interfere with Osgood & other books.
Adven. of Huck Finn
Webster later added: “not to be acted upon at present” (NPV).
William Dean Howells to Charles L. Webster, 10 Apr 84, NPV. Howells’s second letter (16 Apr 84, NPV) read:
I expect to be in New York on Saturday i.e., 19 April, and should like very much to see you. If you are to be absent, please leave the name and address of our Newark shears-maker, with details of your proposed contract, so that I can go out to see him.
I will call at 658 about 10 a.m.
The address of the Webster company was 658 Broadway.
As he had in his earlier letters to his uncle, Webster spelled out the terms of his agreements at length. The books were
to be bound in all respects as well as the “Prince,” and at 17½ cents each. This includes wrapping each volume. . . . It cost 23 cents to bind “Tom Sawyer,” and 22 cents to bind the “Prince” & these prices did not include wrapping. I have made this contract with Robert Rutter one of the oldest & best binders in the city. . . . My contract provides that for subsiquent copies ordered I am to have them at the same price; “provided they are in lots of 1,000 copies or over.”
The contract also provided for a year’s free use of Rutter’s storehouse as a base for storage and shipping of large orders. Webster’s estimate of costs for the new book (“after paying for illustration, plates & composition”) totaled 35½ cents per volume, compared to 43 cents for Tom Sawyer and Prince. His estimate of costs for the prospectus was “about 36 or 37 cents each. The Prospectuses to Prince cost 75 cents & to Miss. cost 90 cents” (Charles L. Webster to SLC, 29 May 84, CU-MARK). Clemens answered on 31 May, “The contracts you have made are beyond praise. If we had had such on those other books I would have come out a good deal better” (SLC to Charles L. Webster, 31 May 84, NPV, in MTBus, 258). Watson Gill was a bookseller, publisher, and Syracuse book agent.
Of the five extant drawings dated 29 May, one is numbered “1-21647” and another “16-21647,” indicating they were the first and sixteenth pictures of group “21647.” From this we can infer that at least sixteen pictures were processed on that day, and possibly more. The five drawings processed on 29 May are:
(1) “Learning about Moses and the ‘Bulrushers,’ ” page 2 Kemble’s working caption: “ ‘After supper she got out her book & learned me about Moses & the bulrushes’ ”
(2) “Rubbing the Lamp,” page 17 “I got an old tin lamp and Iron Ring”
(3) “Reforming the Drunkard,” page 27 “held out his hand & says”
(4) “Falling from Grace,” page 28 “Nearly froze to death”
(5) “Raising a Howl,” page 35 “He hopped around the cabin” (all in NPV)
Eight extant drawings, of at least eleven, were processed on 31 May:
(1) “Jim and the Ghost,” page 51 “Then he dropped on his knees”
(2) “Misto Bradish’s Nigger,” page 56 “Mista Braddish’s nigga”
(3) “Old Hank Bunker,” page 66 “ ‘Old Hank Bunker’ ”
(4) “ ‘A Fair Fit,’ ” page 67 “ ‘Jim hitched it behind with hooks’ ”
(5) “ ‘Him and another Man,’ ” page 71 “ ‘Him & another man’ ”
(6) “She puts up a Snack,” page 74 “ ‘She put me up a snack’ ”
(7) “ ‘Please don’t, Bill,’ ” page 82 “ ‘Then I see a man stretched on the floor’ ”
(8) “ ‘It ain’t Good Morals,’ ” page 84 “ ‘Then they stood there & talked’ ” (all in NPV)
The extant 3 June drawings included the following seven (out of at least fifteen), five of which were chapter headings:
(1) “The Widow’s,” page 1, chapter 1 heading Kemble’s working caption: “The Widows”
(2) “They Tip-toed Along,” page 6, chapter 2 heading “We tip toed along”
(3) “Exploring the Cave,” page 58, chapter 9 heading “Exploring the cave”
(4) “Jim and the Snake,” page 64 “Jim grabbed Paps whiskey”
(5) “ ‘Come In,’ ” page 68, chapter 11 heading “ ‘Come in’ ”
(6) “ ‘Hump Yourself!’ ” page 76 “ ‘Git up & hump youself’ ”
(7) “On the Raft,” page 77, chapter 12 heading “ ‘on the raft’ ” (nos. 1 and 7 in Benoliel; all others in NPV)
Four other early drawings, including the frontispiece and the headings for chapters 4 and 6, lack the Moss company’s processing dates, but were probably also processed on 3 June:
(1) “Huckleberry Finn,” page xxviii, frontispiece not captioned by Kemble
(2) “!!!!!” page 18, chapter 4 heading not captioned by Kemble
(3) “Judge Thatcher surprised,” page 20 not captioned by Kemble
(4) “Getting out of the Way,” page 29, chapter 6 heading Kemble’s working caption: “I outrun him most of the time” (the frontispiece in CtHMTH, all others in NPV)
Eight of at least ten pictures dated 19 June by the Moss company are known to survive:
(1) “ ‘Hello, What’s Up?’ ” page 89 Kemble’s working caption: “ ‘Hello whats up’ ”
(2) “We turned in and Slept,” page 92 “ ‘We turned in & slept like dead people’ ”
(3) “The story of ‘Sollermun,’ ” page 96 “ ‘The story of Solomon’ ”
(4) “Young Harney Shepherdson,” page 144 “ ‘Pretty soon a young man came galloping down the road’ ”
(5) “ ‘Behind the Wood-rank,’ ” page 152 “ ‘A couple of young chaps behind a wood pile’ ”
(6) “Hiding Daytimes,” page 156 “ ‘And maybe see a steamboat’ ”
(7) “ ‘I am the Late Dauphin!’ ” page 164 “ ‘I am the late Dauphin’ ”
(8) “The King as Juliet,” page 169 “‘ The King as Juliet’ ” (no. 4 in CU-MARK, all others in NPV)
Of at least sixteen pictures dated 21 June, nine are known to survive:
(1) “Among the Snags,” page 101 “ ‘Amongst a lot of snags’ ”
(2) “Asleep on the Raft,” page 102 “Asleep with one arm across the oar”
(3) “ ‘Boy, that’s a Lie,’ ” page 126 “He’s white”
(4) “ ‘Here I is, Huck,’ ” page 128 “ ‘He was in the river under the stern oar’ ”
(5) “Climbing up the Bank,” page 131 “I climbed up the bank”
(6) “ ‘Buck,’ ” page 134 “Buck”
(7) “ ‘It made Her look too Spidery,’ ” page 138 “ ‘It made her look too spidery seemed to me’ ”
(8) “Col. Grangerford,” page 142 “Col Grangerford”
(9) uncaptioned tailpiece, page 165 “Tail piece” (all in NPV)
Clemens’s complaint about postage, which does not survive, evoked this explanation from Webster:
Not long since we sent a prospectus through the mail with the simple words sheep, half calf, & half morocco, written by the sample bindings, it was returned to us by the P.O. authorities with the information that it was subject to letter postage, & if any written word whatever was sent when we only paid paper postage we would be subject to a fine of $5000.
In view of this, when I sent you the proof the other day I saw the different typos. i.e., typographers had written their names in ink on each sheet, and as I did not want to pay a fine of $5000 which I knew would be imposed for a second breach, I sent it by letter postage. All the rules that we had access to, indicated that we must pay letter postage. Now you know that I have had no experience with authors manuscript and did not know of the exception, until I sent to the P.O. to find out this morning.
I write this simply to show you that that blunder was not carelessly done, but through a mistaken understanding of the law. (Charles L. Webster to SLC, 23 June 84, CU-MARK)
On 24 June Clemens offered a near apology: “I ran the risk of being mistaken, for that P.O. Department are always changing & distorting their rules” (SLC to Charles L. Webster, NPV, in MTBus, 261).
A group of Kemble’s drawings processed by the electrotypers on 23 June included at least thirty-one pictures from chapters 33 through 41. Three are known to survive:
(1) “Jim advises a Doctor,” page 341 “I doan go from heah widout a doctor”
(2) “Uncle Silas in Danger,” page 344 “I nearly ran into him”
(3) “ ‘Mr. Archibald Nichols, I presume?’ ” page 286 “Then he makes a graceful bow” (all courtesy of Christie’s)
On 8 July at least twenty-nine pictures were processed, only one of which—from chapter 28—is known to survive:
(1) “How to Find Them,” page 241 “ ‘There! Royal Nonesuch, Brickville’ ” (courtesy of Christie’s)
(Webster’s “account . . . to Sept. 1st,” in Charles L. Webster to SLC, 2 Sept 84, CU-MARK).
Such speculation is aided by a comparison of Kemble’s working captions with those eventually adopted, and a further comparison of the style of the captions with that of the page titles. The new captions tended to move away from Huck’s voice and to be specific to the drawings as well as to the text, in effect creating emblematic cartoons, or tableaux, complete in themselves. They often provided a commentary on the text, and sometimes their tone was ironic or at least showed editorial distance: for instance, “Reforming the Drunkard,” “Falling from Grace,” “Raising a Howl,” and “Jim and the Ghost” were substituted for Kemble’s working captions “held out his hand & says,” “Nearly froze to death,” “He hopped around the cabin,” and “Then he dropped on his knees” (pp. 27, 28, 35, and 51). Other alterations substituted different extracts from the text, such as “ ‘A Fair Fit’ ” and “ ‘Please don’t, Bill’ ” for Kemble’s “ ‘Jim hitched it behind with hooks’ ” and “ ‘Then I see a man stretched on the floor’ ” (pp. 67, 82). Still other captions were adopted from Kemble: for instance, those which simply identified a character, such as “Old Hank Bunker” (p. 66), “ ‘Buck’ ” (p. 134), and “Col. Grangerford” (p. 142). Clemens added or approved quotation marks for only 41 out of 174 captions, most of them quoting a speaker other than Huck, but a few taken from Huck’s speeches or narrative. In the “page titles,” many written in the same somewhat heavy-handed, ironic style as the captions, he added or approved quotation marks for only 6 out of 149 (and the quotation marks were kept in only 3 of the 177 titles that appeared following the chapter numbers in the table of contents).
In 1977 Teona Tone Gneiting discussed the Huckleberry Finn illustrations in depth, noting that Kemble deftly switched point of view where appropriate in his drawings—that is, from Huck’s perspective to that of the “omniscient illustrator.” Clearly, an omniscient illustrator’s pictures (which included pictures of Huck, and other “visual information that the text could not provide”) would by their nature call for captions not quoting Huck. She only speculated, however, that Clemens might have had something to do with the texts of the captions (Gneiting, 196–219). In 1982, Beverly David, who had access to the original Kemble drawings, correctly understood that a relationship existed between Kemble’s working captions and the revised captions, although she misconstrued the language of Kemble’s letter to Webster of 16 May 1884, in which he promised to bring the “illustrations together with the headings”; she assumed that Kemble meant picture captions rather than illustrated chapter headings (David 1982, 156).
Charles L. Webster to SLC, 23 Aug 84, 30 Aug 84, CU-MARK. In his letter of 30 August, Webster went on at length about both the Tom Sawyer plan and the proposed incentives for canvassers:
It seems impossible to make any arrangement whereby the other Gen. Agts. can sell “Huck Finn” and “Tom Sawyer” together, at a reduced price, as in order to do so they must have “Tom Sawyer” billed to them at 60% off at the very least.
The American Pub. Co. won’t bill them to me for a cent less than that, so that taking freights &c. out, I would lose money to bill them to Gen Agts at 60%.
The Gen. Agts. all say they can’t afford it, and I know this is true as we can hardly do it ourselves.
I wrote to Bliss asking him if he would bill to my Gen. Agts at 60%, charging goods to me, but he has not answered me as yet.
I write him today that he must do so, if he expects me to advertise Tom Sawyer in my circulars. I think that Co. are acting very foolishly. . . .
Webster’s typeset list of prizes for canvassers attached here. in order to make all the Gen Agents give the same prizes we shall have to bill the books used for such purposes at half Gen Agents price, or in other words pay half of it ourselves but even in such case we make a small profit on such books.
Of course all such books as we give to our own canvassers will be clear loss.
If you think the above too high a premium let me know. I think not myself as I think it will stimulate agts very much, and a good many will strive to reach the figures and fall short getting no prize.
Possibly we might strike out the prize for 50 copies, and make the first one for 100.
Gilder enclosed a typewritten copy of his response and the original of the superintendent’s complaint (also typewritten) in an 8 January 1886 letter to Clemens (CU-MARK; Gilder’s response and part of his letter to Clemens are published in Gilder, 398–99). Before doing so, however, he cut the printed letterhead, dateline, and signature from the superintendent’s letter. A printed dateline, canceled but legible, on the second sheet of the letter reads, “South Pueblo, Colorado. . . . 1885.” The letter in its entirety constitutes one of the earliest critical comments on the Century extracts:
The Century,
New York.
To the Editor;–
Doubtless the editor of the Century, in common with other editors, receives a vast amount of gratuitous advice. Every one imagines he would make a better editor than any one else. As a matter of business, if one does not like a piece of goods, he has the privilege of letting it alone. It is a satisfaction, however, to be allowed to protest against the quality. Your correspondent has been a paying and enthusiastic reader of the Century for many years. The magazine is one of his most valued friends. As such it is as mortifying to have it commit a fault as for any personal friend to show lack of discretion and well ordered behavior. I must emphatically object to any more Mark Twain articles of merit, or demerit, and tone of those that have recently appeared in your otherwise most excellent periodical. They are atrocious, and destitute of a single redeeming quality, and wholly unworthy a great magazine like our beloved Century. They are hardly worthy a place in the columns of the average country newspaper which never assumes any literary airs. If written by any one else but Mark Twain, such silly, pointless wit and puerile literary attempts would be relegated to the most convenient waste basket. Mark Twain has written some readable and laughable books and sketches. Either he has “written out” or is speculating on a name. This is the first time that I have ever written to an editor or public teacher or servant relative to his work. But my allegiance to my duty as a teacher, my interest in placing high ideals before the youth of our land, and my desire to see a refined and discriminating literary taste fostered among the people have induced me to turn free adviser and venture a protest which I am sure is amply sustained by many other readers.
Yours very truly,
signature torn away by Gilder
frontispiece of Mark Twain] A week or so after printing had begun on the first edition, Mark Twain suggested to his publisher, Charles L. Webster, that they include this frontispiece, saying “I suppose it would help sell the book” (SLC to Webster, 8 Sept 84, NPV, in MTBus, 276). It is a photograph of a plaster casting of a clay bust sculpted from life by Karl Gerhardt (1853–1940), who had just returned from Paris after three years of art study financed by the Clemenses. (Neither Gerhardt’s clay original nor this plaster cast is known to survive; the only known bronze casting is in the Mark Twain House in Hartford.) Webster agreed to Mark Twain’s suggestion, even as he pointed out that it was too late to drop the original frontispiece (“Huckleberry Finn”) and that they would therefore “have to face your picture against it,” creating a double frontispiece like that in A Tramp Abroad (Webster to SLC, 13 Sept 84, CU-MARK; SLC 1880a; see the introduction, pp. 738–39). As Clemens had recommended, the photograph was reproduced by the heliotype photo-gelatine process, which was widely used for art reproductions (Jussim, 341; Pasko, 265). The heliotypes were separately printed, then inserted into each book and salesman’s prospectus before binding. This frontispiece appeared in successive printings of the first edition over the next six years, but was omitted from the second or “cheap” edition (1891–94) and all subsequent lifetime editions. Louis J. Budd has suggested that Mark Twain may have had more than helping sales in mind when he decided to include this image of himself: “did the bust say: Don’t confuse me totally with the ragged, naive, barely literate narrator?” (Budd 1985, 34). The first half of the manuscript found in 1990 tends to confirm the suggestion that Mark Twain was anxious about such a confusion. The first manuscript page bears the working title, “Huckleberry Finn | Reported by | Mark Twain” (see Manuscript Facsimiles, p. 565). In two later works written in Huck’s voice, Mark Twain found other solutions to the problem: “Tom Sawyer Abroad,” first published serially in St. Nicholas Magazine in 1893–94, was “By Huck Finn. Edited by Mark Twain,” and “Tom Sawyer, Detective,” first published in Harper’s New Monthly Magazine in 1896, was “BY MARK TWAIN” but “as told by huck finn” (SLC 1893–94, 20; SLC 1896, 344).
frontispiece of Huckleberry Finn] In early April 1884, Clemens chose the young cartoonist Edward Windsor Kemble (1861–1933) to illustrate his book. Although Kemble’s sample drawings for the first chapters won him the job, Clemens was not entirely satisfied with the
[begin page 375]
Some of the pictures are good, but none of them are very very good. The faces are generally ugly, & wrenched into inhuman distortions over-expression amounting sometimes to distortion. As a rule (though not always) the people in these pictures are forbidding & repulsive. Reduction will modify them, no doubt, but it can hardly make them pleasant folk to look at. An artist shouldn’t follow a book too literally, perhaps—if this is the necessary result. And mind you, much of the drawing, in these pictures is careless & bad.
The pictures will do—they will just barely do—& that is the best I can say for them. Suppose you submit them to t
The frontispiece has the usual blemish—an ugly, ill-drawn face. Huck Finn is an exceedingly good-hearted boy, & should carry a good & good-looking face.
The original drawing for the frontispiece shows numerous and extensive revisions to the arms and face, at least some of which must have been Kemble’s effort to respond to Clemens’s criticism (see the introduction, p. 718). Kemble’s later drawings were more to Mark Twain’s satisfaction, however. On 11 June 1884 the author commented on the illustrations submitted for chapters 13 through 20: “I knew Kemble had it in him, if he would only modify hims his violences & come down to careful, painstaking work. This batch of pictures is most rattling good. They please me exceedingly” (SLC to Webster: 7 May 84, 24 May 84, 11 June 84, NPV, in MTBus, 253, 255–56, 260).
NOTICE . . . Per G. G., Chief of Ordnance.] Mark Twain’s manuscript draft did not include the phrase, “persons attempting to
[begin page 376]
One morning he appeared in my study in a high state of excitement, & wanted to borrow my revolver. He had had a rupture with a colored man, & was going to kill him on sight. . . . I saw that at bottom he didn’t want to kill anyone—he only wanted some person of known wisdom & high authority to persuade him out of it; it would save his character with his people; they would see that he was properly bloodthirsty, but had been obliged to yield to wise & righteous counsel. (SLC 1906a, 24–25; see also Hirst)
EXPLANATORY . . . The Author.] Mark Twain was neither joking nor being deliberately obscure, despite the conclusions drawn by some critics (see, among others, Rulon, and Buxbaum). David Carkeet has shown that, except for what he characterizes as some inconsistencies overlooked during the long course of composition and revision, Mark Twain indeed made distinctions among “dialects,” or kinds of nonstandard English (Carkeet 1979; see also the introduction, pp. 781–90 passim). The seven mentioned in this notice can be identified with the following speakers:
1. “the Missouri negro dialect”: Jim and four other black characters (Jack, Lize, Nat, young “wench” at Phelps farm);2. “the extremest form of the backwoods South-Western dialect”: Arkansas gossips (Sister Hotchkiss and others, chapter 41);
3. “the ordinary ‘Pike-County’ dialect”: Huck, Tom, Aunt Polly, Ben Rogers, Pap Finn, Judith Loftus, the duke, Buck Grangerford, the Wilks daughters, and the watchman of the Walter Scott passage;
4–7. “four modified varieties of this last”: | (a) thieves on the Walter Scott; | (b) the king, Tim Collins; | (c) the Bricksville loafers; | (d) Aunt Sally and Uncle Silas Phelps, the Pikesville boy.
Editorial work on the complete manuscript and other documents has shown that many, though not all, of the “inconsistencies” noted by Carkeet were intentional: Mark Twain regularly had different speakers within these seven groups use different locutions, and he made fine distinctions within the speech even of a single character, often through meticulous revision. For instance, Huck always says “again” while Pap almost always says “agin,” even though both are “ordinary” Pike County speakers. And Jim is made to say both “ain’ dat” and “ain’t it,” dropping the t of “ain’t” only when the word following begins with a consonant. In 1874, preparing to revise “A True Story,” Clemens wrote to William Dean Howells, “I amend dialect stuff by talking & talking & talking it till it sounds right—& I had difficulty with this negro talk because a negro sometimes (rarely) says ‘goin’ ’ & sometimes ‘gwyne,’ & they make just such discrepancies in other words—& when you come to reproduce them on paper they look as if the variation resulted from the writer’s carelessness. But I want to work at the proofs & get the dialect as nearly right as possible” (20 Sept 74, NN-B, in L6, 233). On 17 January 1885, his sister-in-law Mollie wrote from Keokuk, Iowa:
[begin page 378]
The Adventures . . . Finn.] Kemble’s use of “The” in the title here is mistaken. The definite article was also mistakenly used in the running heads of the first edition, and in some of Webster and Company’s advertisements for the book (see, for example, Publisher’s Advertisements, 1884–1891, pp. 659–61, 663). It appeared throughout the English and Continental editions, as well as the third and fourth American editions, published in 1896 and 1899 (see Description of Texts, pp. 804–6). Just after completing the book manuscript, Clemens himself quoted the title with the article in a letter to James R. Osgood, but without it in one to Andrew Chatto, both on 1 September 1883. And probably he, rather than the editor or typesetter, used it in the introductory note for the selections published in the Century Magazine (SLC 1884b). Still, there is little room for doubt that he intended the book title to omit the article. Kemble’s design for the cover, which was among the first illustrations reviewed and approved by Webster and Clemens, omitted the article, as did Clemens’s holograph title page from the summer of 1883 (see Manuscript Facsimiles, p. 562). The printed title page of the first edition, as well as the printed half-title, the illustrated cover and the spine (and both front and back of the prospectus) all agree with the holograph title page in omitting the definite article (SLC to Osgood, 1 Sept 83, WEU; SLC to Chatto, 1 Sept 83, Uk, in Gates, 79; Webster to SLC, 5 May 84, CU-MARK; SLC to Webster, 7 May 84, NPV, in MTLP, 174; David and Sapirstein, 38).
You don’t know about me . . . “The Adventures of Tom Sawyer,”] In chapter 6 of Tom Sawyer (1876) Mark Twain had described Huck Finn as “the juvenile pariah of the village . . . son of the town drunkard,” adding that he “was cordially hated and dreaded by all the mothers of the town, because he was idle, and lawless, and vulgar and bad—and because all their children admired him so, and delighted in his forbidden society” (ATS, 47).
[begin page 379]
[begin page 380]
Huckleberry came and went, at his own free will. He slept on doorsteps in fine weather and in empty hogsheads in wet; he did not have to go to school or to church, or call any being master or obey anybody; he could go fishing or swimming when and where he chose, and stay as long as it suited him; nobody forbade him to fight; he could sit up as late as he pleased; he was always the first boy that went barefoot in the spring and the last to resume leather in the fall; he never had to wash, nor put on clean clothes; he could swear wonderfully. In a word, everything that goes to make life precious, that boy had. So thought every harassed, hampered, respectable boy in St. Petersburg. (ATS, 48)
On hearing this passage read aloud, Clemens’s sister Pamela said, “Why, that’s Tom Blankenship!” (MTBus, 265). Mark Twain had said in his preface that “Huck Finn is drawn from life” (ATS, xvii), and in 1906 he repeated the assertion in his autobiography. A letter from Alex C. Toncray, an old Hannibal acquaintance, asked him if it were true that Huck Finn was based on his brother, A. O. Toncray. Clemens said:
I have replied that “Huckleberry Finn” was Tom Blankenship. . . . Tom’s father was at one time Town Drunkard, an exceedingly well defined and unofficial office of those days. . . .
In “Huckleberry Finn” I have drawn Tom Blankenship exactly as he was. He was ignorant, unwashed, insufficiently fed; but he had as good a heart as ever any boy had. His liberties were totally unrestricted. He was the only really independent person—boy or man—in the community, and by consequence he was tranquilly and continuously happy, and was envied by all the rest of us. We liked him; we enjoyed his society. And as his society was forbidden us by our parents, the prohibition trebled and quadrupled its value, and therefore we sought and got more of his society than of any other boy’s. (AD, 8 Mar 1906, CU-MARK, in MTA, 2:174–75)
One of eight children of Woodson and Mahala Blankenship, Tom was four years older than Clemens (Inds, 302–3). Huck’s last name was borrowed from another town drunkard—Jimmy Finn, the prototype for Pap Finn (see the note to 10.10–12). The origin of Huck’s first name is less clearly documented. Mark Twain certainly knew the derogatory meaning for “huckleberry”—an inconsequential or unimportant person. When he wrote chapter 26 of Connecticut Yankee, four years after finishing Huckleberry Finn, he had the local reporter for the Camelot Weekly Hosannah and Literary Volcano praise two knights, including Sir Palamides the Saracen, “who is no huckleberry himself” (CY , 11, 304). Mark Twain doubtless also knew the huckleberry’s general connotation: a plain, common fruit, not requiring cultivation in order to flourish, often signifying something backward or rural (Colwell, 71, 74).
[begin page 381]
[begin page 382]
illustration] Kemble used a single model, for Huck and “for every character in the story,” a neighbor, sixteen-year-old Courtland P. Morris, hired at four dollars a week. Morris, Kemble wrote, “tallied with my idea of Huck. He was a bit tall for the ideal boy, but I could jam him down a few pegs in my drawing and use him for the other characters. . . . He was always grinning, and one side of his cheek was usually well padded with a ‘sour ball’ or a huge wad of molasses taffy” (Kemble, 43). Morris recalled:
The props we used for illustrating the characters in Huckleberry Finn were, for the most part, old clothes belonging to my father and mother, with some of mine thrown in, which I found stored away in trunks up in the attic of our house.
The battered old straw hat, which was so much a part of Huck, was mine. . . The old single-barrel shotgun, another of Huck’s treasured possessions, was a gun which my aunt had given me a few years before. . . .
In portraying the female characters in the book, Aunt Polly, Widow Douglas, the woman who caught Huck trying to pass off as a girl, and the others, I would get into an old faded dress of my mother’s. Sometimes, if the text called for it, I’d don a sun-bonnet belonging to my mother. (Morris 1930)
Kemble presented his young model with one of the first copies of the book, autographed “To ‘Huckleberry Court’ ” (Morris 1938).
fetched the niggers in and had prayers] During the time of Huck’s story, “nigger” was a common colloquial term for black person, used by whites and blacks to refer to slave or freeman, both in the North and the South. Colonel Thomas Wentworth Higginson (1823–1911), the white commander of the first regiment of ex-slaves mustered into Union service, noted in 1862 that “This offensive word . . . is almost as common with them as at the North, and far more common than with well-bred slaveholders” (Higginson, 1, 21). Mark Twain was certainly aware of growing objections to its use, and about 1869 he seems to have stopped using it in print, at least when speaking in his own voice (Pettit, 42–43; but see the note to 188.13–16). In Huckleberry Finn, however, he deliberately reprises it as a literary device to realistically depict the social class and speech of his characters. Nevertheless, by 1885, he would probably have agreed with the editor of the Century Dictionary (1889–91) who declared that even though “nigger” was “formerly and to some extent still is used without opprobrious intent . . . its use is now confined to colloquial or illiterate speech, in which it generally conveys more or less of contempt” (4:3989). In addition to those who deplored
[begin page 384]
When we consider that the programme is advertised & becomes cold-blooded newspaper reading I think we should avoid any risk of appearing—even to the most thin-skinned and super-sensative and hypercritical matrons and misses—the faintest bit gross. In the text, whether on the printed page or in the readers utterances the phrase is absolutely without a hint of grossness; but alone on a published programme, it invites discreditable conjectures of what the context may be, from that portion of our public who cannot live without aromatic vinegar. (Cable to SLC, 25 Oct 84, CU-MARK, in Cardwell, 105)
Objections to the use of “nigger” in Huckleberry Finn were not made explicit by even a single newspaper reviewer, north or south, at the time of first publication, although it is likely that Concord and Boston’s objections to the book’s “ignorant dialect” and “vulgarity” tacitly included its use of the term (see Victor Fischer; Budd 1999; Mailloux, 102; and additional notices and reviews in CU-MARK courtesy of Steven Mailloux). All three extracts from the book published by the Century Magazine in late 1884 and early 1885 used the word without warning or apology, unless we count Mark Twain’s signed introduction to these passages which carefully referred to “The negro Jim” (29:268). For an acute discussion of the different connotations of “nigger” in Huckleberry Finn, see David L. Smith, especially 4–6; for a modern lexicographer’s analysis, including four senses distinguished by the color and intent of the speaker, see Cassidy, 3:788–89; for a personal account of a black youth’s encounter with this loaded word in Huckleberry Finn, see Bradley, xxxix–xlviii; for further critical and factual contributions to the discussion of Mark Twain’s use of the term, see Railton, 393–99; Sloane, 28–29; Janows and Lee; Rasmussen, 338; and Pettit, 40–50 (despite use of four 1869–70 Buffalo Express articles misattributed to Mark Twain).
Jim] In 1897, recalling the summers he spent as a boy at his uncle John Quarles’s farm, Mark Twain said:
All the negroes were friends of ours, & with those of our own age we were in effect comrades. I say, in effect, using the phrase as a modification. We were comrades, & yet not comrades; color & condition interposed a subtle line which both parties were conscious of, & which rendered complete fusion impossible. We had a faithful & affectionate good friend, ally & adviser in “Uncle Dan’l,” a middle-aged slave whose head was the best one in the negro-quarter, whose sympathies were wide & warm, & whose heart was honest & simple & knew no guile. He has served me well, these many, many years. I have not seen him for half a century, & yet spiritually I have had his welcome company a good part of that time, & have staged him in books under his own name & as “Jim,” & carted him all around—to Hannibal, down the Mississippi on a raft, & even across the Desert of Sahara in a balloon [in Tom Sawyer Abroad]—& he has endured it all with the patience & friendliness & loyalty which were his birthright. It was on the farm that I got my strong liking for his race & my appreciation of certain of its fine qualities. This feeling & this estimate have stood the test of fifty years & have suffered no impairment. (SLC 1897–98, 44–46)
[begin page 386]
a drownded man don’t float on his back, but on his face] Folklore held that one would “always find the body of a drowned woman floating face up; the body of a drowned man, face down. Although these positions are occasionally reversed in some sayings, this is the general belief—they are the normal positions in coitus” (Hyatt, item 15134). Mark Twain may well have encountered a variant of this belief in one of his favorite books, W. E. H. Lecky’s History of European Morals from Augustus to Charlemagne. Lecky quotes the Roman historian Pliny:
[begin page 388]
[begin page 389]
new judge said he was agoing to make a man of him] In 1867, having visited Hannibal for the first time since 1861, Mark Twain recalled an incident from his youth when
Jimmy Finn, the town drunkard, reformed, and that broke up the only saloon in the village. But the temperance people liked it; they were willing enough to sacrifice public prosperity to public morality. And so they made much of Jimmy Finn—dressed him up in new clothes, and had him out to breakfast and to dinner, and so forth, and showed him off as a great living curiosity—a shining example of the power of temperance doctrines when earnestly and eloquently set forth. Which was all very well, you know, and sounded well, and looked well in print, but Jimmy Finn couldn’t stand it. He got remorseful about the loss of his liberty; and then he got melancholy from thinking about it so much; and after that, he got drunk. He got awfully drunk in the chief citizen’s house, and the next morning that house was as if the swine had tarried in it. That outraged the temperance
[begin page 391]
In 1877 Mark Twain attributed an effort to “reform” the town drunkard to the character based on his brother Orion in “Autobiography of a Damned Fool” (S&B, 152–55). In 1906, he asserted that his father had tried, and failed, to reform both Finn and Injun Joe (AD, 8 Mar 1906, CU-MARK, in MTA, 2:175).
[begin page 392]
he couldn’t be sold till he’d been in the State six months] By the 1840s all slave states, including Missouri, absolutely prohibited immigration of free blacks. In Hannibal free blacks could be treated as runaways if they failed to satisfy stringent legal requirements that they register with the state and have a certificate of freedom. An 1843 Missouri law further stipulated that free blacks be licensed; and the 1855 statutes, which restricted licensing and length of residence, “were very severe”:
No colored person could live in this State without a license, and these licenses were to be issued only to certain classes of them; moreover, bond, not exceeding a thousand dollars, had to be given in security for good behavior. The negro was not allowed to retain in his possession the license or other free papers, though he could obtain them in the event of his moving from one county to another, as they had to be filed with the clerk of the county court where he resided. No free negro or mulatto could emigrate into the State or enter the State unless in the service of a white man, or for the purpose of passing through. In either case the time that he could remain in the borders was limited. If he stayed longer he was liable to arrest, a fine of $10, and expulsion. If the fine was not paid he was further liable to not more than twenty lashes, and the court could either order that he immediately leave the State or else hire him out until the fine, costs and expenses of imprisonment had been paid for by his labor. (Conard, 5:604–5)
One Hannibal ordinance made mandatory an annual fee of five dollars, a cash bond, and “evidence of good moral character and behavior” for the required license (Hurd, 2:168n, 169n, 170; Welsh, 38).
[begin page 393]
Tramp—tramp—tramp; that’s the dead] “Tramp, tramp, tramp,” a common nineteenth-century refrain, appears, for instance, in “The Dead March,” a temperance song included in an 1882 collection that Clemens owned, The Treasury of Song for the Home Circle: The Richest, Best-Loved Gems. The lyrics read in part:
March the feet of a million men.
If none shall pity and none shall save,
Where will all this marching end?
The young, the strong, and the old are there,
In woeful ranks as they hurry past,
With not a moment to think or care
What the fate that comes at last.
| Tramp, tramp, tramp . . .
They are rushing madly on,
Tramp, tramp, tramp . . .
What a fearful ghastly throng;
Rouse, Christian rouse ere it be too late,
Rescue these souls from the drunkard’s fate.
(Morrison, 448–49; thanks to Paul Baender for this discovery)
[begin page 394]
illustration] Kemble’s drawing of Jim quotes unmistakably from one of the most widely known graphic symbols of the campaign to abolish slavery:
The image is of a kneeling African man, all but naked, his hands and feet chained, his gaze directed heavenward, and is usually captioned, “Am I Not a Man and a Brother?” It was originally adopted in the 1780s as the seal of the Society for the Abolition of Slavery in England. . . . Beginning in the 1820s, American
[begin page 396]
The most famous version of this image appeared on a broadside of John Greenleaf Whittier’s poem “My Countryman in Chains,” first published in 1837 and sold, beginning in March of that year, from the Anti-Slavery Offices in Boston and New York. (Reilly, 54–55)
Mark Twain alluded to the slogan (“Am I not a man and a brother?”) in chapter 4 of Tom Sawyer. When cousin Mary undertakes to wash Tom before church, he emerges from the cleansing as “a man and a brother, without distinction of color” (ATS, 28, 263).
People would call me a low-down ablitionist . . . for keeping mum] In 1847, Tom Blankenship’s older brother, Benson, shunned the fifty-dollar reward offered for a runaway slave he found hiding on Sny Island, near the Illinois shore. He “kept the runaway over there in the marshes all summer. The negro would fish and Ben would carry him scraps of other food” (MTB, 1:63–64; see also Wecter, 148). This kindness must have been the more impressive because Benson’s family was itself so poor. “In those old slave-holding days the whole community was agreed as to one thing,” Mark Twain wrote in 1895,
the awful sacredness of slave property. To help steal a horse or a cow was a low crime, but to help a hunted slave, or feed him or shelter him, or hide him, or comfort him, in his troubles, his terrors, his despair, or hesitate to promptly betray him to the slave-catcher when opportunity offered was a much baser crime, & carried with it a stain, a moral smirch which nothing could wipe away. That this sentiment should exist among slave-owners is comprehensible—there were good commercial reasons for it—but that it should exist & did exist among the paupers, the loafers the tag-rag & bobtail of the community, & in a passionate & uncompromising form, is not in our remote day realizable. (Notebook 35, TS p. 35, CU-MARK, in Blair 1960a, 144)
The strong local sentiment about “the awful sacredness of slave property” was amply demonstrated in 1841 when three abolitionists from around Quincy, Illinois (across the river from Hannibal), tried to induce three Missouri slaves to escape. The slaves betrayed and helped capture their would-be liberators, who narrowly escaped lynching. After a brief trial, the jury—which included Clemens’s father, John Marshall Clemens—found them guilty, and the judge imposed a sentence of twelve years’ imprisonment at hard labor. Sharp clashes with abolitionists continued in the 1840s as anti-abolitionist vigilance committees were appointed in every township of Marion County. As a teenager, Clemens clearly shared his community’s view of the “infernal abolitionists,” as he wrote in an 1853 letter to his mother (24 Aug 53, L1, 4). Over the next ten or fifteen years, however, his attitudes underwent a fundamental change. When he died in 1910, William Dean Howells characterized him as “the most desouthernized Southerner I ever
[begin page 397]
sell me down to Orleans] Being sold “down the river” was the worst of fates for any slave: not only would he be permanently separated from his family, he would likely face a life of hard labor on a sugar or cotton plantation in Louisiana. In 1890 or 1891, in an attempt to explain how his “kind-hearted and compassionate” mother could tolerate slavery, Mark Twain wrote that
there was nothing about the slavery of the Hannibal region to rouse one’s dozing humane instincts to activity. It was the mild domestic slavery, not the brutal plantation article. Cruelties were very rare, and exceedingly and wholesomely unpopular. To separate and sell the members of a slave family to different masters was a thing not well liked by the people, and so it was not often done, except in the settling of estates. . . . The “nigger trader” was loathed by everybody. He was regarded as a sort of human devil who bought and conveyed poor helpless creatures to hell—for to our whites and blacks alike the southern plantation was simply hell; no milder name could describe it. If the threat to sell an incorrigible slave “down the river” would not reform him, nothing would—his case was past cure. (“Jane Lampton Clemens,” Inds , 88)
Clemens’s memory of how slaves and slave families were treated in Hannibal is somewhat at odds with the statistics for Missouri as a whole. In the 1850s, for instance, perhaps thirty percent of Missouri slaves sold locally “were children under fifteen who were sold without either parent” (Tadman, 138).
[begin page 398]
[begin page 400]
Jim grabbed pap’s whisky jug and begun to pour it down] For snakebite the 1867 Gunn’s New Family Physician prescribed the following remedy:
Internally, give the patient all the Whisky he can drink. From a quart to a gallon should be drunk in six or eight hours. No fears need be entertained of making the patient drunk. You may fill him with Whisky, then let him swim in it, and it will not make him drunk, so long as the poison of the snake remains in the system. . . . It is a complete antidote for Snakebite, if taken freely, and may be relied on in any and all cases. It should be drunk like water for a few hours, and continued, at short intervals, until the patient gives signs of intoxication, when the quantity should gradually be diminished, as the disease is beginning to recede. Keep him “under the influence of liquor,” however, until you are sure he is out of danger. (Gunn 1867, 515)
An 1861 newspaper story in the St. Louis Missouri Democrat, which Clemens could have read, told of a snakebite victim cured by “a full quart of whisky and ninety drops of hartshorn” given in three doses at five-minute intervals (“Remarkable Case of a Rattlesnake Bite,” 11 June 61, in Branch 1983, 578).
[begin page 401]
[begin page 402]
[begin page 403]
[begin page 404]
[begin page 405]
a sailor’s life’s the life for me] The ferryman echoes a line from a song in Isaac Bickerstaff’s Spoil’d Child, a long-lived two-act farce first staged in 1790:
Just come home from sea, Sir,
Of all the lives I ever led,
A sailor’s life for me, Sir.
Yeo, yeo, yeo! yeo, yeo, yeo!
(act 2, scene 1, in Bickerstaff, 3:21)
illustration] On 25 June 1884, Clemens wrote to his publisher, Charles L. Webster, about the proof of this illustration: “It occurs to me, now, that on the pilot house of that steamboat-wreck the artist has put TEXAS—having been misled by some of Huck’s remarks about the boat’s ‘texas’—a thing which is a part of every boat. That word had better be removed from that pilot house” (NPV, in MTBus, 262). Webster had the picture corrected before publication.
[begin page 406]
[begin page 407]
[begin page 408]
[begin page 409]
[begin page 410]
the tune the old cow died on] Although the old cow dies in a great many folk and minstrel songs, the only one found in which she is killed by the tune is a folk song, evidently of English or Irish origin:
One summer’s afternoon,
And sat himself down by the maple grove
And sang himself this tune.
Chorus:
Ri fol de ol, Di ri fol dal di
Tune the old cow died on.
(Musick, 105–6; in Hearn 2001, 455–56)
“Whoo-oop! I’m the old original . . . after sweeps.] Literary depictions of comic braggarts such as Bob and the Child of Calamity date back at least to Aristophanes’ The Frogs (405 b.c.). In the United States, early nineteenth-century frontier humor and tall tales were filled with characters such as the legendary keelboatman, Mike Fink, who in an 1842 tale was reported to have said:
I never was particular, about what’s called a fair fight, I just ask a half a chance, and the odds against me; and if I then don’t keep clear of snags and sawyers, let me spring a leak, and go to the bottom. . . . Well, I walk tall into varmint and Indian, it’s a way I’ve got, and it comes as natural as grinning to a hyena. I’m a regular tornado, tough as a hickory withe, long-winded as a nor’-wester. I can strike a blow like a falling tree, and every lick makes a gap in the crowd that lets in an acre of sunshine. . . . I must fight something, or I’ll catch the dry rot, burnt brandy won’t save me. (Thorpe 1842, in Estes, 177–78)
Unlike early American swaggerers whose exploits almost justified their threats, typical Old World specimens had been bluffing cowards who ran away from fights. Beginning in the 1850s most American comic writers followed European patterns, as did Clemens in his 1852 sketch “The Dandy Frightening the Squatter” (ET&S1, 63–65), and in the present episode (see Blair 1960a, 115–16; Blair 1960b, 29–31, 154; Blair and Hill, 128–51, 255–62, 314).
[begin page 411]
“Jolly, jolly raftsman’s the life for me,”] An 1844 minstrel song attributed to Daniel Emmett, with lyrics by Andrew Evans (entitled “The Raftsman,” as sung by A. F. Winnemore of the Georgia Champions, and
[begin page 412]
My Raft is by the shore
She’s light and free
To be a jolly Raftsman’s the life for me
And as we glide along
Our song shall be
Dearest Dine I love but thee.
a body that don’t get started right when he’s little, ain’t got no show] This passage echoes an opinion Mark Twain held about the moral nature of mankind. According to Albert Bigelow Paine, “Among the books of his summer reading at Quarry Farm, as far back as 1874, there was a copy of W. E. H. Lecky’s History of European Morals, a volume that made a deep impression upon Mark Twain and exerted no small influence upon his intellectual life” (Paine, ix). Lecky distinguished two opposing schools of morality:
One of them is generally described as the stoical, the intuitive, the independent or the sentimental; the other as the epicurean, the inductive, the utilitarian, or the selfish. The moralists of the former school . . . believe that we have a natural power of perceiving that some qualities, such as benevolence, chastity, or veracity, are better than others. . . . The moralist of the opposite school denies that we have any such natural perception. He maintains that we have by nature absolutely no knowledge of merit and demerit, . . . and that we derive these notions solely from an observation of the course of life which is conducive to human happiness. (Lecky, 1:3)
Lecky favored “the former school,” and Huck, in his instinctual desire to help Jim, seems to conform to this point of view. Nevertheless, his statement that he has failed to do the right thing because he didn’t “get started right” when he was little, illustrates the position of “the opposite school,” which held that environment determines morality. In a marginal comment written in his copy of Lecky, Clemens expressed his own belief that “all moral perceptions are acquired by the influences around us; these influences begin in infancy; we never get a chance to find out whether we have any that are innate or not” (Davis, 4; see Blair 1960a, 131–44, and Boewe).
[begin page 414]
[begin page 416]
a woman in a slim black dress . . . Never See Thee More Alas.”] Although new to Huck, this picture would have been familiar to any middle-class reader. It includes the “stock elements” of standard nineteenth-century mourning pictures: “the weeping willow, tombstone, and pensive mourner leaning on the monument. Even the style of dress common in mourning pictures is accurately reproduced” by Huck’s description (Strickland, 228). Huck’s allusion to this woman’s “very wee black slippers, like a chisel” is echoed in Mark Twain’s characterization, in chapter 38 of Life on the Mississippi, of illustrations in Godey’s Lady’s Book: “each five-foot woman with a two-inch wedge sticking from under her dress and letting-on to be half of her foot” (SLC 1883a, 400). See the illustrations.
dead bird laying on its back . . . tears running down her cheeks] Magazines such as Godey’s Lady’s Book frequently illustrated children mourning their dead pets, particularly pet birds: for example, “The Dead Dove” in the February 1852 issue, or “The Dead Robin” in The Ladies’ Repository (Cincinnati) for May 1855. Engravings depicting bereaved women—often using narrative details like the black sealing-wax—were likewise commonplace. See, for example, “The Widow” in the 1847 Friendship’s Offering; “The Empty Cradle” in Godey’s Lady’s Book for 1847; or “Woman’s Grief” in the 1842 Friendship’s
[begin page 419]
young woman . . . on the rail of a bridge all ready to jump off] Portrayals of women in despair, appealing to heaven for relief or threatening suicide, were less than commonplace in the ladies’ magazines and annuals; nonetheless the genre of even this outlandish drawing can be identified with the following, called “Supplication,” in the November 1848 issue of Graham’s Magazine (Fayette Robinson, frontispiece, 267).
Ode to Stephen Dowling Bots, Dec’d] Sentimental obituary verse was ubiquitous in American magazines, annuals, and gift books at the time of the story. Like many fellow humorists, Mark Twain could not resist the temptation to burlesque this form. He published his first parody of an elegiac poem, “The Burial of Sir Abner Gilstrap,” in 1853 at the age of seventeen (ET&S1, 106–9). In 1854 he became familiar with mortuary doggerel published routinely in the death notices of the Philadelphia Public Ledger, and almost certainly “set up some of that poetry” altered for comic purposes while working as a compositor on the Ledger (SLC 1885e). He eventually published two brief articles in 1870 and another in the 1880s on the subject (SLC 1870c; SLC 1870d; SLC [1880?]; Budd 1977, 2). A number of “sources” for this “Ode” have been proposed, ranging from the poetry of Julia A. Moore to the hymns of Isaac Watts to the columns of the Philadelphia Ledger itself (Blair 1960a, 209–13; Byers 1971; Branch 1984, 2–3). But Mark Twain’s “Ode” is a burlesque of the form, not a parody of any particular obituary verse or writer of such verse, and given his long acquaintance with such poems, it is unlikely that any single “model” can be identified. In his manuscript, Mark Twain originally ended the poem with an additional stanza, which he deleted before publication. It burlesques the diction and exhorting tone of such verse, and echoes the first or last stanzas of typical English ballads (see, for instance, Evelyn Kendrick Wells, 217–19, 272; Bronson 1962, 2:327–29; Bronson 1976, 23, 414):
So shape ye your varigated lots,
That you can all die, when you come for to die,
Like the late sweet Stephen D. Bots.
(MS1, 427½, NBuBE)
[begin page 421]
“The Last Link is Broken”] A sentimental song written by William Clifton in about 1840:
And the words thou hast spoken have render’d me free;
That bright glance misleading, on others may shine,
Those eyes smil’d unheeding when tears burst from mine.
(Clifton)
In the margin of the manuscript page on which Sophia Grangerford is introduced, Clemens wrote “Sophia. Last Link.” In 1897 he recalled that he associated this song with a Hannibal contemporary of his, Eliza Hyde, and he used it to illustrate his remark that “songs tended to regrets for bygone days and vanished joys” in the days of his youth ( Inds, 96, 99). In chapter 38, Tom will call it “painful music.”
“The Battle of Prague”] A ten-minute piano piece of program music written in 1788 by Franz Kotzwara (1730–91) of Bohemia. It featured staccato notes to simulate flying bullets and a wailing treble figure to suggest the cries of the wounded. By the 1840s it had become an overworked standard (Slater, 108–9). In 1913, Clemens’s childhood friend Anna Laura Hawkins (Laura Frazer) remembered how she and the twelve-year-old Clemens used to climb a hill to visit Mrs. Richard T. Holliday: “Her house, I remember, had a special attraction for us. She owned a piano, and it was not merely a piano; it was a piano with a drum attachment. Oh, ‘The Battle of Prague,’ executed with that marvelous drum attachment! It was our favorite selection, because it had so much drum in it” (Abbott, 17; Hawkins and Holliday are identified in notes to 47.17 and 1.15–16). In A Tramp Abroad—and in an 1878 notebook entry (N&J2, 142)—Mark Twain described a performance of this piece by an Arkansas bride which he had heard in a Swiss hotel drawing room:
Without any more preliminaries, she turned on all the horrors of the “Battle of Prague,” that venerable shivaree, and waded chin deep in the blood of the slain. . . . The audience stood it with pretty fair grit for a while, but when the cannonade
[begin page 422]
Col. Grangerford . . . good mannered where he was.] This description of Colonel Grangerford, written in the summer of 1876, is very similar to that of Judge Griswold in Mark Twain’s unfinished novel “Simon Wheeler, Detective,” written in the winter of 1877–78, which also featured a destructive feud:
He was sixty years old; very tall, very spare, with a long, thin, smooth-shaven, intellectual face, and long black hair that lay close to his head, was kept to the rear by his ears as one keeps curtains back by brackets, and fell straight to his coat collar without a single tolerant kink or relenting curve. He had an eagle’s beak and an eagle’s eye. He was a Kentuckian by birth and rearing; he came of the oldest and best Kentucky Griswolds, and they from the oldest and proudest Griswolds of Virginia. Judge Griswold’s manners and carriage were of the courtly old-fashioned sort; he had never worked; he was a gentleman. . . .
The Judge was punctiliously honorable, austerely upright. No man wanted his bond who had got his word. He was grave even to sternness; he seldom smiled. He loved strongly, but without demonstration; he hated implacably. (S&B, 313–14)
Both Grangerford and Griswold recall some characteristics of Clemens’s own father: Judge Clemens was tall, slim, and smooth shaven, and he had elaborate manners. Like Griswold, he had roots in Virginia and Kentucky, and was stern and unsmiling. Like Grangerford, he often wore a swallow-tailed coat with brass buttons. Grangerford is also a recognizable type: the southern aristocratic gentleman, who appears in scores of nineteenth-century novels in the “plantation tradition” (Blair 1960a, 214–19; S&B, 307–9; see also the note to 146.12–17). Although Grangerford was previously described as “gray and about sixty” (133.19), here his hair is black, presumably a simple oversight.
[begin page 423]
[begin page 424]
Next Sunday we all went to church. . . . The Shepherdsons done the same.] In Life on the Mississippi (chapter 26), Mark Twain, clearly drawing on knowledge of his own, ostensibly quoted a fellow steamboat passenger who lived in the neighborhood of the Darnells and Watsons:
Both families belonged to the same church (everybody around here is religious); through all this fifty or sixty years’ fuss, both tribes was there every Sunday, to worship. They lived each side of the line, and the church was at a landing called Compromise. Half the church and half the aisle was in Kentucky, the other half in Tennessee. Sundays you ’d see the families drive up, all in their Sunday clothes, men, women, and children, and file up the aisle, and set down, quiet and orderly, one lot on the Tennessee side of the church and the other on the Kentucky side; and the men and boys would lean their guns up against the wall, handy, and then all hands would join in with the prayer and praise; though they say the man next the aisle did n’t kneel down, along with the rest of the family; kind of stood guard. (SLC 1883a, 286–87; Branch and Hirst, 42)
hogs likes a puncheon floor] In a reminiscence written in 1877, Clemens recalled the church in Florida, Missouri, near his uncle John Quarles’s farm:
There was a log church, with a puncheon floor & slab benches. A puncheon floor is made of logs whose upper surfaces have been chipped flat with the adze. The cracks between the logs were not filled; there was no carpet; consequently, if you dropped anything smaller than a peach, it was likely to go through. The church was perched upon short sections of logs, which elevated it two or three feet from the ground. Hogs slept under there, & whenever the dogs got after them during services, the minister had to wait till the disturbance was over. In winter there was always a refreshing breeze up through the puncheon floor; in summer there were fleas enough for all. (SLC 1877a, 2–3)
a couple of young chaps that was behind the wood-rank . . . found the two bodies laying in the edge of the water] Mark Twain’s model for this incident in Huckleberry Finn and in the nearly identical scene in Life on the Mississippi was manifestly the incident at Compromise, Kentucky, a flare-up in the Darnell-Watson feud, to which Clemens told Cholmondeley he had come “near being an eye-witness” (SLC to Cholmondeley, 28 Mar 85, CU-MARK; Branch and Hirst, 45). This is how he recalled it in dictation taken down by his secretary Roswell Phelps in 1882:
I was on a Memphis packet & at a landing we made on the Kentucky side there was a row. Don’t remember as there was anybody hurt then; but shortly afterwards there was another row at that place and a youth of 19 belonging to the Mo. tribe had wandered over there. Half a dozen of that Ky. tribe got after him. He dodged among the wood piles & answered their shots. Presently he jumped into the river & they followed on after & peppered him & he had to make for the shore. By that time he was about dead—did shortly die. (N&J2, 568)
[begin page 426]
[begin page 427]
Jour printer, by trade] The wandering journeyman printer was common in the antebellum South, and a recurrent rascally figure in American humor. In 1886 Clemens would recall from his days in Hannibal “the tramping ‘jour’ who flitted by in the summer and tarried a day, with his wallet stuffed with one shirt and a hatful of handbills; for if he couldn’t get any type to set he would do a temperance lecture. . . . All he wanted was plate and bed and money enough to get drunk on”
[begin page 428]
singing-geography school] In the late 1840s, Benjamin Naylor of Philadelphia introduced his new “system of teaching geography” through public demonstrations and tutorials at various public and private schools. The method used large outline maps:
The teacher with a rod points out the various parts and repeats their names, grouping several together; the class repeats the names after him; after they are somewhat familiarized with the names, they chant or sing them over repeatedly. . . . The children all join in the singing right merrily, keeping their eyes fixed upon the places on the map as he points them out. Mr. Naylor teaches the whole of what is called Geography in thirty lessons. . . . By this system the labour of years is performed, in effect, in a month, the mind is agreeably stimulated, the memory healthfully exercised, the social feeling kindly indulged, while the simple tunes which they chant, blend the class and teacher into the most cordial harmony. (Naylor, 140–41, 143)
Cyrus Edwards (1846–1939) of Kentucky recalled the “old practice of ‘Singing Geography’ ” from his schooldays: “This method of occasionally
[begin page 429]
[begin page 430]
[begin page 431]
come to the mourners’ bench! . . . be at rest!”] At camp-meeting sites, the mourners’ bench (also known as the “altar,” the “anxious seat,” or the “glory pen”) was an area immediately in front of the preachers’ stand, separated from the congregation, “where sinners under conviction were brought to experience conversion” (Bruce, 71–73). It was the job of the camp-meeting “exhorters,” usually ordained ministers, to invite sinners “to enter the pen by reminding them of the prospects of hell and damnation awaiting those who failed to take the step” (Bruce, 75; McCurdy, 160, 172). Mark Twain’s preacher uses the conventional language of salvation, reminiscent of Joseph Hart’s popular hymn, “Come Ye Sinners” (1759):
Weak and wounded, sick and sore;
Jesus ready stands to save you,
Full of pity, love and power. . . .
(Byers 1977)
[begin page 432]
[begin page 434]
pretty well down the State of Arkansaw . . . little one-horse town in a big bend] Mark Twain originally located this town, later called “Bricksville” (241.20), “in Council Bend” (MS1, 622), which was about 288 miles below Cairo, on the Arkansas side of the river (Bragg, 80, 86–87; James, 3–4). Eventually, probably on the typescript, he substituted “in a big bend” for “in Council Bend.” (Council Bend may have seemed too far north to be consistent with the raft’s progress, or perhaps Mark Twain again wanted to avoid using real names for places on the river.) He may have modeled Bricksville on Napoleon, Arkansas, 405 miles below Cairo at the confluence of the Arkansas and Mississippi rivers, a busy commercial center with as many as a thousand inhabitants during the 1840s and 1850s (Bragg, 115). The principal evidence for this identification is Mark Twain’s working note: “The Burning Shame boys give bill of sale of Jim. at Napoleon, Ark.” (Mark Twain’s Working Notes,
[begin page 435]
[begin page 437]
swarmed up the street . . . Sherburn steps out onto the roof] Sherburn, although portrayed as a villain in the previous chapter, here plays a more sympathetic role, becoming to some extent a spokesman for the author’s own viewpoint—a raisonneur whose scorn for the mob is nearly identical to feelings Clemens himself expressed in 1901:
For no mob has any sand in the presence of a man known to be splendidly brave. Besides, a lynching mob would like to be scattered, for of a certainty there are never ten men in it who would not prefer to be somewhere else—and would be, if they but had the courage to go. When I was a boy I saw a brave gentleman deride and insult a mob and drive it away; and afterward, in Nevada, I saw a noted desperado make two hundred men sit still, with the house burning under them, until he gave them permission to retire. (SLC 1923, 245)
Many narratives that the author read about the French Revolution recount the quelling of an irate mob by a forceful figure (for instance, Mirabeau, Marat, Robespierre, Danton). Mark Twain told a friend that such reading had confirmed his belief that “men in a crowd do not act as they would as individuals. In a crowd they don’t think for themselves, but become impregnated by the contagious sentiment uppermost in the minds of all who happen to be en masse” (Henry W. Fischer, 59).
all through the circus they done the most astonishing things] The comic acts Huck describes here were a traditional part of the circus in the nineteenth century. Talking clowns were a “key element”: Dan Rice (whose circus Clemens may have seen in Hannibal in 1848 and 1852) was famous for his quick rejoinders to the ringmaster, who served as the butt (Carlyon, 5–7). The “flying wardrobe act” in which the circus rider is initially disguised in the audience as a rube, often drunken, was known as “The Peasant’s Frolic” and “Countryman” in the early 1880s and thereafter as a “Pete Jenkins” act, after the title given it in the 1850s by the famous comic rider, Charles Sherwood (Thayer). Joe Pentland, another clown and rider “who cracked jokes with the ringmaster,” disguised himself as a drunken sailor and
shouted from the seats that he could ride “that danged fat nag.” Amid the jeers of ringmaster and audience the sailor mounted the circus animal, only to fall off repeatedly. But while the audience still jeered at him the sailor doffed his uniform and rode superbly in spangled tights. (May, 70–71)
Descriptions of such traditional circus acts had long been standard material in humorous writings. At least four humorists known to Clemens had written about a purported drunk’s disrobing on horseback—William T. Thompson in 1843, William Wright in 1867, George W. Harris in 1868, and Richard M. Johnston in 1881 (see Blair 1960a, 315–16).
Thrilling Tragedy of THE KING’S CAMELOPARD or THE ROYAL NONESUCH] In his manuscript Mark Twain entitled this skit “The Tragedy of the Burning Shame” and, as he recalled in 1907, it was based on an indecent entertainment he had heard Jim Gillis describe in 1865 in his cabin on Jackass Hill:
In one of my books—“Huckleberry Finn,” I think—I have used one of Jim’s impromptu tales, which he called “The Tragedy of the Burning Shame.” I had to modify it considerably to make it proper for print, and this was a great damage. As Jim told it—inventing it as he went along—I think it was one of the most outrageously funny things I have ever listened to. How mild it is in the book, and how pale; how extravagant and how gorgeous in its unprintable form! (AD, 26 May 1907, CU-MARK, in MTE, 361)
The tale’s title apparently derived from a much earlier term: “burning shame” is defined in Francis Grose’s Classical Dictionary of the Vulgar Tongue (1785) as “a lighted candle stuck into the private parts of a woman” (Grose, s.v.). Clemens acquired a copy of Grose’s dictionary in 1875 and annotated it extensively while working on The Prince and the Pauper—a book written concurrently with Huckleberry Finn. Gillis’s
[begin page 439]
[begin page 440]
[begin page 441]
[begin page 443]
Phelps’s was one of these little one-horse cotton plantations] Mark Twain explained in an autobiographical dictation that the model for the Phelps farm was his uncle John Quarles’s farm near Florida, Missouri:
My uncle, John A. Quarles, was a farmer, & his place was out in the country four miles from Florida. . . . I have never consciously used him or his wife in a book, but his farm has come very handy to me in literature, once or twice. In
[begin page 445]
The farm-house stood in the middle of a very large yard, & the yard was fenced on three sides with rails & on the rear side with high palings; against these stood the smoke-house. . . . The front yard was entered over a stile, made of sawed-off logs of graduated heights. . . .
Down a piece, abreast the house, stood a little log cabin against the rail fence. (SLC 1897–98, 36–42)
hum of a spinning-wheel . . . lonesomest sound in the whole world] In his description of the Quarles farm in his autobiography, Clemens recalled the family room of the house, which contained a “spinning-wheel . . . whose rising & falling wail, heard from a distance, was the mournfulest of all sounds to me, & made me homesick & low-spirited, & filled my atmosphere with the wandering spirits of the dead” (SLC 1897–98, 49–50). Henry Nash Smith noted that Mark Twain used his memory of the farm and the sound of the spinning wheel to even more telling effect in his fictionalized account of his brief but traumatic experience as a Confederate militiaman during the Civil War:
We staid several days at Mason’s; and after all these years the memory of the dullness, the stillness and lifelessness of that slumberous farm-house still oppresses my spirit as with a sense of the presence of death and mourning. There was nothing to do, nothing to think about; there was no interest in life. The male part of the household were away in the fields all day, the women were busy and out of our sight; there was no sound but the plaintive wailing of a spinning-wheel, forever moaning out from some distant room,—the most lonesome sound in nature, a sound steeped and sodden with homesickness and the emptiness of life. (SLC 1885f, 201; Henry Nash Smith 1962, 130–32)
[begin page 446]
[begin page 447]
[begin page 450]
[begin page 451]
[begin page 997]
[begin page 1006]
[begin page 1008]
[begin page 1032]
weak.] originally ‘weak and excited.’; ‘and excited.’ canceled and the period added after ‘weak’; followed by the passage below, which was revised in the MS and then canceled at a later stage. The superior numbers refer to Mark Twain’s revisions, which are listed following the passage: ‘But just then comes a wail out of Turner:
“O, please, boys, don’t leave me—don’t leave me to be drownded—please,1 please, boys, lemme go with you!”2
“Cuss him, he’s got his gag out, aready!” says Packard; and him and Bill jumped for the door, allowing3 they would fix it this time so it would stick4 till Christmas.’ (emended).
1. please] may have originally been ‘p-p’; ‘lease’ written over wiped-out ‘-p’.
2. you!”] the second closing quotation mark added in pencil.
3. allowing] interlined above canceled ‘swearing’, which was written over wiped-out ‘say’.
4. stick] originally ‘still’; ‘ck’ written over wiped-out ‘ll’.
So I quit.] possibly added.
[begin page 1039]
know.”] followed by a paragraph that was revised and then deleted at a later stage. The superior numbers refer to Mark Twain’s revisions, which are listed following the passage: [¶] ‘ “Dat’s so, Huck. A body can’t be too keerful. I’ll float along en1 wait. But it’s Cairo, I jes’2 knows it is.” ’ (emended).
1. en] interlined in pencil without a caret above canceled ‘and’.
2. jes’] originally ‘jess’; the apostrophe added in pencil above canceled ‘s’.
feeling . . . time.] the MS passage was revised and then replaced at a later stage. The superior numbers refer to Mark Twain’s revisions, which are listed following the passage: ‘saying to myself, I’ve done wrong again, and was trying as hard as I could to do right, too; but when it come right down to telling them it was a nigger on the raft, and I opened my mouth a-purpose to do it, I couldn’t. I am a mean, low coward, and it’s the fault of them that brung me up. If I had been raised right, I wouldn’t said anything about anybody1 being sick, but the more I try to do right, the more I can’t. I reckon I won’t ever try again, because it ain’t no sort of use and only makes me feel bad. From this out I mean to do everything as wrong as I can do it, and just go straight to the dogs2 and done with it. I don’t see why people’s put here, anyway.’ (emended).
1. anybody] follows canceled ‘the small’.
2. dogs] interlined in pencil above canceled ‘bad place’.
to] written over partly formed ‘y’.
like . . . air] the MS passage was revised and then replaced at a later stage. The superior numbers refer to Mark Twain’s revisions, which are listed following the passage: ‘so like ghosts or spirits1 talking2 and3 laughing in the air; and the voices drifted off and faded out, just the same as if they had been on the wing’ (emended).
1. ghosts or spirits] follows canceled ‘ghots or spirits’, which follows canceled ‘go’.
2. talking] follows canceled ‘fluttering’.
3. and] follows canceled ‘l’.
sung] followed in the MS by a passage that was revised and then deleted at a later stage. The superior numbers refer to Mark Twain’s revisions, which are listed following the passage: ‘it—roared it out, they did, in a most rousing way: [¶] “Am I a soldier of the cross, | A follower of the Lamb,”—1
[begin page 1056]
1. “Am I . . . Lamb,”—] interlined above canceled ‘ “Shall I be carried to the skies, | On flowery beds of ease—” ’.
2. “And . . . name?”] squeezed in at the bottom of the page to replace canceled ‘ “Whilst others fight to win the prize, | And sail through bloody seas?” ’ at the top of the following page; ‘name?” ’ followed by a canceled dash.
groaning and] followed in the MS by a passage that was revised and then deleted at a later stage. The superior numbers refer to Mark Twain’s revisions, which are listed following the passage: ‘crying, and jumping up and hugging one another, and Amens was popping off everywheres. Every little while he would preach1 right at people that he saw was stirred up: [¶] “The sperrit’s a workin’ in you brother—don’t shake him off-ah—[¶] Now is the accepted time-ah! [A-a-men!] The devil’s holt is a weakenin’ on you, sister—shake him loose, shake him loose-ah! One more shake and the2 vict’ry’s won-ah!’ (emended; see emendations for full text of deleted passage).
1. preach] follows canceled ‘tal’.
2. the] interlined.
wild.] followed in the MS by a passage that was revised and then deleted at a later stage. The superior numbers refer to Mark Twain’s revisions, which are listed following the passage: ‘One fat nigger woman1 about forty, was the worst. The white mourners2 couldn’t fend her off, no way—fast as one would get loose, she’d tackle the next one, and3 smother him.4 Next, down she went in the straw, along with the rest, and wallowed around, clawing dirt and shouting glory hallelujah same as they did.’ (emended).
1. woman] interlined above canceled ‘wench’.
2. mourners] follows canceled ‘mour’.
3. and] follows canceled ‘and most’.
4. him.] originally ‘him!’; the exclamation point canceled and the period added.
[begin page 1058]
[begin page 1064]
Jim . . . years] originally written on the bottom portion of the MS page that Mark Twain later cut into three parts when he revised and reordered his manuscript (see the entry at 203.29–30). When he cut the page apart he evidently cut out and discarded a word preceding ‘Jim’ (possibly ‘But’ or ‘Then’), thereby making ‘Jim’ appear to begin a new paragraph. At the bottom of the MS fragment, Mark Twain wrote the instruction ‘Run to 213’.
times.] followed by the passage below, which was revised in the MS and then canceled at a later stage. The superior numbers refer to Mark Twain’s revisions, which are listed following the passage: ‘Soon as he could, the duke shook the hairlip, and sampled1 Susan, which was better looking. After the king had kissed Mary Jane fourteen2 or fifteen times, he give the duke a show, and tapered off on the others.’ (emended).
1. sampled] interlined above canceled ‘tried’.
2. fourteen] written over wiped-out ‘consu’.
she had . . . cubby.] written on two added pages (MS 265-A and 265-B) to replace the following canceled passage (which ran from MS 265.10 to 266.10). The two superior numbers refer to Mark Twain’s revisions, which are listed following the passage: ‘they had two; so he said she could put his valley in the same bed with him1—meaning me. He said in England it warn’t usual for a valley to sleep with his master, but in Rome he always done the way the Romans done, and besides he warn’t proud, and reckoned he could stand Adolphus very well. Maybe he could; but I couldn’t a stood him,2 only I was long ago used to sleeping with the other kind of hogs. So Mary Jane showed us all up, and they was plain rooms but nice.’
1. him] originally ‘him’; the underline added.
2. him,] interlined above canceled ‘it’.
[begin page 1075]
[begin page 1076]
[begin page 1077]
[begin page 1078]
[begin page 1081]
[begin page 1082]
[begin page 1086]
[begin page 1088]
[begin page 1091]
[begin page 1101]
[begin page 1109]
he got . . . well.] added on a new MS page, numbered 752, to replace a canceled passage at the bottom of MS page 751, and at the top and on the verso of MS page 753 (originally 752). The canceled passage is reproduced below. The superior numbers refer to Mark Twain’s revisions, which are listed following the passage: ‘and he got a little worse every hour, and by and by out of his head,1 and when I says this, out crawls this nigger from behind the wigwam or somewheres, and says he’ll help, and the boy was mad, and told him to clear out, and said he wouldn’t have no strange niggers meddling around him, but the nigger helped anyhow, and done it very well, too. Then he pretended to leave the raft, so as to satisfy’2
1. and he . . . head,] interlined; ‘a little’ interlined within the interlineation.
2. Then he . . . satisfy] ‘Then he . . . raft,’ interlined, and ‘so . . . satisfy’ added on the verso of the MS page with instructions to turn over.
[begin page 1115]